Macramè Patterns:

5 Books in 1:
200+ Projects with HD Illustrations
to Learn How to Create Gorgeous
Handmade, Jewelry and Decoration
for Home & Garden (Basic Knots and
Tutorials Included).

Catherine Ludemberg
OceanofPDF.com
Table of Contents
Book 1
Introduction
Chapter 1: Bracelets
Chapter 2: Earrings
Chapter 3: Necklaces
Chapter 4: Rings
Chapter 5: Brooches
Chapter 6: Key Chain
Conclusion
Book 2
Introduction
Chapter 1: Introduction To Macramé
Chapter 2: Macramé Wall Hangings
Chapter 3: Macramé Lighting Projects
Chapter 4: Kitchen Macramé Patterns
Chapter 5: Other Macramé Projects For Your Home
Chapter 6: Macramé Hanging Planters
Chapter 7: Macramé Garden Umbrellas
Chapter 8: Macramé Garden Lights
Chapter 9: Other Garden Macramé Projects
Easy Macramé Jewelry
Macramé Keychains
Conclusion
Book 3
Introduction
Materials
Tools
Macrame Techniques
Ovеrhаnd Knоt
Lаrk'ѕ Hеаd Knоt
Half Knоt
Squаrе Knоt
Rереаtіng Half Knоt Sennit (Also Twіѕtіng Or Sріrаl
Knоtѕ)
Square Knоt Sennit
Square Knоt With Altеrnаtіng Fillers
Alternating Squаrе Knot
Hаlf Hіtсh Knоt
Dоublе Half Hitch Knоt
Jоѕерhіnе Knоt
Squаrе Knot Pаttеrn With Altеrnаtіng Knotters Аnd
Fillers
Calculating The Amоunt Оf Mаtеrіаl, Yоu'll Nееd
Easy Steps On How To Create Gorgeous Plant Hanger
Models For Your Homes And Garden
Easy Diy Macrame Plant Hanger
Sрrіng Mini Flоwеr Pot Mоѕѕ Dесоr
Plаnt Hаngеr Wіth 2 Tiers
Hаngіng Leather Plаntеr
Gold Dipped Hanging Planters
Hanging Planter From An Old T-Shirt
Diy Ceramic Planter
Simple Rope Plant Hanger
Diy Crосhеt Plant Hаngеr
Simple Diy Macrame Plant Hanger
Diy Upcycled Plant Hangers
Diy Hanging Water Garden
Diy Tеrrасоttа Clay Hanging Plаntеrѕ
Diy Hanging Wire Planter
Beaded Plant Hanger
Diy Hаngіng Plant Hоldеr
Diy Wаll Hаngіng Plаntеrѕ
Beaded Plant Hanger
Jutе Macrame Plаnt Hаngеr
Diy Macrame Plant Hanger
Mасrаmе Suссulеnt Hangers
Cосоnut Hanging Plаntеr
Plаnt Hаngеr + Gоld Plаnt Stand
Diy Rope Plant Hanger
Hanging Planter Using A Wood Slice
Diy Hаngіng Bаѕkеt Plаntеr Wіth Embrоіdеrу Hoops
Plant Hanger From Fabric Strips
Wooden Box Hanging Planter Diy
Diy Vertical Plant Hanger
Diy Flоаtіng Shеlf
Diy Crеѕсеnt Mооn Hаngіng Planter
Diy Wоvеn Hаngіng Plаntеrѕ
Diy Cement Hanging Plаntеrѕ
Slouchy Leather Sling Planter
Diy Hanging Plаnt Lamp
Quick & Easy Diy Vertical Gаrdеn
Diy Kirigami Lеаthеr Plаnt Hаngеr
Diy Macrame Plant Holder Using T-Shirt Yarn
Diy Mini Macrame Plant Hanger
Diy Macrame Pot Plant Hanger
Easy Kid-Friendly Macrame Planters
Simple Hanging Vase
Little Nicki’s Simple Knotted Plant Hanger
Diy Macrame Mason Jar Hanging Planter
Diy Macrame Pom Pom Hanging Planter
Diy Modern Macrame Hanging Planter
Easy Beaded Macrame Plant Hanger
Macrame Jute Rope Plant Hanger
Diy Beaded Macrame Plant Hanger
Macrame Potted Plant Hanger
10 Minute Macrame Plant Hanger Diy
 Quick And Easy Hanging Macrame Planter
Simple Modern Macrame Plant Hanger
How To Make A Macrame Terrarium Plant Hanger
Conclusion
Book 4
Introduction
Section 1
A Basic Introduction To Macramé For Beginners
How To Start A Macramé Wall Hanging
Basic Knots To Master
Half And Double Half Hitch Knots
How To Hang A Large Macramé Wall Design
Section 2
20 Diy Macramé Wall Hanging Projects
(With Hd Illustrations To Create Wall Hanging Models To
Decorate Your Home & Garden)
1: Diy Macramé Wall Hanging (#1)
2: Diy Macramé Wall Hanging (#2)
3: Diy Macramé Wall Hanging (#3)
4: Diy Macramé Wall Hanging (#4)
5: Diy Mini Macramé Wall Hanging (#5)
6: Home Woven Wall Hanging In 5 Minutes
7: Macramé Fiber Wall Art
8: Macramé Wall Hanging In 20 Minutes
9: Diy Macramé Wall Hanging (#6)
10: Macramé Christmas Wreath
11: Diy Ring Wall Hanging
12: Diy Yarn Wall Hanging
13: Yarn Leftovers Wall Hanging
 14: Copper Wool Roving Macramé Wall Hanging
15: Yarn Wall Hanging
16: Diy Yarn Wall Hanging In 30 Minutes
17: Diy Macramé Plant Hanger
18: Diy Macramé Wall Hanging (#7)
19: Diy Modern Yarn Hanging
20: Diy Modern Macramé Wall Hanging
Conclusion
Book 5
Introduction
Chapter 1: What Is Macrame And What Is Its Origin
Chapter 2: The Benefits Of Learning Macramé
Chapter 3: Getting Started
Chapter 4: Basic Macramé Knots
Chapter 5: Macramé Patterns
Conclusion

OceanofPDF.com
Introduction
If you’ve been wondering how to expand your knowledge of
macramé to other areas where you make beautiful pieces,
keep reading…
This book will show you how to make a wide array of
macramé jewelry!s
It is true; plant hangers and wall hangings are not the only
things you can make with macramé. You can make all
manner of jewelry – from earrings, bracelets, necklaces,
rings, brooches, and so much more!
So how exactly do you make these with macramé?
Where do you start?
Which knots do you use to make all these jewelry pieces?
You will find all the answers to these and other related
questions inside this book, as it goes straight to covering
all manner of macramé jewelry projects that will instantly
ensure you make elegant jewelry pieces!
So, without much further ado, let us get right to it!

OceanofPDF.com
Chapter 1: Bracelets
Project 1: Shambhala Style Bracelet
Most common bracelets have one bead across the middle.
This project uses two beads running in a zig-zag/back and
forth style.

Materials Required
Beadelle emerald candy beads (10mm round beads)
24k gold plated metal beads (10mm round beads)
1-and-a-half-millimeter waxed cotton cord (Six-foot and
three-feet length)
Masking tape
E6000 glue
Scissors/flush cutters
Procedure
First, take the six and three feet and fold them in half.
Next, take the middle of your longer piece and place it
under the shorter piece (remember to leave a loop on top).
Next, tie your knot around the loop by taking your left
string and bringing it over your right string and, finally,
through the loop.

Next, pull it tight about an inch from the top.

Next, make six square knots.
Next, get a flat surface and tape that part down.

Next, string the beads onto the center cords. String them
separately first

Next, grab the other short cord and string the same
number of beads.
Next, tape the center cords down to your flat work surface.
Remember to give yourself a little bit of play room.

Next, take one of the longer cords and wrap it underneath

the top left bead but above the top right bead
Next, take the right strand and wrap it underneath the
bead and then go round between each bead.
TIP: Do not let the beads to move too far down. Keep them
tightly together.
Next, while holding the completed section with one hand,
use the other hand to wrap the other way. The concept we
have used is the same. Start by skipping the first bead on
the left and go round.

Un-tape the center strands and make another square knot.

Be careful not to twist the center strands. Also, make sure
that the number of square knots is the same as those you
did earlier on the top side.
Next, pull your tape up and finish up the square knot. To do
this, take the loose strands and tie a regular knot.

Next, at the back, put some glue inside the normal knot you
just made. I use E6000 because it will hold it well and keep
it from falling apart after it is worn. Remember to put the
glue right at the base. After doing this, attach and pull
tight.

Next, leave around six inches and cut off the cords.

Next, tie a little overhand knot at the very end.

Finally, cut off the loose cords (but do this after letting it
rest for a few hours so that the glued part can be dry
enough).
This should be your end result.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 2: 8-Wrap Kumihimo Braid
Bracelet

Materials Required
Round Kumihimo foam disc
Two packages of colored mix rat tails (3mm each)
1 packet of bobbins – eight pieces (2-and-a-half inches)
A weight (this will help us have an even braid)
Masking tape
Scissors
Dome-shaped bead caps
Round-nose pliers
Procedure
First, take one packet of cords (it should have four different
colors) and take one end. Do the same with the other
packet of colors.
Next, thread them through one end of your weight and tie
an overhand knot.

Next, take the long part of your cord and thread it through
the center of the Kumihimo disk.
Next, use the Kumihimo disk’s black dots as the starting
points.

Next, put two wide threads on either side and the other two
wide cords on the opposite sides. Consequently, the narrow
threads should take the opposite sides.
Next, wind your excess thread up in your bobbins. You can
keep the cord from unrolling by rolling down the edge to
snap it into place.

Next, take the thread on the lower left-hand side, remove it

from its slot, and move it up to the slot between 30 and 31.
That means it will be to the left of the two uppermost
Next, take the thread to the right side and move it down to
the right.

To avoid confusion, all you will do is turn the disk (give the
disk a clockwise quarter turn) and do what we did. The
basic movement is bottom left to top left, then top left-right
to bottom right.

This is what you should have.

After doing this, take it off the disk and cut the loose cords.

Next, take the non-braided part, squeeze tightly and tape

the end.
Next, take a bead and insert it into the bead cup going
outwards.
Next, take a pair of round nose pliers and make a wrapped
loop

Next, cut off the taped part to about a quarter-inch.

Next, insert the bead cup. Do this by taking the E6000 glue
and applying a generous amount at the end, then fitting it
in. Press the cap in and remove any excess glue. Let the
cap sit for a few hours to dry off well. Do the same to the
other end of the bracelet.

Once dry, add a clasp. To do this, open your jump ring and
add it to one-half of your bracelet. Twist the bottom part of
the clasp and thread it through the other half part of the
bracelet. Finally, twist it shut.
This should be your end product.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 3: Basic Cobra Paracord
Bracelet

Materials Required
Basic disposable lighter
Parachute cord (two-colored and each is two lengths)
6-inch plastic buckles
Flush cutters
Procedure
First, take your buckle, separate it, then take one end of
the cords and pass it through the buckle hole. Make sure
the cords are half in size.

Next, take one of the center cords and pull it more than the
others. This should give you a bit of tail.
Take the tail and bring it through the female end of the
buckle. Kindly do not pull it all the way out.

Next, tie a lark’s head knot. To do this, pull the ends

through the loop

Next, tighten the knot.

Next, attach the blue cord to the green cord. One of the
ways to attach these two cords is to heat the two sides
together with a lighter and smoosh them together.

Next, pull the outside of the cords till you see the core
threads. Next, trim the visible core threads. Do the same
for the blue cords.
Next, fuse the edges of the cut edge of the blue cord. Once
done, enter the heated edge of the blue cord into the green
edge.

Next, fuse the joint edges.

So far, this is what you should have.

Next, make a cobra knot/square knot. Do this by taking
your left strand (blue in color) and bringing it over the
center strands. Next, take the right strand and bring it over
the tail of the left hand and bring it behind and up through
the loop and pull both sides.

Next, do the same but use the opposite cords. Instead of

starting with the blue cord, start with the green. Alternate
until you reach the buckle.
Next, cut the loose edges and melt them with your lighter.

This should be your end result.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 4: Basic Friendship Bracelet

Required materials
S-Lon nylon cord (5 different colors, and I will use 2
strands of each color)
A pair of scissors
Masking tape
Procedure
First, start by cutting your threads (2 of each) and put them
side by side.
Tie an overhand knot several inches from the end but
ensure your pattern is intact.

Take some masking tape and tape the top part.

Start with the leftmost strand. Pull it to the left and the
others to the right. Next, do a half hitch knot.
To do this knot, take the second strand to the right and tie
all the way across underneath the next strand to the right
to form a number four. Next, bring it back to the left and
through the loop, and finally, tighten it.
Repeat the same process on the same strands, then, with
the strand on your right hand, take the next strand and do
the same. Once done with one row, continue with the same
pattern all over again.

This should be your bracelet so far.

You do not need to knot the full length; you can leave it as I
did mine.
Once satisfied, tie another overhand knot just like you did
initially.

Next, trim the loose cords and make another knot with one
group of cords with the other.
Next, loosen the knots and apply glue.

Finally, trim off the edges as short as you would like.

This should be your end product.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 5: Beaded Hemp Bracelet

Materials Required
Matubo beads
Hemp cord
Mini macramé board
A pair of scissors
Ruler
Procedure
First, take a ruler and measure a cord 3 feet long.

Next, add five more feet.

Next, take the end of the five-foot cord and start weaving
from the loop side. Do the same with the three-foot cord.

Pick the loops and make an overhand knot.

Next, using the macramé board, set the loop on one of the
notches

Next, make square knots.

After two- or three-square knots, put your beads through
the center cords.

Next, make two square knots and repeat this pattern till
you complete the bracelet.
Next, gather all your cords together and make two
overhand knots.

The knot should fit in the hoop like this.

Next, cut off the loose cords to about an inch.

This is the product you should have.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 6: A “Rip Ride” Paracord
Survival Bracelet

Materials Required
Cord (Tar Heel blue six feet cord)
Scissors
Lighter
Procedure
First, thread the two colors of cords through the buckle.
Then make a cow’s hitch knot.
Take the ends, flip the buckle then thread it.

If you get unsure of how long you would like your piece to
be, you could use something to measure them. I used an
already done bracelet.

Next, make a loop from top to bottom.

After doing the knotting, you should have this pattern.

Next, cut off and melt of the edges.

This should be your end piece.

OceanofPDF.com
Chapter 2: Earrings
Project 7: Modern Macramé Earrings

Materials Required
A pair of scissors
Glue
Pet brush
Pliers
Cotton cord
Two jump rings
Two hoops
Hooks for the earrings
Procedure
First, measure the cord (I used four inches of cord) and get
six pieces.
Take each cut piece and cut it in half to give you around
3mm cords.
Next, take each piece and fold it in half, put the tip over the
ring, and do a lark’s head knot. To do that, pull the two
strands through the loop (ensure that they are even) and
pull it tight. Repeat this to all the strands.
For the last cord, make one side longer than the other.

Next, tape them down on a flat working surface.

Next, take the longer cord and make knots on each of the
other cords.
Ensure you do the knots two times.

Cut the cords short (or leave them as they are).

Next, comb them out.

Tighten the remainder of the long cord and cut it.

After you cut that long cord, put some glue on it.
This should be your end product.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 8: Macramé Oriental Earrings

Materials Required
3 cord threads of 40cm in length
2 cord threads of 50cm in length
A small ear stud
2 small beads with a diameter 3mm
Clamp
Procedure
First, thread a 40cm long ribbon cord into the ear stud.

Next, clamp the stud under a clamper.

Pick up a bead and thread it through the two cords.

Next, make two rib knots after the bead is way up to the
stud.
Next, add another band (the 40cm cord), make a loop, and
thread it under the left strand near the ends.
Take the right part strand from the knot you just made and
make another knot.
Make the same knot on the lower-left cord (the cord you
will hold with your left hand). Next, push the knots towards
the stud. Ensure you do not fasten them too tightly because
you will at some point need to push them, as we have seen).

Take another cord and repeat the process above.

Next, clamp that whole side and move to the right strand.
Next, take two strands from each side and separate them.
You should have the following:

Next, make a square knot using the two lower strands.

Take two strands on the left and make two knots. Repeat
this all through.
Next, take two strands in the middle left and right. Start
with the left two – make two knots. After that take the right
strands and do the same.

Next, take two middle strands and put a bead

Next, clamp the topmost two strands. Next, take the left
two strands and make the same knots we have been
making. Basically, we are repeating the pattern.
At this point, you should have half of the completed
earring.

Clamp your piece sideways. Then make around eight knots.

Turn to the other side and do the same. Ensure the number
of knots is the same.

Next, rotate the piece, clamp it, and knot the bottom part
of the earring.
Next, knot one of the longer cords using one of the short
cords.
With that part attached to the lower part, take the
outermost two strands and start knotting.

Once done with that side, work on the other.

From this point, we will repeat the first part of this project.
You should be having this at the end of the knotting.

Next, cut the loose ends.

Finally, burn off the edges with a lighter.

The following should be your end product.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 9: Colourful Micro-Macramé
Earrings

Materials required
8 pieces of turquoise cord
8 dark green cords
4 silver cords
0.8cm waxed cord
2 white pieces of cord
2 earring hooks
2-three cm hoops
28 2mm beads
4 4mm beads
Procedure
Using the hoop, make a reverse lark’s head knot.
Make another reverse lark’s knot, then take a strand and
loop it back through the hoop.

Do the same for the other knot on the left.

Do the same for the other colors.

Next, pin the hoop to the working surface.

Next, take the middle white cords and thread a bead.

Start working from the left side and do a double-half hitch

knot.
Please note that you will be using the cord on your right
hand to knot all the other cords until you reach the center.

Once at the center, knot one-half of the center-beaded knot.

Leave it at that for now.

Next, take the right side and do the same.
Once at the middle, pull the left side and then the left navy-
blue string over the right. Next, you will loop the right side
over the left. Remember to loop it twice.

Go back to the left and right sides and make the initial
double half hitch knot.

The right cord will be the lead strand when you get to the
center. Pull it over the left and loop the left string over with
a double half-hitch to end the row.
Go back to the sides and start knotting.

Once in the middle, tackle it the same way we did before.

Basically, this is all you have to do until we finish.
Once the earring size satisfies you, it is time to bead it. Use
two cords for each bead.

For finishing, do a double half-stitch for each pair of

strands.

Next, cut off the loose strands.

Finally, burn off the edges.

This is what you should have:

OceanofPDF.com
Project 10: 4 Minute Simple Macramé
Earrings

Materials Required
40cm strands of 0.8mm waxed cord (15 cords per earring)
2 teardrop-shaped metal hoops (2.2cm by 3.2cm)
2, 3mm metal beads
Hooks
Jewelry pliers
Safety pins
Pillows
Procedure
Start by making reverse larks knots.

Pin your hoop to the pillow.

Make a double half hitch knot. Start on the left-hand side
and work down towards the middle. Do the same on the
right-hand side.

Take one of the strings off of each side then you will do the
same knots on the other cords.

Do the same for the right side.

Make knots (2 by 2) for the center strands from the left. To
do this, pull the left-hand strand and do a double-half hitch.
After doing this, take the two center strands and thread a
bead.

Next, take the center-left strand and knot as you go to the

right (use a double half hitch stitch).

Next, trim off the edges.

Finally, melt the edges.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 11: Semi-Circle Macramé
Earrings

Materials Required
A pair of sharp scissors
1.5-inch wood semi-circle (a pair)
4 pieces of 20-inch long 3mm or 8 pieces of 20 inches
1.5mm cords
Pet brush or comb
Masking tape
Procedure
First, split the cord in half to make it 1.5mm.
Using the lark’s head knot, fold the first cord in half and
knot the hoop.

Attach another cord to the previous knot. Ensure they are

both center-placed.
Attach the earring piece to the surface so that it does not
move. This project will use masking tape, but you can use
pins or cork boards.

Next, make double half hitch knots.

To remind you how to do it, pull cord number 2 to the right
(this will be your working cord). Then, wrap cord number 3
under and around cord number 2 and pull tightly. Ensure
cord number 2 remains at a right angle. You should have
the following so far:

Repeat the knot.

Next, take cord number three and hold it to the right at
some angle. This will push cord number 4 under and
around. Pull it tightly and repeat the same process twice.
Next, attach the cord to your earring by wrapping the end
through the front and around through the loop. Pull tight.
Create a new lark’s head. Fill the hoop considerably, then
secure it once more.

Continue around the cords using double half stitch knots.

Remember to knot each cord twice. Once in the end, wrap
the cord through the front and around the back. Then take
the cord from the back through the loop towards you.
You will have two rows. Add a lark’s head knot at the far
left.

Secure the piece and add another row of the double hitch
knot. Remember to loop the knot as we did for the other
row and pull tight. You will have three rows.
Next, trim around the circle to a height you fancy.

Next, comb it then trim it.

You should have this:

OceanofPDF.com
Chapter 3: Necklaces
Project 12: Macramé Necklace with
Pendant

Materials Required
For the pendant, you will need:
1 mm waxed cord (2 pieces should be 40 inches, and one
extra piece should be 80 inches)
Pendant/Stone (For better results, use a small to medium
size)
For the necklace, you will need:
1mm waxed cord (2 pieces should be 43 inches, and one
extra piece should be 12 inches)
Metal Beads (For this project, the beads are 4mm, and I
will use two pieces)
Other tools include:
Gaslighter
A pair of scissors
Pins
Clip
Tape measure
Procedure
Fold your cord (two pieces) in half, measure the stone, and
assess if it fits.
Take another cord (for this project, it is the blue cord) and
measure 4 inches, fold it in half, then knot both strands of
the yellow cord.

Once done with one set, re-do the same until you get this
pattern.
Next, while making sure that the stone is facing up, wrap
the pattern you have just made around the stone.

Get the center of the wrapped pattern, take the top white
cords, and make a double knot.
Flip the pattern and fit in the stone. Then make a double
knot.

Secure the pendant with pins. Next, make a double hitch

knot.
Repeat the same pattern and knotting style for around 1
inch.
Fold the knotted part and make another double hitch knot.
Turn it and make the same knot.

Wrap the white strands around the pendant holder. Strap

one strand in a clockwise motion and the other in an anti-
clockwise motion.
Make it thick, just like mine is below:

Make a triple knot. Then, cut off the loose white strands
you have just used to knot the pendant holder. Next, cut off
the other loose strands.
Burn/melt the edges.

This is what you should have so far.

Put the pendant aside and begin working on the necklace.

Take 2x110cm or 43 inches of cord and from its edges,
thread a bead.

Next, make a knot an inch from the edge, then push the
bead back to its edge. Then, make another knot.

Cut the loose cord, and melt the edges.

Tape/clamp the cord down on your working area, twist both
of the cords counter-clockwise separately, then turn them
together clockwise.
Keep doing the same until you have 5 inches from the tip
below.

Once at the tip, make a knot.

Go back to your pendant and thread it.

Next, add a bead.

Next, make a knot and tighten it. Then cut the loose
threads and melt them.
This is what you should have so far.
Clamp half of the cord, then take 1 strand of cord (12
inches) and make four to five knots. Next, cut the edges of
the 12-inch strand.
Melt the edges.

This should be you end product.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 13: A Canal Stone Necklace

Materials Required
Cords (one cord should be 2x40cm and the other 2x10cm)
A stone (the stone should be 2cm in width and 3cm long)
Procedure
Place the 2 tapes on your working surface and clamp their
top in the middle.
Use one of the shorter straps (ensure that the loop’s end is
five to ten centimeters long), then make a knot.

Do the same to the right strand. Next, clamp the shorter

strands.
Take the right strands from the two cords and make knots.

Take the left strands and make knots.

Criss-cross the strands, then knot, just like we did before
(right to right strands and left to left strands).
Stretch your pattern out.

Enclose the stone with the pattern and clamp them both.
After securing the pendant, make more double hitch knots.
Place it upright and cut off the short threads.

Twist the threads (2by2) and make a knot an inch from the
end of the strands.
Cut and melt the tips.

About 2 inches from the tips, take a cord and make a

double hitch knot. Next, cut the edges and melt them.
This should be your end result.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 14: Gold-Macramé Necklace

Materials Required
30-inch gold chain
2 studs
3mm single twist cotton cords (6 strands)
Comb
Scissors
Masking tape
Procedure
Center the chain cords (keep your finger on the center).
Next, tape it down near the center for you to identify the
center easily.
Attach the cord to the necklace using a lark’s head knot.

Add another knot.

Take off the masking tape

Add the other cords.

Create a “V” effect using a double half hitch knot.

Turn to the other end.

Join the two cords (right and left) with double knots.
Next, make vertical double half hitch knots. For these
knots, use the first cord as your working cord throughout
the pattern.
Start from the other end and do the same.

Continue with the same pattern.

Trim the edges of the cords, then comb them.

Trim the edges.

Fix in the stud.
This should be your end result.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 15: Celtic Pendant Paracord
Necklace

Materials Required
Cord
Breakaway barrel connectors
Scissors
Lighter
Procedure
First, find your center

Make a crossover by making a loop.

From this point, all you will be doing is doing opposite
loops. So, if you do a loop on the right, you will do the
opposite loop on the right.
So far, you should have this…

Next, tighten the knots. This runs on the same concept. If

you do a knot on the left, you will have to do the same on
the right. The best way to tighten the pattern is to start at
the center.
As you pull/tighten the cords, remember to keep holding
the center. Also, remember you start at the center and
trace your way back to the cord’s tip.
Your tightening should end like this:

Next, cut your loose cord.

Next, melt the edges.

Next, fix your breakaway barrel connectors.

This should be your end result.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 16: Sailor’s Knot Technique
Necklace

Materials Required
Two cords
Bells
Glue
Procedure
First, take the ends of your two cords.

Make a ring upwards.

Pass threads down, then pass it over.

Next, take it through the loop.

Do the same on the left side.

This is what you should have:

Next, cut the cord according to your preferred necklace

height, then fix the bell. For this task, I will use glue.

This should be your final product:

OceanofPDF.com
Project 17: Rune Stone Pendant

Materials Required
Cord (around 6 inches)
Scissors
Lighter
Procedure
First, put the ends of the cord together. Then slide one end
(this will make one strand longer than the other); next,
make a loop.
Ensure that the shorter strand is on the left side, then slide
the loop on your middle finger. Next, weave the longer cord
around your fingers.

Weave the cord three times.

Next, weave in the other cord by passing the cord through

the fingers.
This is what you should have.

Continue weaving.
Start pulling from the long cord.
Work on the cords by laying them on top of each other, then
take the right cord and loop around it, then cross it and
repeat the same pattern one more time.
Do the same for the other side.
Trim and melt the edges.

This should be your end piece.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 18: Macramé L.E.D. Collar

Material Required
LED. Collar
Cord (16 to 18 feet)
Scissors
Lighter
Procedure
Make a salmon knot. Start right up at the top.
After working all through to the bottom, you should have
this
Next, trim and melt off the edges.

This should be your final piece.

OceanofPDF.com
Chapter 4: Rings
Project 19: Macramé Ring

Materials Required
8 threads of cord measuring 35cm
1 bead measuring 8mm
2 beads measuring 2.5mm
Procedure
First, start by grabbing the cords in the middle so that the
lower half is 3 to 4cm long. Next, clip the topmost side of
the cords.
Next, divide three strands to the left and three strands to
the right.

Make double half hitch knots on the center strands.

Take one of the threads on the left band and make another
knot.

Continue the same for the other two strands left.

Clip the done parts, then start with the left strand and work
towards the right.
Get one strand on the loose and one on the right and make
a knot. Do the same for the other side.
Now, turn to the middle strands

Place the right one diagonally and bead it.

Take the right strand beside the beaded strand, place it

diagonally, then make a knot.
Take the strand that is sticking out and attach it to the last
strand on the left
Take the two strands in the middle and make a knot

Separate the left four strands and take 2. Do the same to

the right bunch of strands.
Take the two right strands and make knots.

Do the same to the other two strands.

Take the middle strands and make knots.

Clip the strands you have just worked on and work on the
two right strands.

Take the strand to the right and make a knot.

Move to the next strand to the right.

Take the left two strands and make three knots. Next,
crisscross the strands and make three more knots.

Clip all threads except the right two strands. Then make
four knots.
Take the third strand to the left and make knots. Next, do
that to the fourth.

Repeat the knotting to the two rights strands.

Separate the strands and bead the center strands.
Crisscross the beaded strand with the strand to the right.

Next, take the next strand to the tight and make a knot.
If you turn the pattern, you will notice one loose strand.

Take that strand and the next one to the left and make a
double knot.

Take the next strand to the left and make a double knot.
Go back to the center strands, take the two right strands
and make a double knot. Next, take the other two and make
a double knot.
Take the middle two and make a double knot.

This is what you should have so far.

Repeat the pattern just as we have done. Once done, you

should have the following:

Next, cut the edges. You are only cutting the side edges.
Take the left two strands and make a double knot. Next,
crisscross the same cords and make another double knot.
Next, do the same to the two right cords. Take the center
cords and do the same.
This is what you should have so far

Cut the two strands on the outer part of the pattern.

Take the pattern off the clip and melt the cut edges.

Now, repeat all the steps we have gone through to the

other side.
This is what you should have

Hold your ring with a clip, then crisscross the strands and
make knots.

After making the knots on both sides, cut off the loose
threads.
Melt off the edges next.

This should be your end product.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 20: Sun Ring

Materials Required
Cord
Cord
Scissors
Clipboard
Lighter
Procedure
Take three cords and find the middle. Next, clip it to your
board.

Separate the three loose strands and bead the center

strand.
Next, take the left strand and bead it. Use 3 beads.

Do the same to the right strand.

Next, clip the center strand.

Next, make knots

Make a knot at the edge of the right strand.
Next, continue with making the other knots as before.

Next, unplug the clipped strands and change sides.

Remember to stick the center strand to a clip as we did
before.
Make a knot to the edge of the right-side strand. Then
make the same knots we made before.

So far, you should have the following pattern.

Next, take the center strands and make a simple knot.
If you tighten the loose strand and the center strand, your
ring should be able to tighten too.
Next, trim the loose strands and melt their edges.
Your ring is now ready!
OceanofPDF.com
Project 21: Macramé Ring

Materials Required
Cords
Scissors
Lighter
Clipboard
Procedure
Take 6 cords, measuring 70cm, fold them in half and clip
one half to your clipboard.
Mark two center strands by making a loose loop.

Take the central knots and make a central knot.

Next, work towards your right.

Put those strands aside and do the same to the left side.

Next, bead the center threads.

Next, make knots from left to right.

Once in the middle, start from the right and head towards
the center.

Next, make a knot at the center.

Next, take a cord (different color) and make a knot from
the left.

Next, bead the new strand (in my case, it is the green

color).
Clip in the three left strands, and with the green color as
your main color, make knots towards the right.

Go back to the left and begin the pattern all over again.
Once at the center, go back to the left and make another
pattern.

Repeat the pattern.

Go to the right and do the same.

Make a small central knot.

Go back to the left and make a knot heading to the center.

Do the same to the right side.

Unclip the piece, turn it, and do all we have done so far to
the other end. You should have this:
Next, trim the edges (the loose edges at the center of the
piece). Next, melt the cut edges.
We are almost there:

To finish up, clip the almost-finished ring to the clip, take

the two center knots, and make a knot.

Using the right-center strand, make knots heading to the

right. Do the same to the left side.
Turn the ring and do the finishing to the other side.

Finally, trim and melt the edges.

This should be your end product.

OceanofPDF.com
Chapter 5: Brooches
Project 22: Safety Pin Brooch

Materials Required
A large safety pin
6x75cm cord
Sticky tape
Hairbrush
Scissors
Procedure
First, attach 6 cords to the safety pin starting from the
halfway point using a lark head knot
Secure the pin to your working surface using masking tape.

Take the first four cords and make a triple square knot

Next, take the next four cords and make another triple
square knot.

Take the next and do a triple square knot.

Exclude two cords from either side

Make a row of 2 square knots.

Exclude 4 cords on either side and make one square knot in

the middle.
This is what you should have so far.

Take the left end cord and run it to the other point using a
double half stitch. Remember to take each cord over the
diagonal cord twice until you reach the middle.

Repeat the same for the opposite side.

This is what you should have:

Trim the loose cords to your desired length, then brush

them out.

Trim once more.

This should be your final product.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 23: Cute Macramé Brooch

Materials Required
Cord
7.5cm brooch
Pillow
Scissors
Procedure
Clip in the brooch to a pillow. Next, thread the pins by
making knots.
Make knots from the left. Once at the center, go back to the
left and do it all over again.
Leave it at that and tackle the right side.

This is what you should have so far:

Start on the right and make knots heading to the left.

Lift the complete section back and then tackle the other
side.
This is the result so far:

Switch the bottom part to make it this way

Fold one piece of threads and use one at the side to roll the
others together.

Pass the thread through the loop.

Finally, trim the edges.

This is the final product!

OceanofPDF.com
Project 24: Macramé OWL Safety Pin
Brooch

Materials Required
8cm brooch
Wooden beads
Stick 8cm
4mm cotton cords
Procedure
First, pin the pin into place, then thread it with 6 pieces of
cord.
Take four strands from the left and make knots.

Skip the first two strands on the left, then repeat the
pattern above. Leave the last two strands.
Go back to the two strands on the left and make 6 knots.

Do the same to the left two strands.

Thread the wooden beads.
Knot the middle cords.

Next, cover the beads next.

Do the same to the right side.
So far, you should have this:

Make a double knot on the center of four strands (make the

knots on two strands each).

Work on the center strands.

This is your piece so far:

From the left, make knots

Push the knot to the edge.

Do the same on the right.

Take the 4th and the 5th strand from the left and make
double knots towards the left.

Take the 4th and 5th strands to the right and do the same.
Next, take two strands from each side and make knots with
loops just like we did earlier.

Repeat the left to right and right to left knots for the next
two rows.

This is what you should have

Take the stick and put a knot on both sides.
Finally, trim off the edges.

OceanofPDF.com
Chapter 6: Key Chain
Project 25: Wristlet Key Chain
Semicircle Pattern

Materials Required
Cord
Clip
Keyring/Keyholder
Procedure
First, make a double half hitch knot (clove hitch).
From the left side, make lark’s head knots.
Go to the right and do the same.

This is what you should have so far.

Take the middle strands, then make double hitch knots.

Go back to the left side and make double half hitch knots.
Then go to the right and do the same.
Next, work on the middle strands.

Continue with the pattern. You should have this.

Next, work on the key ring.
Make double half hitch knots

Put a pin right above the knot. Take the next two strands
and do the same.
From the left, make double half hitch knots.

Do the same for the strands on the right.

Work on the center strands next.

Next, reposition the pins to the sides and continue with the
knotting.

From the right side, use lark’s head knot. Do the same to
the left strands.
If you continue with this pattern, you will have the
following so far:

Fold it in half and make a gathering knot.

Next, trim the edges.
The following should be your final finished piece.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 26: Key Chain Example 2

Materials Required
1.25in/3cm keychain
3mm braided cotton cord
Scissors
Procedure
First, attach all 4x48in/122cm cords using a lark’s head
knot.

Using the 4th cord as a filler, make three diagonal clove

hitch knots to the left.
To do a diagonal clove hitch knot, let us remind ourselves
how to do the knot perfectly, shall we?
First, make the outermost right cord to be you’re your filler
cord.
Next, take the outermost cord from under your filler cord,
cross it over your filler cord, and head towards the left.

Next, pull your working cord tightly to the upper right of

your filler cord.

Repeat the same process.

Finally, pull to tighten your cord.

With the knot learned, let us go back to the project. Apply

the same concept.
Repeat the same on the right side.

This is what you should have so far:

Using the 5th cord as a filler, make 3 diagonal clove hitch

knots to the left.

Using the 5th cord, make 2 diagonal clove hitch knots to

the right.
Use the second cord as the filler and make 2 diagonal clove
hitch knots, starting with the second cord to the right.

Do the same on the right. So far, you should have the

following pattern:

Take the center cords (2 cords) and make a knot.

Next, make knots heading to the right.

Repeat the same.

Next, make the same knots on the opposite sides.

This is what you should have:

Next, work on the center strands using the same knots.

Work on the outer patterns both on the right and left.

Continue with the pattern. You should have this.

Trim off the long piece of strand and use it to make a

gathering knot of around 8 inches.
Finally, trim off the edges.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 27: Paracord Keyfob Keychain
– DNA Wrapture Design

Materials Required
Cord
Keychain
Scissors
Lighter
Procedure
First, get the center of the cord. Next, measure around 5
inches
Next, take the right strand and make a loop that goes over
the top of the center strands and cross over to the left side.
Next, take the left cord and bring it over the other cord and
take it behind the center strands.

Next, take the cord you were working with and take it
through the right loop.

Put that cord down then take another cord and feed the
two loops.
Put on the key chain and feed the second loop.

Put the two ends together to make a loop

Tighten the loops.

Next, make cobra knots.
Next, finish the piece by first cutting one set of colored
cords, then making a loop. Next, cut the cords further and
melt the edges off.
Next, take the last cord through the loop and tighten it.
Repeat the same, then tighten it.

Trim off and melt the edges.

This should be your final product.

OceanofPDF.com
Project 28: Paracord Buddy Keychain

Materials Required
Cord
Scissors
Keychain
Procedure
First, feed it through the keyring.
Next, add the arms by making double half hitch knots.

Continue knotting downwards.

Cut the arms but make sure they do not pass the bottom.

Next, make a knot right at the edge of the arms.

Work on the legs. To do this, trim the legs, and make a knot
near the edge (choose any size you want).

This is what you should have as your final piece.

OceanofPDF.com
Conclusion
By now, I am sure you are now well versed with the basic
macramé jewelry knots and projects. Now all you need to
do is try more designs because who knows? You might just
come up with new designs that will keep eyes glued to your
pieces!

OceanofPDF.com
 Macramé Patterns for
Beginners
The Newest Guide With 30 Gorgeous
Macramé Projects Illustrated To Create
Your Unique Handmade and Decorations
For Home and Garden, Including Detailed
Knots Tutorials and Techniques

Catherine Ludemberg
OceanofPDF.com
 Introduction
Have you been looking for ways to add some creative style
to your home without overspending on decorations?
Would you like to learn a simple skill that will come in
handy as you decorate your house and garden?
Have you ever wanted to know how to hand-make crafts
using nothing but some yarn and your hands?
Well, if you answered yes, then this book is right up your
alley.
This book will teach you the most basic and popular knots
used in macramé, giving you the knowledge you need to
create any design you like without too much hassle. The
book will also share a wide variety of patterns you can try
out to develop your crafting skills.
In this book, we’ll cover:
Macramé wall hangings
Kitchen macramé
Indoor lighting macramé
Macramé outdoor umbrella
Garden lighting macramé
Macramé hanging planters
And so much more!
If you are ready to start learning and creating, let’s get
started:

OceanofPDF.com
 Chapter 1:
Introduction to Macramé
Macramé entails using various knots to make a complete
design. It’s a simple craft that only requires your hands and
some yarn or rope.
You can purchase macramé cording from in-store craft
retailers and online, where you can get it in various
thicknesses and colors. Beginners are better off with
single-strand cotton (3-4mm) because its simple to tie into
knots and unravel when you make an error.
To get into this artform, the first thing you need to master
is knots. Let’s focus on that now:

Basic Macramé Knots

Here are the most common macramé knots:
1: Larks Head Knot
This knot is among the most fundamental knots in this
craft. In truth, nearly all gorgeous completed macramé
designs begin with Lark’s head knot. The most common use
of this decorative knot is attaching the cording to a handle,
dowel, or ring when beginning a macramé pattern.
How to make Larks Head knot
Grab your cording, then bend into halves. Position the loop
above and to the back of the dowel. Yank the tails of the
cording across the loop, then tighten it.
Vertical larks head knot
To create a vertical Larks Head, knot on the right side by
bending the right cording at the front of the left cording to
form the shape of an “L.” Take the tail of the right cording
and pass it behind, then across the loop.
Keep the cording on the right again in an “L” shape, then
round to the back of the left cording. Pass the tail across
the front of the cord, then slip through the spacing and
fasten.
2: Reverse Lark’s head macrame knot
Here, you will use a similar technique as the larks head
knot to create this knot, except that you work towards
yourself rather than away.
This knot does not leave behind any discernable “line”
against the dowel. You’ll probably utilize it the most when
turning the knot around, making it look like Double Half
Hitch.
How to make reverse larks head knot

Measure a cord length for your design, then cut it

out.
Bring together either tips to fold the cord into halves.
Bring the front loop, behind the back loop and over
the dowel into the front to leave the loop downward
facing.
Yank both cut edges of the cording up and into the
loop, then fasten to close the knot.

3: Half hitch macramé knot

This is the knot you’ll most probably utilize when adding
decoration to a macramé design.
How to make half hitch knot
 Select the cord pair you’d like to form the half hitch
knot on.
Grab the tails of both cords and bring them to the
static cord’s right. Yank them below towards the left
to create a D shape or loop.
Cross the D cord tails over by the resting position
where your cords intersect and thread below the D
loop.
Yank gently to hold in place in your preferred
position.
4: Square knot
The square knot is another fundamental knot widely used
in most macramé designs because it is strong, versatile,
and simple.
You create the square knot in 2 steps where you work the
first knot half towards the left and then work the other half
towards the right.

OceanofPDF.com
How to make a square knot

Select 2 cord pairs that you’d like to use to create a

square knot.
Pass the tail of the left cord over the 2 middle cords
and then below the cord on the right side to form a
reverse D-shaped loop.
Slide the tail of the right-side cord into the reverse D
shape, moving below the 2 middle cords then above
the left-side cord. That’s it for the first part.
For the second part:
Complete the square knot by repeating the first and
second steps, following the procedures, and
operating with the cords on the opposite side.
Using the first step as a guide, use the cord on the
right side to form a D shape, moving across the
middle cords and below the cord on the left side.
 Yank the cord on the left side across the D shape,
moving below the middle cords and above the right-
side cord. Tug the cords to fasten.
How you can alternate square macrame knots
To alternate the positioning of square knots within a series
of suspended cords can be both decorative and versatile.
Alternating square knots are one of the most used ways to
make geometric shapes like diamonds and triangles, which
you can create by switching the cords used in every row.
How to make alternating square knots

To form row 1, create square knots as explained

above
To make row 2, leave out the first 2 cords, then begin
the square knots.
Move to the first pattern on row 3, then rework the
pattern for row 2 for row 4, then keep going in this
manner. This procedure forms a good mesh pattern.
5: Double Half Hitch
To create a Double half hitch knot, you need to use a
working cord and filler cord. We shall work the knot toward
the right, but the technique is similar when worked to the
left, only reversed.
How to make double half hitch
 Stretch out the filler cord (cord on the right) straight.
Cross the left cord over the cord on the right side.
Slide the tail of the cord on the left side above and
into the loop created, then yank taut. Slip the loop to
anywhere you’d like to position the knot.
Rework that procedure once more in a similar way,
then fasten the loop. You have just completed a
single, double-half hitch knot.
To create another one, use the cord that follows as
your working cord and the same filler cord. Only use
every working cord to make one double half hitch.
6: Diagonal Double Half Hitch
This knot is simply a normal half hitch except that you hold
the filler cord at whatever incline you’d like your knot rows
to face.

OceanofPDF.com
7: Vertical Double Half Hitch

This knot usually appears a bit complicated, but it really is

not. The vertical double half hitch is a nice method of
adding color to macramé designs.
To begin, you will need a different rope strand to
utilize as the working cord. Position your working
cord at the back of the initial filler cord series.
Take the longer tail and place it on the front of and
about the initial filler cord series. Slide the tail into
the loop. Yank taut, then slip your knot to the
finishing position. Rework that round once more to
finish your initial double-half hitch.
Pass the working cords at the back of the filler cords
that follow, then wrap it across the filler cord front as
you hold the working cord’s right section to create a
loop and slide the tail into the loop. Yank taut.
Take the working cord to the front of your filler cords
again, wrapping it about, then yank across the loop.
Switch to the series of filler cords that follow, then
rework the process until you get to the edge of the
row.
 For the final filler cord series, form half a double half
hitch as usual, then yank the working cord’s tail
towards the left at the back of the filler cord.
Move your working cord from left to the right side in
the front of filler cords, then yank across the loop.
Continue the row that follows to the left side, passing
below your filler cords, then about for the first knot
half, then for the second half, pass at the front and
about.
8: Wrap macrame knot
This is the best knot to use to secure a series of cords at
the start or at the end of a macramé design.

OceanofPDF.com
How to make wrap knot

Measure a long cord length as desired, then cut it

out.
Hold the group of cords you would like to fasten in
your left hand—or non-dominant hand.
Form a loop facing downwards using your cord
length, leaving the cord length left and the shorter
tail at the top right side.
Use your left index finger and thumb to grip the tail
and top of the loop. Bring the cord length to the back
of gathered cords and towards the left, then take it
to the front to make a single wrap. Continue to wrap
the length of the cord.
As you wrap, make sure you leave the loop visible at
the base. After wrapping the gathered cords
securely, slip the cord length left into the base of the
loop.
Secure your wrap knot by cautiously pulling the tip
of the short tail at the wrap’s top; this shortens your
loop and catches the length as it gets pulled up into
the wrapped cords.
Finish by trimming the length and tail at the bottom
and top of the wrap.

OceanofPDF.com
9: Half Knot Spiral

You can create this knot by making the first square knot
half then reworking it for the knot that follows (and every
other knot) rather than reversing it. The spiral’s direction
depends on whether you begin on the left or right with the
half knot.
10: Half Hitch Spiral

This knot is comparable to the half-knot spiral, except that

you make it using half hitches. All you have to do is
continue to tie half hitches again and again with the same
filler cord, and in no time, a spiral will form naturally.
11: Overhand Knot
The overhand knot is a basic knot that is probably awfully
familiar to create. All you have to do is form a loop then
yank the tails across the loop.

OceanofPDF.com
 Handmade Macramé
Handmade Decorations for
Your Home

OceanofPDF.com
 Chapter 2:
Macramé Wall Hangings
This chapter contains gorgeous Macramè projects for your
walls:

1: DIY Macrame Wall Hanging

Materials
Macramé cord - 65 yards
10-inch metal ring
Optional: wood beads
Tools
Fine comb or wire pet brush
Tapestry needle
Sharp fabric scissors for trimming the fringe
Standard scissors
Directions
Cut out 80 cord pieces that are 24″ in length. Every
division requires 8 pieces, and this design has 10
divisions.
Use a lark’s head knot to join the cord pieces to the
metal ring.
Form a square knot using the 4 middle strands. Use
the 4 strands on the left side and the 4 strands on the
right side to form another square knot.
Make a square knot using the 2 left pieces from the
middle square knot and right pieces from the square
knot at the far left. Use 4 right-side strands from that
new square knot.
Make the final square knot using 4 middle strands
Next, make a double half hitch knot. The lead cord
will be the strand at the far right. Form the first
stitch by tying the nearby cord up and about the lead
cord. Using the exact nearby cord, make another
double half hitch to secure. Rework this process until
you reach the right strand in the middle. Repeat the
same procedure on the left.
Use the right-side lead cord to proceed with a half
hitch knot to form the “V” shape. Rework this
procedure across the left and right sides.
You can now use a tapestry needle to thread the 2
lead cords left through a wood bead, or if you prefer,
you can secure the design in place as done in the
step before.
Create a simple knot to tie into place.
Make a rough cut approximately 1″ in length using
your scissors.
Fray the strands out, then use a comb or wire pet
brush to brush them out.
Trim the fringe using a pair of scissors to give your
design a clean cut.
Work this 9 more times to complete the project.

OceanofPDF.com
2: DIY Macramé Feathers

Materials and supplies

Cat brush
Sharp fabric shears
Fabric stiffener
5mm single twist cotton string
Ruler
Cut out the following measurements for a medium-sized
feather:
6-8 10-inch strands for the bottom
8-10 12-inch strands for the middle
10-12 14-inch strands for the top
 1 32-inch strand for the spine
Directions
Fold the strand for the spine into half. Grab one 14-
inch strand and fold in half then slip it below the
spine.
Fold another 14-inch piece in half, then slip it inside
the top horizontal strand’s loop and yank it through.
Position it over the opposing strand horizontally.
Yank the strands at the bottom completely across the
top loop. That will be the knot.
Yank either side tautly. You will have to swap the
starting side on the row that follows. Therefore, if
you have your horizontal strand laid from right to
left, you will lay it from left to right on the next row.
Slip the first folded strand below the spine, then
thread one of the other folded strands through its
loop. Yank the strands below the spine across the top
loop, then fasten.
Carry on, working gradually down in size.
Tighten by pushing up the strands—use one hand to
hold the base of the spine (center strand), then push
the strands up using the other hand. Once you are
through, bring the fringe to join the base of the
spine.
Give your design a rough trim, which helps with
brushing out the strands and guiding the shape. It’s
easier to work on the short strands, but it is helpful
to have razor-sharp fabric shears.
Once you finish trimming, lay the feather on a heavy-
duty surface since we shall use an animal brush to
brush the cording. It is best to use a flattened
cardboard box or a self-healing cutting mat because
the brush will ruin any wood or delicate surface.
While brushing, begin at the spine, making sure to
push hard into the strands as you brush. It calls for
more than a few strokes to get your fringe looking all
nice and soft. Work across until you reach the base.
When you get to the base, hold the spine tip as you
brush since you want to avoid yanking off any
strands with the brush.
The next thing to do is stiffening the feather. If you
try picking up your design to hang it, it is just going
to flop because the cording is very soft. Spray the
feather once or twice, then leave it for a few hours to
dry.
Give your feather a final trim after it stiffens up a
little. This part is very crucial; take it slow and
remember that you’d rather trim the design lesser
than more. It may be necessary to modify your trim
according to how frequently you move the piece.
When you are through trimming, you can spray the
feather once more then the design will be ready for
hanging.

OceanofPDF.com
3: DIY Macramé Feathers Wreath

Materials
Regular yarn
18″ inch hoop
Directions
Cut out five strands of yarn that are 2 feet in length.
Tie as many strands as desired then trim them to
create a point
Cut out numerous strands of yarn that are 11 inches
in length. Grab one 11-inch strand and use it to
create an overhand knot over the 2 feet strand. Press
the knot to reach the top of the strand.
Continue tying more strings to the strand as you
push them up near each other.
Proceed all across to the tip of the strand, then
optionally unravel the string.
Trim the strands to create the shape of a feather
Rework the process with as many feathers as you
want to create.

OceanofPDF.com
 Chapter 3:
Macramé Lighting Projects
Here are some decorative macramé lighting projects for
you:

4: DIY Macramé Chandelier

Materials
40 yards of 3/8″ rope or 35m of ½ cm cotton 3—this pattern
used strand rope, parted into 3 strings to make it feel
softer, totaling to 105m of cording (114 yds of 3/8 cord).
If you do not want to unravel your cord or use 3 strand
rope, get the 105m rather than 35m. For the final piece, the
macramé chandelier measured 20cm long for the tassel
section and 25cm long for the macramé section (8” for the
tassel and 10” for the macramé).
The bottom used a disassembled, inexpensive lampshade
measuring 12″ in diameter (30cm). Strip off the covering to
leave behind the wire. This pattern utilized only the light
holder and top wireframe.
Directions
Cut the rope into 118″ strands and unravel the
strands into 3 strings. (Work out the length of the
rope by multiplying your chandelier’s length by 6, as
you have to fold the strands in half before you knot
them to the bottom of the lampshade).
To achieve a stunning smooth tassel appearance,
unravel the rope then make it straighter by ironing.
Fold the individual strands in half, then tie them to
the base of your lampshade with a reverse lark’s
head knot.
Start row 1 on the lampshade by making half knots.
Leaving 1-inch below the 1st row, then create the 2nd
row by making square knots with alternating strings
from the preceding row.
The row that follows will be 2 half knot rows with no
space to form a thick woven edging at the base.
Next, make twisting half knots. You don’t need to do
anything new as the knots will start to twist as you
continue to knot. For each, do 15 half knots to finish
off with twisted strands that are 4 inches in length.
Measure the twisted strands and trim them to make
the length equal. Make the edging at the base
thicker by creating 2 extra half knot rows.
The last thing you’ll need to do is measure a suitable
tassel length then trim off the additional strands.
OceanofPDF.com
5: DIY Macrame Lamp Shade

Materials
Lamp Base
Light, if your lamp base does not have a built-in light
source, you will need to wire one or you can use
a hanging lantern cord
Lamp rings
Macrame Cord /Cotton Rope
Hot Glue and Hot Glue Gun
Directions
This pattern utilized a bracket with an assembled
and prewired light cord, and depending on the lamp
base you will be using, and whether you will wire a
light cord or not, the starting steps may differ a bit.
It’s straightforward to drill a bracket through your
wall. Just note down where you’ll be making the
holes to simplify the process. Drill a hole out using
the proper sized bit on your power drill, fix wall
anchors for spots with no stud, position the bracket
back above the holes then drill the screws firmly.
Hang the light cord over the bracket the way you
like.
If you cannot disassemble your light cord and you do
not feel like rewiring or wiring a cord, you can use a
Dremel tool to cut a tiny chunk out of the lamp ring
for it to slip into the cord. It is best to do this before
you weave your rope onto the lap rings (as the spars
may cause the rope to catch on fire).
Begin with Lark’s head knot, where you will need 2
strands that are roughly 2 ½ times the lap shade’s
length. Fold the strand into halves, then use Lark’s
head knot to enfold it about the lamp ring.
Once through with the knot, create 2 adequately
tight square knots to hold steady but not too tight
that it’s going to be hard to modify later if necessary.
The part that follows might seem difficult at first, but
it’s simple once you get the hang of it. Grab 2 strings
from the left side cording and 2 more strings from
the right side and create a square knot at
approximately 2″ below.
Use another square knot to fasten it into place. Try
to maintain the exact length all across your lamp,
then center between the 2 knots on top of it.
Maintaining the right spacing is what forms the
gorgeous circle pattern in between your knots.
Continue to alternate the square knot process,
ensuring you stop for a moment to observe whether
your knots are aligning evenly. Once you have done a
couple of knots, stop to make some modifications by
gently re-tightening and loosening any flawed knots.
Once you have achieved your preferred length, form
the last series of square knots across the base of the
lamp ring. If the lamp ring’s bottom and top have a
similar color, you can clip off everything and hot glue
the tips on the interior. Because this pattern had
mismatched ones, we wrapped the outer strings
about the ring then secured them into place using
hot glue.
To ensure your cording covers the ring fully, you can
adjust the initial measurements to be longer so you
won’t need to attach an additional rope to hot glue
across the gaps. Both ways work, but the latter calls
for more work.
Lastly, trim off the excess from the 2 middle strands
of every bundle, then fasten the tips behind the knot
that fastens everything to the base ring. Now screw
in a light bulb and start enjoying your macramé
creation.

OceanofPDF.com
6: Macramé Light fixture

Tools and Materials

Glass bottle
Scissors
Pendant light kit
Cording or yarn
Lightbulb cage
Directions
First part
Step 1: Attach the yarn to the frame
You will require 22 pieces of yarn or cording.
Determine the cording length by measuring the bulb
cage height, then multiply by 9. Cut out a total of 22
strands and fold all of them in half. Create a Lark’s
head knot by wrapping the end of one strand folded
around the cage’s upper rim, then yank the loose tips
into the loop.
First, ensure that the 2 tails of the strand have an
even length before pulling taut. Carry on to attach
each of the other strands similarly. By the time you
 finish this, you should have 22 uniformly spaced
knots across the bulb cage’s upper rim.
Step 2: Tying the square knots
Beginning with 2 Lark’s head knots, form a square
knot by bringing the string at the far left over the 2
center strings, then below the one in the far right.
Grab the string on the far right and lead it below the
2 center strands and above the strand to the far left.
Pull tight.
Take the string furthest to the left below the 2 center
strands, then above the string furthest to the right.
Complete by taking the string furthest to the right
above the 2 middle, then below the furthest left
strand, and yank taut.
Rework the same process for the 2 series of Lark’s
head knot, then continue to work along the cage’s
top until you have finished a whole square knot row.
Continue creating square knots below the cage,
modifying the knots’ tautness as your pendant gets
wider.
Once through with that part, knot the frame’s base,
then clip off the excess cording.

OceanofPDF.com
 Chapter 4:
Kitchen Macramé Patterns
Here are gorgeous macramé designs for your kitchen:

7: Macramé Coasters

Materials
Scissors
3 mm macramé cord
Directions
Begin by cutting out the following lengths of cording:
-Five 30″ cords
-One five-foot cord
After cutting out the measurements, set aside 5 of
the short strands and take the long string, then use
the strand to form a circle on one end, ensuring that
the tip goes beyond one section of your circle.
Take the 5 cord pieces left, ready to join them to the
major strand. Bend the strand into halves, then slip
the cord loop below the circle. Wrap the strand
across the circle by yanking the tails across the loop.
Continue doing this until you join each of the 5 short
strands to the circle.
Form the middle of the coaster by pulling the tails of
the circle taut, ensuring you pull together the shorter
strands into a cluster. Knot the tails of the major
string to fasten together all strands.
For the remaining section of the coaster, we will
make it using Lark’s head knot. To tie this knot,
begin by yanking the long strand that makes up the
circle taut, then place it on a table, flat. This is the
strand on which you will create all the knots. Grab
the strand to the immediate right of the long string.
Yank that strand below the long string, then loop the
tail on top of the string.
Lastly, slip the tail of the short strand back below the
long strand then into the loop on the left side. This is
going to form a tiny loop about the major strand.
Yank that loop taut, then press it upwards near the
middle of the coaster.
Rework the same procedure once again, utilizing the
same short strand to form 2 loops with the exact
strand every time.
Shift to the strand that follows, reworking the same
looping procedure 2 times on either strand. Once you
get to the tail of the cords, you will observe a tiny
space between where the initial loop starts and
where you completed the loops. Fill the space by
cutting out one more strand, then loop it on top of
the long strand as you did at the start of the design.
Every time you come across some space between
where you require to go and where you are, just
attach another strand in the same way. Continue to
tie Lark’s head knot about the coaster until you
achieve your preferred size.
Clip off the excess cording from the tails, then
unravel all strands using a comb to give your
coasters a rustic boho appearance.

OceanofPDF.com
8: Macramé Placemats

Materials
Cording
Hanger
Sharp Scissors
Directions
Begin by cutting out 20 strands, all measuring 116”
in length.
Use Lark’s head knot to join all 20 strands to the
hanger. Leave out a gap of approximately 1½”, then
create a square knot row, and after that, make an
alternating square knot row.
Proceed with this pattern until you have made 5
square knot rows. Grab the 8 adjoining strands and
use the 2 strands in the middle to tie a knot. You’ll
utilize all “middle” strings as the leader strand and
work one of the middle strands diagonally towards
the left and the other towards the right side. The
idea here is to create a diamond shape.
Position the middle strand above the 3 strings on the
right-side. Use double half hitch knots to join all 3
strands. Once you are through, you should have a
triangle shape.
Shove the leader strands sideways for a bit. In the
middle of your triangle, create a square knot. You
will have 4 center strands rather than 2.
Proceed to create double half hitch knots, working
towards the center to form the base of the diamond.
When the 2 double half hitch rows intersect in the
center, simply tie a small knot to help tighten it
together.
Next, get back to creating 5 square knot rows by
working the exact pattern thrice: 5 square knot rows,
double half hitch diamond shape, and square knot in
the middle.
Once you’ve completed the design, clip the placemat
from the hanger right under the Lark’s head knot.
Fold the placemat in half or hang it evenly on top of
the hanger. Even out the other side of the placemat
by giving it a nice trim.

OceanofPDF.com
 Chapter 5:
Other Macramé Projects for Your
Home
Here are some additional macramé designs for your home:

9: DIY Macramé Curtain

Materials
Thick, soft natural yarn
Scissors
Directions
Firstly, measure the window or doorway where you
will be hanging the curtain. After determining the
measurements, cut out a strand to be 2 times the
length of the window or doorway. For instance, the
doorway used on this pattern measured 78″, and so,
every strand we cut out was 156″.
You will require plenty of yarn to fit the curtain rod.
This pattern used 16 strands in a curtain rod of 1
foot and wound up tying around 64 strings.
Fold every string in half for threading onto your
curtain rod. Tuck the loop folded below the rod, then
yank the tails of the strand all across. Rework until
you have covered the entire curtain rod.
Next, we will be weaving together the strands across
the curtain’s top utilizing the horizontal double half
hitch knot. Here, grab the outmost strand, then yank
it above and below the string that follows to form a
knot. Rework to make a double knot.
Grab the 2nd strand, then pull it above and below the
3rd strand to form a knot and rework to create a
double knot. Continue the process one after the other
until you form double knots across the entire curtain
length.
To form the shape of a “V” in your design, you’ll need
to work the same horizontal double half hitch. Mark
where your knots will be going using masking tape.
The one distinction is that you’ll be working from
outside rather than only straight across.
Grab the farthest strand to the right, then loop it
above and below the second strand. Double that
knot, then rework until you reach the center. Now do
the same for the left side; grab the furthest strand,
then loop it above and below the 2nd strand. Make it
into a double knot, then rework until you reach the
center. Use a double knot to tie it off.
You may now peel off the tape since you have
finished the V. If you want, you can leave it there or
add another knot pattern, as is the case with this
design, to fasten the appearance together.
The final knot we’ll be creating is the ordinary
double knot, but the knots are going to be tied in the
pattern of an “X.” Divide the strand down the center
to ensure that your design is aligned well. Count 4
strands starting from the left of the middle. Hold 2
strings with your right hand and the other 2 strings
with your left, then make them into a double knot at
approximately 3″ below the V shape. Rework the
same procedure on the right of the curtain’s center.
Hold 2 strands using your left hand and 2 strands
using your right, then make them into a double knot
at the exact length as the left knot. At this point, you
should have 4 rows of double strands. Grab the 2
rows at the center, then form them into a double knot
to connect at the curtain’s center. You should notice
the pattern of an “X” starting to form. Continue to
rework the process of counting the strands into 4
groups then connecting them until you have created
a criss-cross pattern. You can keep working on this
design for as much as you need for your curtain, but
ensure that you do not interweave too far below.
To finish, hang your curtain to check how your knots
fall, then start adjusting them until they are all good
and even. Trim the curtain’s bottom a little to do
away with any excessively long strands. Lastly, attach
large tassels to either side of the curtain and the
middle to bring together the design.

OceanofPDF.com
10: DIY Macrame Yarn Garland

Materials
Push pins or washi tape
Scissors
Chunky yarn in a variety of colors of similar thicknesses
Directions
Cut out a single piece of yarn for the foundation in
your desired length – this pattern cuts it out to be 8
inches. Cut out other strands of yarn that are around
2 to 3 inches in length, according to how much fringe
you’d like hanging down. You can always trim these
up later but keep in mind that they get shorter as you
tie them together in knots.
This pattern spaced the yarn at every 2 inches, then
after tying the knots, spread them further. To fit the
size of this garland, you may only require around 30
to 35 single lengths of yarn.
Use push pins to hang the foundation string on the
wall. Then, begin adding the single lengths of yarn by
creating a single knot at the base.
Begin the 2nd row by jumping the initial yarn strand
then using the 2nd and 3rd strings to create a double
knot. It was centered at approximately 2 inches
below from the bottom.
Carry on all across, tying together the 2 strings of
yarn that follow around 2 inches below, ensuring you
center them between the base string knots.
Begin your third row back where you began, except
this time, use the 2nd and 1st strands to make the
knot. Proceed to form knots all through
approximately 2 inches down the final knot. When
through with the 3rd row, return to the left side to
begin another row. Skip the initial strand and use the
2nd and 3rd strands once again to create the knots.
Rework this procedure all across.
You can continue creating more rows or stop here to
leave a bit of fringe.
The final step is to even up the edges by trimming.

OceanofPDF.com
Macramé Patterns For
Your Garden

OceanofPDF.com
 Chapter 6:
Macramé Hanging Planters
Here are hanging macramé planter designs for you:

11: Macramé Hanging Herb Garden

Materials
Metal dowel, 48″ in length
4 rolls of 100″ nylon rope (5/16″ wide)
Ceramic pots (top diameter 4.5″, bottom diameter 2.5″)
Directions
Cut out 32 lengths of rope, all measuring around
120″. Use Lark’s head knot to attach them to your
pole.
Group your strands into four parts of 16 single
strands. Create the shape of a V in every section
using a half hitch knot.
Rework another row of V-shaped half hitch knots for
each of the 4 sections. At the base center of all the 4
Vs, form a square knot.
Tie one more square knot in the 3 gaps between your
Vs to have a total of 3 square knots.
Starting with the sixteen individual strands furthest
to the right, create a 3 square knot row at
approximately 4″ under the middle V knot. Allow both
single cords on either tip to hang loosely.
At approximately 2½″ below that row, form another
row of four alternating square knots.
At approximately 2½″ below the preceding row, form
the 3rd row of three alternating square knots.
To form the “pouch” for a mason jar or flower pot,
create the 4th square knot with both loose strands on
either tip of the final row. Take the 2 strings on both
ends about the front, then create a square knot with
those 4 strands. That will form a circular shape for
this part of your design.
The next thing to do is use a wrapped knot to
complete the pouch. Tie the wrapped knot at
approximately 3″ below the final square knot row and
trim the tails of cording to your preferred length.
By now, you have used the 16 strands on the furthest
right of your project (fourth section) to form a pouch
for one flower pot. For the 16 strands on the furthest
left (first section), rework steps five through eight.
For the 2nd section of 16 strands, rework steps five
through eight. Create a new alternating square knot
row at approximately 2 ½″ below the 3rd square knot
row (that has adapted a circular shape). Form a
wrapped knot at around 2″ to have 3 complete
sections.
By now, you must have 3 complete flower pot pockets
(parts 4, 2, and 1). For the 16 strands 3rd section left,
rework steps five to seven. Create a 4th alternating
square knot row of 4 knots.
Next, form a 5th alternating square knot row of 3
knots. To form a circular design for the pouch, create
a new square knot in front with the 2 loose strands
on the tips. (You can refer to step 8). Lastly, form the
6th alternating square knot row of 3 knots and finish
off with a wrapped knot.
By now, your hanging herb garden should have
pouches for mason jars or flower pots and four
finished sections. Trim the tassels to your preferred
length in any style.
Fill your pots with dirt, plant your desired herb then
slip them into the pouches. If you don’t want to water
plants every day, you can instead plant succulents in
beautiful pots.

OceanofPDF.com
12: Macramé Succulent Hangers

Materials and supplies

Rocks or other filler
Glass planters
Faux succulents
Lighter
Scissors
Steel rings
Macramé cord
Notes
You can buy the Macramé cord from a craft store then
smooth the frayed ends by placing it over a small lighter
flame. However, be careful not to use a lot of fire because it
will burn the cord and turn it black. In addition, the molten
ends of the cord can stick to whatever they come into
contact with, so take care.

OceanofPDF.com
Directions
Cut out 4 strands to measure approximately the
width of 2 stretched-out arms. Fold the strands in
half, then slip the gathered string across the middle
of a steel ring.
Yank the tails of the strand into the loop to form the
initial knot about your steel ring. The ring is
responsible for hanging your planter. Rework with
the rest of the strings.
Your steel ring now has 8 lengths of cords attached.
Separate them into pairs of two strands that logically
function simpler together—this implies that the
strings closer together will be easier to divide.
Create overhand knots beginning roughly at the
points where you want the top of the planter to meet
the hanger. You can take 2 strands and use them to
form a knot or tie both strands together into two
overhand knots.
The first alternative is sturdier, while the second one
engages you more in shifting the knots around. The
first option is best if you are struggling to get your
first knots spaced out evenly. Position the planter
with its top at the initial knot, then roughly measure
the center of the planter. The next part involves
making the traditional macramé design.
Instead of tying the knots in the already existing
pairs, you’ll work either right or left (either way is
good) to create an overhand knot that’s on the same
length as the closest strand.
What follows is to complete the hanger by forming a
knot of each strand at the base. Try spacing that knot
to be the exact length from the center knots as
aligned from the top. That means you will have the
upper knots 2″ to the center knots, 2″ to the last base
knot connecting all strands. That base knot will carry
the mass of the whole planter; thus, ensure it’s tight
and secure.
Clip off the extra cording to have a great decorative
hang down at the edge. Sear off the tips using a
lighter to avoid fraying. Place an empty planter on
top to ensure it fits and works well with no
complications.
Fill the planter with real succulents or faux dirt,
stones, or another filler you want, and you are
through.

OceanofPDF.com
13: Macrame Plant Hanger Pattern

Materials
3mm salmon cotton rope (6.5 foot)
5mm white cotton rope (16.5 foot)
1x wood ring
3mm mustard cotton rope (6.5 foot)
Directions
Starting the hanger. Cut out 6 even pieces of white
cotton rope, each measuring (16.5 feet). Grab all 6
strands, fold in half, then yank them through your
wood ring.
Next, we will make the gathering or wrapping knot.
Hold the tip of the mustard-colored cording between
your index finger and thumb. Begin to wrap the
cording ten times. Yank the cording left into the loop,
then yank the strand on top to fasten the loop. Clip
the strands extending beyond the base, then yank the
top to conceal and fasten the tip of the cording. Clip
the upper end and cover it.
Rework the exact process using the salmon-colored
rope, but this time, you’ll wrap the cord only seven
times.
Middle section. Begin the first spiral knot by
grabbing 4 strands and leaving out a length of
approximately 6 inches. Create a total of 8 spiral
knots, then 3 square knots, and finally complete with
8 spiral knots.
Finishing the plant hanger: Form a square knot at
approximately 15cm down the final spiral knot. Next,
create another square knot at approximately 4 inches
using 2 ropes of one ‘arm’ and 2 cords from the ‘arm’
that follows. Join each of the 3 arms similarly.
Rework this once more at approximately 4 inches
below. Complete by using the salmon and mustard
rope to make a wrapping knot as you did in the
beginning. Trim the ends of your cording to finish the
plant hanger.

OceanofPDF.com
14: Mason Jar Hanging Planter

Materials
Butane Micro Torch or Candle and Lighter
Mason Jar with bottom 1/3 cut off Scissors
Bucket of Cold Water
Twine
Chain
Masking Tape
Plant

Directions
Cut out 5 twine strands, each measuring a length of
6 feet.
Create a knot in the center, making sure to leave a
loop on top to hang it using the chain.
Tie together the pairs of strands to create 5 knots at
approximately 4″ below the large knot you formed.
Tie each of the 5 lengths of twin into 5 knots.
Next, join the outer edges to make the hanger a
cylinder shape. At approximately 1½″ below the
preceding knots, create knots with the cording
utilizing a single piece from every adjacent knot. For
the last knot, tie together the strand left on each
exterior edge. The design now looks like a tube.
Rework this step once or twice according to the
length of your planter. You can try fitting the jar or
whichever container you want to use inside the
planter to verify whether you’d like an extra row of
knots. This pattern lined up the design such that the
initial knot row is on top of the jar, making it
necessary to add another row.
Once satisfied with the rows of knots, put in the
planter, then collect the pieces at its bottom to
establish where you’ll be tying the last knot.
Make a knot at the bottom, slip the chain into the
upper loop of your planter, then hang.

OceanofPDF.com
 Chapter 7:
Macramé Garden Umbrellas
Here are macramé garden umbrellas designs you can make
for your garden:

15: DIY Macramé outdoor umbrella

Materials
Can or a bottle in two sizes
Outdoor umbrella
Pencil
Measuring tape
X-Acto knife
Bookcase or table legs
Scissors
Yarn—this pattern used white
Directions
Instead of measuring out the strands and cutting
each one individually—you can do that, but it takes
time—, wrap your yarn round a table’s legs or a
bookcase a couple of times. Continue to wrap the
yarn around itself until it’s sufficient to begin. This
pattern used approximately 1½ spool of yarn.
Remove the strand from your bookcase by cutting
one section of the wrapped yarn. Locate the center of
the strands and cut, then find the center of the cut
strand and cut again in half to have 2 series of
strands with equal length. Rework this step as much
as necessary. This pattern reworked this step thrice
for the entire project.
Determine the length of your umbrella’s sides using
a tape measure. This measurement will help you
determine how close to have your string. The
umbrella in this pattern measured 40½ inches at the
side, leaving a space of 2½″ between every strand
and an allowance of .25″ on every corner. Overall,
there were 15 series of strands on every side.
Based on your measurements, use a pencil to note
where you will position the strand over the umbrella.
You will use these markings to cut the holes. Use an
X-Acto knife to stab holes where you made the pencil
 marks. Try trimming whichever stitching that might
pop up at your umbrella’s edge.
Grab 4 strands of yarn and bend in half. Slide the
folded edge through the base of a cut hole. If it is
problematic to shove the strand through, it may be
necessary to enlarge the hole. Once done, form
Lark’s head knot and yank taut (don’t pull too hard
that the fabric rips). Rework this process for all
holes.
NOTE: Umbrella fabric gets vulnerable to unintended
tears once you cut it; thus, don’t pull too tight to avoid
the cut holes tearing and becoming larger.
Divide each strand in half to have 2 sets of 4 strands
for each hole.
For the first knot sequence, use a small bottle or can
as a template—this pattern utilized a travel-sized
hairspray bottle. The bottle helps make sure that the
layers have an equal size. Just double-knot the strand
across the bottle, leaving the last 4 strands on either
side. These strands make the corners, and you will
tie them to the strand on the adjoining side to finish.
For the 2nd and 3rd knot layer, use a bigger bottle or
can—this pattern used a 7.5 oz can. Once more,
double-knot the strand across the can, leaving the
strand at the tips unfastened. We knotted 3 layers
according to the quantity of yarn available. However,
you can break after the first layer or add extra
layers; it’s your preference.
After completing the steps above on every side of
your umbrella, you can tie together the strands at
 the corner into a knot.
Pattern notes
The yarn used in this umbrella is basic white, and it doesn’t
endure poor weather. Use twine or jute if you want a more
durable, weatherproof cording.

OceanofPDF.com
16: Macramé Fringe Umbrella

Materials
Macramé cotton cord
Sewing thread—the same color or similar to the umbrella
Sewing needle
Scissors
Outdoor umbrella—any color or kind will do
Directions
*The directions below cover the details of making the
fringe for only 1 section of the umbrella. You’ll have to
rework everything based on the number of ribs/sections
your umbrella has.
Cut out a strand to be slightly lengthier than one rib
of the umbrella, then secure it to either end of the
sections.
Cut out 18 strands, each measuring 4 feet long, and
connect them to the strands already fastened to the
umbrella.
Use square knots to attach the lengths of the cording
and do that for 3 more rows.
Trim off the additional strings and untangle the
twisted fringes if you used a twisted cord.

OceanofPDF.com
 Chapter 8:
Macramé Garden Lights
The following macramé garden light designs will give your
garden a je ne sais quoi feel:

17: DIY Sea Glass Rope Lantern

Materials
A gallon size jar
Krylon Sea Glass Spray Paint –Sea Foam Color
Jute Rope
Glue Sticks and Hot Glue Gun
Scissors
Binder Clips
Directions
Cut out a strand of rope enough to fit along the top
lip of your jar, then wrap it loosely across the jar’s
lip. First, don’t tighten; you will attach the vertical
strands to this, and it’s simpler if the string at the
lips isn’t close-fitting to the jar. The number of
vertical strands you need to cut depends on the
density you’ll like your netting to have. This pattern
cut 8 strands for tying to the top.
Cut your strands to be 6 times the jar’s height.
Use a simple lanyard hitch knot to join the vertical
strands to your jar. Bend your strand in half. Grab
the looped end and slip it below the strand
surrounding the jar’s lip. Take the tails of the string
up across the loop and yank taut. Rework this step
using the strands left, ensuring that the spacing is
equal. Once done attaching each of the strings, pull
the strand across the lip taut.
To ensure that it doesn’t unravel, you can form a
square knot. When forming the square knot, ensure
that the right is crossed over the left first, yank taut,
then cross the left over right and yank taut. Trim off
the excess strand tails. To secure more, you can hot
glue the ends and knot.
Form knots across the netting by grabbing a strand
from 2 neighboring vertical strings. When you hold
them, see that they form a V. Hold together either
strings, then use them to form a knot.
Use the rest of the strands to continue forming knots
across the length of the jar, ensuring to maintain a
similar height all through.
For the row that follows, rework the same procedure.
The knots should be right below the first lanyard
knots. Once done knotting, the strands create the
shape of a diamond.
Working your way below the jar, try keeping your
knots the same distance apart and size. In the end,
once you have yanked taut the rope on the bottom, it
will look more appealing. Alternatively, to ensure that
your spacing looks right, you can yank down on the
strands as you work.

OceanofPDF.com
18: Outdoor Hanging Solar Lantern

Materials
Wood ring (you can add galvanized carabiner hook to keep
it from snapping in time)
Glass fishbowl
Synthetic macramé yarn (in pearl)
Optional: wood beads
Solar fairy lights
Metal plant hook (if you’ll be hanging the lantern)
Scissors
Directions
Cut out lengths of yarn measuring 6 x 20 feet. Fold
them in half, then attach them to your ring.
Use the wrapping knot to tie the strands together
securely. Collect the pieces into 3 groups of 4
strands, then use them to create square knots. The
square knot rows in this pattern were each 5″ long.
Add three wood beads or more if desired, then add 3
strings of spiral knots that are 5″ in length. You can
add more beads here as done in this pattern.
For added symmetry, include a few more square knot
rows of 5″ in length.
At another 5″ below, hold one strand each from two
square knot strings adjacent to one another. Join
them together using 2 square knots. Continue along
the perimeter to link the pieces.
Measure another 5″ below and repeat using 2 square
knots. That will form a web where you can insert
your bowl or planter.
Place your fishbowl into the hanger to know where
you will position the base knots to secure the
fishbowl steady.
Collect each of the strings and tie them securely
using the wrapping knot. This pattern used a 6-foot
strand for that.
For a bigger base tassel, cut out 4 strings measuring
30 inches for every section. Fold in half over the base
strands.
Take every strand with the prevailing tassel in the
center. Use the wrapping knot once more to tie the
strands together.
Trim the base tassel and the knot.
That’s it; all you have to do now is place your fairy
lights inside the upturned fishbowl. Twist the wires
about the macramé’s backside and hook. You can
place the solar panel on your fence.
OceanofPDF.com
19: DIY Macramé Jar Hanger with
Fairy Lights

Materials
Macramé Cording
Jars (this pattern utilized Yoplait Oui Yogurt Jars)
Scissors
Fairy lights for stuffing into the jars once through
Directions
Measure the cording to be as short or as long as you
prefer. The formula utilized in this pattern is the
length of jar + length of hanger x 2 + 10″. For the
hanger length, we went with 18″ so measure 36″ with
your cording, then add 10″ plus the height of jar and
cut it there.
Cut out 3 other strands of similar length to have a
total of 4 equal strands.
Fold the strands in half, then form a knot at the fold’s
top for the part of the tiny hanger. Finish the knot up
by pulling on the strands to make it looking neat.
Hang your design up on something such as a
doorknob, cabinet knob to make it simpler to tie the
knots.
Grab any 2 strands and create a knot a small length
below, repeating with all the other strands. Make
sure your knots are equal all across.
Take one strand from 2 of the knots you’ve just
created and use another knot to tie those strings
together. Repeat across until you have 4 even knots.
That makes up your 2nd row, and you’ll notice that
the hanger is beginning to form.
Rework the above step to create the 3rd row of knots.
For the small jars used in this pattern, 3 rows worked
just fine.
Slip your jar into the hanger to ensure it fits. If not,
stretch your knots out as much as possible or adjust
them a little. If your jar fits, gather all loose ends at
the base and tie them into a large knot. The large
knot makes the base of the hanger.
You can keep the excess strands below the knot long
or clip them off. Now fill all the jars with fairy lights,
then hang them up.
OceanofPDF.com
 Chapter 9:
Other Garden Macramé Projects
Here are some additional macramé patterns for your
garden:

20: Macramé Trellis

Materials
Paracord, twine, string, or whatever you have available—
something that won’t snap and can withstand any kind of
weather
A stake of some sort
Two 2x2

Directions
Construct the frame: Cut out 2 sections at 5 feet and
5″ from the 2x2’s, then cut out 2 more sections at 15
½″. Use screws to assemble the pieces. The frame
will be just below 2 feet in width. The next step is to
form the macramé mesh.
Macramé: To make 2 pieces that are 6 feet in length,
cut your strand at 12 feet in length, then bend in
half. To reach the base of your frame, make your
strand 2 times long. This pattern made it a little bit
past halfway. You should have 3 strings of 2 for 6
strands hanging from the frame’s top. Join the
strands to the frame using a slip knot; 1 in the center
and 2 in the corners. First, Use the 2nd and 3rd
strands to make a knot, then the 4th and 5th strands.
Ensure that the hole is relatively big to avoid making
it too tight. Bring the first strand around the back,
then to the front of the frame, then form a knot using
the 1st and 2nd strands. Rework using the 5th and 6th
strands.
Rework the pattern until you get across the 2nd bar.
Part the front and back of the strands, then form a
knot below the bar. Doing this offers structure and
tension so that the strands will hold the weight of
vines. Rework until you get your desired length.
Bring the 1st and 6th strands across the back, then
collect together each strand to make a knot.
Braid or twist the strings into one, then join it to the
stake using your preferred simple knot that is strong
as well.
Dig out 2 holes to be the same width as your frame,
then slide the frame’s legs inside the holes. Use a
mallet or hammer to sink the legs in the earth.
Gather dirt around the frame legs, then pat it down
securely.
Plant the stick in the earth near the plant, then wrap
it gently around the strand for climbing. Confirm the
steadiness of your frame and hammer it in if
necessary.

OceanofPDF.com
21: Macramé Nest

Materials
4mm Aster & Vine Recycled Cotton Rope - 150-foot hank
Scissors
Optional: Tape
Knots used: Wrap (Gathering) knot, Square knot, Lark’s
Head knot, Overhand knot
Directions
Cut out one strand to be roughly 4 feet in length,
then cut out 24 more strands, each 5 feet long.
Optionally use tape to secure the tips of your rope to
avoid fraying. You can cut off the tape once done
with the nest.
Connect the tails of the 4-foot strand using an
overhand knot to form a loop. Fold one of the 5-foot
strands in half, then use a Lark’s head knot to join it
to the loop. Proceed to attach the rest of the 5-foot
strands to the loop until you finish.
Join the Lark head knots using the overhand knot to
form a smaller loop within the bigger one.
Beginning from the back of your design, right below
the overhand knot, create a complete square knot
row.
Proceed to work alternating square knot rows until
you’ve made 3 complete rows. Operating from the
back middle, create 3 additional alternating square
knot rows to row 1, 2 knots to row 2, 3 knots to row
3, 4 knots.
Cut out an extra strand of rope measuring around 4
feet in length. Hold together each of the strands,
then attach them together using a gathering knot
(wrap knot).
Finish by trimming the strands’ ends to your
preferred length.

OceanofPDF.com
22: Macramé Leaves

Materials
Stiffen-Quick
Comb/Dog Brush
Scissors
Painters Tape
Cotton Cord 3-4mm (this pattern used: Dark Brown, Coffee,
and Brick Red)
Optional: Branch/Bamboo Dowel
Directions
Establish your preferred length, then cut out a strand
to be two times that length. If you have no idea what
you may want, begin with around 24″. Fold the string
in half, then secure the bottom and top to a concrete,
firm surface.
Cut out smaller strands for making up the leaf. You
can make each one 4″ - 6″ or equivalent to the leaf’s
width. You’ll require around 40 such strands.
Loop your strand in half, then position the smaller
loop below the taped-down strand. Form another
small loop where the loop is pointing to the
contrasting direction.
Layer the small hoops such that the hanging tails of
the first loop below the long strand are above the
loop section of the loop on top, and the hanging tails
of the loop on top are below the end loped of the
base loop, then yank the hanging tails into every side
of the loop.
Rework that step, slipping the knots fastened up the
strand adjacent to one another.
Rework those steps until the strands reach the rough
length of the leaf size you want.
Trim the strands with scissors to form a more leaf-
like shape. You don’t need to put too much work into
this because you’ll still need to brush the strings out
and make extra trims.
Begin brushing out the strands with a dog brush or
comb. Begin from the tips and gently brush your way
to the inside.
When you have the strands brushed to your
preferred texture, make one last trim.
Optional: To help the new leaves maintain their
shapes, you can try applying Stiffen Quick.

OceanofPDF.com
Easy Macramé Jewelry

OceanofPDF.com
23: Friendship Bracelet

Materials
Craft Glue (optional)
Buttons (You can also substitute a bead)
Scissors
Hemp Twine or Bamboo Cord
Directions
Start by cutting two strands of twine that are about 7
feet long. It’s a bit longer than what you require but
it’s better than having too little. You can make the
strands the same color or different colors; it is up to
you.
Measure about 12 inches down and double the cord
to give you two lengths that are 12 inches and 2
which are 72 inches. Make an overhand knot. The
knot will be the loop for the closure of your button so
make sure that the button can fit through it.
Then, tape down or pin down your bracelet to your
work surface to secure it- you can as well use a clip
board to hold it as you work.
Take apart the strands and leave two short in the
middle and have two long on the side. Take one long
strand and move it along the two middle ones to tie it
around the strands.
Now make a second knot using the same cord and
alternate to the other cord. Repeat this process to
make 2 knots. Continue alternating sides to create 2
knots on each of the sides.
Once you have enough length, which is woven length
of around 6 inches or less depending on the wrist
size, create an overhand knot that ties off your
bracelet.
You may add a bit of craft glue to help you secure the
bracelet further. If you use glue, cut off two of the
tail ends and then use the remaining two cords to tie
the button closure. Knot the cords under the button
and you can again use a small amount of glue to
secure this knot.
You can add a small dot of craft glue to help secure it
if you wish. If you do use glue, cut two of the tail
ends off close to the knot.

OceanofPDF.com
24: Stylish Brass

Materials
Matches or a lighter
.5mm knotting cord (if making a wider bracelet, you can
use thicker cord, however, don’t go any thinner as your
cord will tend to break)
Scissors
Pre-drilled beads or stamping blanks
Direction
Begin by cutting cord of about 2 arms lengths and
string it equally through the holes in the blank- these
will be your two middle strands. Cut the same length
and place it underneath the middle strands- the 2
halves will be both your right and left strand.
Tie the first square knot. Do this by moving the right
strand over the middle ones and then underneath the
left strand. Take the left strand and move it
underneath middle strands and to the right side- into
the created loop. Tighten and move the knot towards
the blank.
Reverse the bracelet and do the same to finish the
knot. Move the left side on top of the middle cords
and then under the right one. Lead the right cord
into the loop and tighten it. Continue making knots
right, left, right again then left until the bracelet is
just a few knots short of the length you want it to be.
A little more length will be added as you knot the
closure.
Do the knots again for the other side of the blank and
tie off the left and right strands using a basic loop.
Melt the cord carefully using a match to ensure it
doesn’t get undone. Trim the excess such that you
only remain with the middle ends for both ends.
Flip over the bracelet and have the middle cords side
by side. Adjust the strand’s length such that you can
fit it over your hand. When you get the right length,
tie together the scrap pieces with the four strands.
Get another long piece and begin tying around 6 to
10 knots as you alternate to both the right and left.
When done, tie and melt the rest of the ends and
ensure you can slide the middle to change the length
as needed.
You are done!
OceanofPDF.com
25: Crystal Pendant

Materials
Thread/Cord
Glue
Scissors
Crystal (of your choice – any shape)
Directions
The first step is to choose your crystal of choice. Now
cut 4 strands from your thread or chord- they should
all be of the same length.
Fix one of the strands at the base of the crystal- if
your stone is polished, ensure to make a firm loop
which will secure the stone nicely. Make an overhand
knot to create the loop.
Using the other 3 strands, create lark’s head knots to
fix the strands to the loop. Have them placed in a
neat square shape.
Split both threads created using the knots and pick
one from the neighboring threads to make an
overhand knot. You should have a triangle from each
square.
Do this again to have enough knots that can snuggly
hold the crystal.
Make an overhand knot using all of the threads.
Make is as close and tight to the crystal as you can. If
it gets a bit loose don’t worry; just make sure that
the crystal has nowhere to slip through.
Now make square knots to create the loop of your
pendant bail. To do this, only use two of the strands
and the knots will be created along the central
strands.
When you have enough to create a loop, make a
square knot, make a square knot round the whole
bail- for holding the loop.
Add glue to the back 6 strands and ensure to add
glue underneath too. Create a square knot again
around the bail before the glue dries- this should be
over the top of the other glue. The glue gives your
pendant a more solid finish.
When the glue dries, cut off any loose strands from
the back 6 strands and add more glue to each
knotting strand at the sides. Let it dry before you
trim off any excess string.
OceanofPDF.com
26: Leaf Earrings

Materials
4 beads of choice
Haircomb
Tape (or clips)
2x earring hooks
4mm single stranded cotton rope
Scissors
2x jump rings
Directions
Have all the materials in one place and take the rope
and cut the strings in preparation for the following
steps.
You will need two long strings for each pair of
earring and 16 small strings- one for the spine and
eight (or more) for the medium sized feather.
Take the long string and fold in half. Place the jump
ring through the folded string of the spine to create a
loop at the top. Take the loop from the top. Bring it
down to overlap the jump ring. It should rest over the
two loose strings.
Tug at the loose strings and move them through the
loop- a head knot should be formed. Make the knot
tighter to secure it.
When secure, fix the hook to the jump ring- use a clip
or tape to hold the top part of the earring in place.
You will need 2 short strings for each side of the
spine to form a knot.
Position one of the short strings, folded, under the
spine, take the other one, fold in half and enclose the
loop in the ring of the top strand that is horizontal.
Move the second string through, but not all the way,
and lay it straight on top of the opposite strand.
Pull the second string through (without it passing
through entirely) and lay it horizontally on top of the
opposing strand. Move the loose ends of the bottom
strings through the top of the loop. You should
achieve a solid knot after tightly pulling both sides.
For this step, change the starting side, i.e., if you
started from left to right (making a loop on the left)
then start from right to left (to make a loop on the
right).
Repeat the above steps- fold the first strand and
place it underneath the spine. Double another strand
and thread it into this loop.
Move the lower strand’s loose ends into the top
strand’s loop and tighten. Do this until your earrings
achieve that feather shape.

OceanofPDF.com
Macramé Keychains

OceanofPDF.com
27: Keychain

Materials
Wood tags
Clasp key chains
Rit dye (wine, fuchsia, rose pink)
Vinyl or paint
Macrame cord

Directions
Start by cutting 6 pieces of cord that are 3 feet long
and mix the dye as per the instructions. Add 2 cords
in each color and allow to sit for about an hour or
until they look the way you want them to. Rinse the
cords until the water becomes clear and allow to dry
completely.
Place a monogram to the tag by using paint and a
stencil or cut and apply vinyl letters.
Now trim and sand the wood tag’s top so that getting
the key chain’s split ring on becomes easier.
Place the tag onto the key chain and fix the first cord
to the split ring using a larks head knot. Do this by
folding the cord equally in half and wrap the end that
is folded around the ring and then pull the cord’s
ends through the folded ends loop. Pull on it to make
it tight. Do the knot again using the other piece of
string.
Begin your first spiral knot by crossing the outer left
cord over both the center cords and then take hold of
the outer right cord and move it over the left cord’s
end and then underneath both of the middle cords.
Loop through the opening on the left side and pull to
make tight.
Keep on working the spiral knots ensuring that you
place the left cord on the top first- to make the knots
appear spiral.
When you achieve the desired length for your spiral,
finish off by tying together the four knots into one
knot and then trimming the end to be left with about
2 inches.
Take a brush or comb and fray the cord ends to
achieve something like the pictured shown above- it
can take a bit of time but it will come together
eventually- simply keep combing until this happens.
When all the cording has been unraveled, hold the
tassel and cut it in a leveled line.

OceanofPDF.com
28: Macramé Key Fob

Materials
Beads
Owl charm
Key charm
1mm leather cord
Loop part from a toggle clasp
Directions
Begin by cutting 2 pieces of cord that are about 14
inches long. Fold in the middle in two and attach the
cords to the loop hanging on the owl charm.
Begin working with the cord on the left to make a
square knot by moving it to the right over the central
cords and below the right cord. Now move the cord
on the right under the central cords and through the
left loop.
While still using the same cord, put it under the
central cords and again over the right cord. Take the
right cord and pass it across and over the central
cords and down into the left loop. Make it tight.
Repeat the steps to make another knot and string a
bead on the central cords and make one more square
knot.
To fasten the loop, string it on the central cords, flip
it over and make two square knots going downwards.
Thread the key on the central cords and make a
square knot behind the charm. Tie the outer cords
together to secure.
Add beads to the cord ends and tie knots at all ends.
Trim any excess cord if need be.

OceanofPDF.com
29: Macramé Keychain

Materials
Cord ends
Rope
Key ring clasp
E-6000 Craft Jewelry Glue
Embroidery floss
Directions
Take a piece of rope that is about 25 inches long and
thread it through the clasp of the key ring such that
the two ends are of the same length.
Take the rope on the right of the keyring to make the
knot and place the end through the top of the rope to
the left. Pull a part of the rope using your finger
under the left one and leave the tail on your left hand
to form a loop.
As you hold the rope on the left of the key ring, move
the end under the loop you created and up through
the hole between the right and left rope on the key
ring. As you are still holding the same rope’s end,
move it back over the top and then through the loop
created earlier. Pull the 4 ends tightly as you move
the knot headed for the keyring.
Now move the keyring away for the floss by shifting
it to one side. The floss should be tied on the left of
the loop- a good starting point is around ¾ to the top.
Bind the floss round the rope ensuring to cover the
tail entirely up until the same position on the
opposite of the loop. Tighten and secure by threading
loose tail underneath the wrapped floss. Cut any
excess.
Now cut the ends of the rope to our desired length-
ensure that they are even.
Move to the end of the rope and tie the floss about an
inch from the end. Nicely wrap floss moving towards
the cut off. Once you can’t wrap anymore, tie off and
wrap the excess under the floss just as the loop.
Add some glue to the rope’s end and thread the end
of the cord on the rope to ensure it doesn’t fray and
to add a dash of bling. Do this for the other side.
Ensure the glue dries before popping your keys into
the new keychain.
OceanofPDF.com
30: Macramé Tassel Keychain

Materials
Embroidery floss or yarn
Wooden bead
3/16″ cotton piping cord (two pieces, approximately 50
inches long each)
Scissors
Keyring

Directions
Start by fixing the 2 cords to your keyring by a lark’s head
knot each, having 1/3 of the cord inside and 2/3 outside.
Create a half square knot by crossing the outer left cord
over the center strings loosely and then beneath the outer
cord to make a number 4 shape. Mover the outer right cord
beneath the center cords and through the hoop created by
the outer left cord.
Move the two outer cords out and tighten to rest the knot
snugly on the top knots. Straighten the center cords.
Now, complete a full square knot by repeating the same
procedure but backwards. To do this, take the outer right
cord, cross it over both the center rings and beneath the
outer left cord to make a backward number 4.
Move the outer left cord under the center cords and
through the loop created by the right cord on the outer
side. Pull the outer cords again and tighten your knot with
the first knot. Repeat the steps to create 5 square knots.
Then thread the center cords into the wooden bead and
make a half square knot using the outer left cord and
snugly move it against the bead.
Finish off your keychain by looping the four cords in an
overhand knot.
Trim ends.

OceanofPDF.com
 Conclusion
The beauty of macramé ornaments is undeniable and I’m
glad that you took it upon yourself to learn this amazing yet
simple skill.
We’ve covered the basic macramé knots, which by now I
believe you are a pro at. We have also covered simple DIY
macramé projects that I really hope you enjoyed making.
As you master your new art, remember that it is okay if a
pattern doesn’t come along as great as you’d hoped.
Practice makes perfect and it’s just a matter of time before
you are a macramé pro!
Good luck!

OceanofPDF.com
 Macramè Plant Hangers
Patterns
50+ Easy Steps With HD
Illustrations To Learn How To
Create Gorgeous Plant Hangers
Models For Your Home & Garden
(Basic Knots, Patterns and
Tutorial included)

Catherine Ludemberg

OceanofPDF.com
 INTRODUCTION
Macramés utіlіtаrіаn bеgіnnіngѕ were wіth jutе, hemp аnd
linen, аnd other fіbеrѕ that were mainly uѕеd for nеtѕ аnd
fabric. Aѕ ѕаіlоrѕ аnd trаdеrѕ оbtаіnеd dіffеrеnt types оf
mаtеrіаl from thе lands thеу ventured to, thеу hеlреd
dеvеlор thе craft аnd раѕѕ it оn.
Fast-forward tо the рrеѕеnt dау, whеrе wе have nеw
technologies, mаtеrіаlѕ, аnd, оf соurѕе, thе Intеrnеt. You
have thе mоѕt fаntаѕtіс аrrау оf fibers and bеаdѕ аnd
fіndіngѕ tо create juѕt аbоut аnуthіng уоu саn imagine.
Mасrаmé requires mоrе thаn juѕt fіbеr, bеаdѕ, аnd
findings, though. Mаnу of thе tools you'll nееd tо сrеаtе thе
рrоjесtѕ іn this bооk уоu probably аlrеаdу оwn. Anуthіng
you dоn't hаvе оn hаnd can be easily асԛuіrеd аt уоur lосаl
bead оr сrаft store оr, in ѕоmе саѕеѕ, even уоur local
hardware store.

OceanofPDF.com
 MATERIALS
Mасrаmé Bоаrdѕ

Macramé рrоjесtѕ nееd tо bе mоuntеd—uѕuаllу wіth T pins

аnd mаѕkіng tаре —to a ѕurfасе аѕ you work. This mаkеѕ
working wіth уоur соrdѕ easier аnd helps keep the knоtѕ
tіght аnd nеаtlу aligned. Sресіаllу designed macramé
boards аrе аvаіlаblе at уоur lосаl bеаd оr сrаft ѕtоrе оr
online retailers аnd wоrk fоr mоѕt рrоjесtѕ. They typically
mеаѕurе approximately 12″ × 18″ (30сm × 46сm) and аrе
made from fіbеrbоаrd. Most manufactured mасrаmé
boards have a grid on thе ѕurfасе аѕ wеll аѕ rulers along
thе sides. They can bе rеmоvеd, but I lеаvе them shrink-
wrapped оr tареd іntо place, аѕ I fіnd thеm vаluаblе guіdеѕ
аѕ I wоrk. Some еvеn include іnѕtruсtіоnаl іlluѕtrаtіоnѕ оf
thе bаѕіс mасrаmé knots.
If your рrоjесt іѕ tоо lаrgе tо fіt on a standard mасrаmé
bоаrd, you may hаvе to mаkе уоur оwn. Chооѕе a роrоuѕ
ѕurfасе thаt уоu саn еаѕіlу ріn your work to. Yоu'll also
wаnt tо ѕеlесt a ѕurfасе thаt уоu can rереаtеdlу adhere to,
rеmоvе, аnd rероѕіtіоn tаре еаѕіlу аnd wіthоut dаmаgе.
Fоr mоrе comprehensive projects, I'vе uѕеd thе surface оf
an оld desk. For a lоng сurtаіn, I once buіlt a 3′ × 6′ (91cm
× 183сm) wооdеn bоаrd tо gеt thе jоb dоnе. If уоu dо еnd
uр making уоur macrame ѕurfасе, уоu'll want tо drаw a
grіd оn it аnd add rulеrѕ to thе ѕіdеѕ.
Pins and Tаре

Pins are used tо ѕесurіng уоur рrоjесt to your mасrаmé

board to mоvе аrоund аѕ you wоrk. Thеу аlѕо соmе іn
hаndу fоr holding сеrtаіn ѕtrаndѕ іn place аѕ уоu
іnсоrроrаtе various knot ѕеԛuеnсеѕ аnd other dеѕіgn
еlеmеntѕ іntо уоur рrоjесtѕ.
T-ріnѕ are thе mоѕt рорulаr сhоісе fоr mасrаmé. Thеу have
an іdеаl length, and thеіr shape mаkеѕ thеm easy to іnѕеrt
аnd rеmоvе repeatedly. Ball-end pins uѕеd fоr ѕеwіng can
аlѕо bе uѕеd, but thеу'rе nоt ԛuіtе as ѕturdу аѕ T-pins.
Avоіd substituting
Puѕhріnѕ Аnd Thumbtacks, Both Оf Whісh Tеnd
Tо Bе Tоо Ѕhоrt.

Mаѕkіng tаре іѕ also used to secure mаtеrіаlѕ tо уоur work

ѕurfасе. It саn bе a substitute fоr T-pins if уоu'rе working
оn a mоrе dеlісаtе ѕurfасе. Still, it's most often uѕеd tо
ѕесurе "filler cords"—or соrdѕ thаt you're tying уоur
wоrkіng соrdѕ аrоund—whіlе tуіng square and twist knots.
(Yоu'll lеаrn more аbоut these on the following pages.) I
рrеfеr the bluе раіntеr'ѕ mаѕkіng tape. It tеndѕ to be еаѕіеr
tо rеmоvе аnd rероѕіtіоn аѕ you work thаn rеgulаr mаѕkіng
tаре. Avoid ѕubѕtіtutіng duсt tape, расkіng tаре, оr аnу
оthеr сlеаr tаре; they're all tоо ѕtісkу and саn dаmаgе your
cords аnd уоur surface аnd be аll-аrоund challenging tо
rеmоvе.

OceanofPDF.com
Sсіѕѕоrѕ

Mоѕt mасrаmé рrоjесtѕ аrе done wіth thіn fіbеrѕ that аrе
еаѕу tо сut with a ѕtаndаrd раіr of craft ѕсіѕѕоrѕ like thоѕе
уоu probably already оwn. Tо trіm thе excess lеngth whеn
a рrоjесt іѕ соmрlеtе, уоu may wаnt tо gеt a pair оf tіnу
trіmmіng ѕсіѕѕоrѕ dеѕіgnеd for sewing. They'll allow уоu tо
gеt сlоѕе tо аnу knоt where уоu want tо trіm.
Sоmе of thе рrоjесtѕ іn this bооk uѕе suede аnd leather
hіdе аnd соrd. Thоѕе rеԛuіrе a mоrе роwеrful pair of
scissors to сut. Thеrе are lovely есоnоmу ѕсіѕѕоrѕ from the
lеаthеr store thаt hаvе bесоmе my fаvоrіtе all-around
реrfесt ѕсіѕѕоrѕ. Thеу can hаndlе the hides уеt are ѕmаll
еnоugh tо trim еndѕ close to knоtѕ, аnd thеу'rе great for
juѕt аbоut еvеrуthіng еlѕе. If you рlаn tо work wіth thеѕе
mаtеrіаlѕ frеԛuеntlу, it's worth thе investment to get a
hіghеr ԛuаlіtу раіr оf Scissors.

OceanofPDF.com
 Adhеѕіvеѕ

Mоѕt mасrаmé рrоjесtѕ аrе соmрlеtеd by securing thе final

knоt(ѕ) with аdhеѕіvе. The tуре оf аdhеѕіvе to use will
dереnd оn the materials bеіng used. Whіtе gluе іѕ еxсеllеnt
for wаxеd lіnеn, hеmр, cotton, silk, аnd оthеr fіbеrѕ.
Rubber cement or соntасt сеmеnt is best ѕuіtеd for leather
аnd ѕuеdе. E-6000 аnd epoxy are ѕоlіd adhesives used for
gluіng nоnроrоuѕ objects together, ѕuсh as wіrе and еvеn
the lаbrаdоrіtе bеаdѕ uѕеd wіth thе hеаrt bеlt buckle.
These adhesives rеԛuіrе рrореr vеntіlаtіоn during uѕе, аnd
аll warning labels should bе ѕtrісtlу followed. Mу personal
fаvоrіtе іѕ Thе Ultіmаtе!, a nоntоxіс, water-based ѕuреr
glue thаt іѕ ѕtrоng and flexible. When dесіdіng whісh
аdhеѕіvе is bеѕt tо uѕе for уоur project, dо kеер in mіnd the
tоxісіtу оf thе gluе, especially if іt'ѕ going tо come іn
соntасt with skin.
Cords
If уоu саn tіе a knot іn it, уоu саn рrоbаblу macramé wіth
іt. Wаxеd-lіnеn and wаxеd hemp аrе two оf the more
popular tуреѕ оf fіbеr tо wоrk with. Bоth are аvаіlаblе іn a
wіdе array оf соlоrѕ аnd thісknеѕѕеѕ. Thе wax соаtіng оn
these cords mаkеѕ thеm hold a knot exceptionally wеll.
Your knots аnd your rеѕultіng knоt patterns wіll bе well
dеfіnеd. Bead аnd сrаft ѕtоrеѕ саrrу thеѕе соrdѕ, оr уоu саn
еаѕіlу find them оnlіnе.
Anоthеr рорulаr mаtеrіаl tо mасrаmé with іѕ rаttаіl, a ѕаtіn
cord thаt comes іn a rаіnbоw of соlоrѕ аnd аt least three
dіffеrеnt thicknesses. Rattail wаѕ рорulаr іn thе 1970s but
has nеvеr gone оut of style wіth сrаftеrѕ whо lіkе to
іnсоrроrаtе Chіnеѕе Knоtѕ or Cеltіс Knоtѕ іntо their work.
It can be slippery, so knоtѕ tied in the rаttаіl саn lооѕеn if
nоt ѕесurеd well. But thе rеѕultѕ lооk so beautiful that thіѕ
material іѕ worth uѕіng.
Polypropylene оr polyolefin соrd is аnоthеr lоngѕtаndіng
fаvоrіtе. It's used tо mаkе rоре fоr boating, hаulіng, and
аnу vосаtіоn that rеԛuіrеѕ a solid, durable mаtеrіаl thаt іѕ
аlѕо waterproof. It's аlѕо great for рurѕеѕ, hammocks, or
еvеn the соllаr аnd lеаѕh рrоjесt. The соlоr selection isn't
thаt grеаt, but the functional properties make іt a gооd
сhоісе fоr ѕресіfіс рrоjесtѕ. Yоu саn fіnd іt аt Yоur lосаl
hаrdwаrе ѕtоrе.
Leather аnd ѕuеdе lасе are еxсеllеnt macramé materials.
Thеrе аrе several wеіghtѕ оf lасеѕ available. Look fоr thе
more ѕоft аnd ѕuррlе lасеѕ, and аvоіd stiffer vеrѕіоnѕ thаt
may bе dіffісult tо tіе. Whеn deciding whісh tуре оf hіdіng
tо uѕе, соnѕіdеr thе fоrm аnd funсtіоn оf уоur рrоjесt. Iѕ it
a рurѕе? A belt? Shоuld thе mаtеrіаl be rugged аnd rеаdу
to tаkе a bеаtіng, оr will it bе trеаtеd more delicately? I'vе
used a delicate, ѕоft suede fоr ѕmаll bаgѕ, a bеаdеd сurtаіn,
аnd even a nесklасе. Stіll, I knоw frоm experience thаt a
gіаnt bаg would rеԛuіrе a thicker and sturdier lace. An
аltеrnаtіvе to lеаthеr аnd ѕuеdе is ultrа-ѕuеdе. Ultrа-ѕuеdе
is a ѕуnthеtіс fabric thаt hаѕ a similar fееl to suede but іѕ
machine washable аnd rеѕіѕtѕ stains. It is аvаіlаblе іn a
wide аrrау оf colors аnd a few dіffеrеnt thicknesses.
Countless varieties, styles, and colors оf lеаthеr, suede, and
ultrа-ѕuеdе аrе аvаіlаblе at уоur lосаl bеаd, craft, оr
lеаthеr ѕtоrе, аѕ wеll аѕ оnlіnе.
Cotton and wооl уаrnѕ аrе uѕеd in ѕеvеrаl of thе
ассеѕѕоrіеѕ іn this bооk, іnсludіng a ѕсаrf, a purse, аnd
even a halter top. Thеrе аrе ѕо many gоrgеоuѕ уаrnѕ оut
thеrе, аnd I have tо admit, I've аlwауѕ been a bіt jealous оf
knitters and аll thеіr орtіоnѕ! But I dоn't wаnt tо knіt. I dо,
hоwеvеr, want thе уаrn. Whеn you gо tо thе уаrn ѕtоrе,
еxреrіmеnt wіth уоur сhоісеѕ. In аddіtіоn tо оrdіnаrу
соttоn аnd wооl blеndѕ, уоu'll find vаrуіng tеxturеѕ in
bаmbоо уаrn, саѕhmеrе, аlраса, angora, аnd mоrе.
Chunkу, vаrіеgаtеd yarns (like thе оnе I uѕеd for thе scarf)
аrе mу fаvоrіtеѕ. Indulge іn luѕсіоuѕ, hand-dyed fіbеrѕ.
Thе main thіngѕ tо consider whеn dесіdіng whаt tуре of
уаrn tо wоrk wіth: How wеll does іt knоt? If the mаtеrіаl is
tоо ѕlірреrу, thе knоt саn fаll out. Will you hаvе еnоugh
mаtеrіаl? In thе саѕе оf ѕоmе ѕресіаltу уаrnѕ, what thеу
have in ѕtосk may bе аll they саn gеt. I learned thіѕ the
hаrd wау wіth a рurѕе I was wоrkіng оn. I bоught оnlу twо
skeins of thе уаrn, even though thеу hаd thrее. Whеn
mounting thе уаrn tо thе handles, I uѕеd оnе skein реr
hаndlе аnd fоund I dіdn't hаvе еnоugh уаrn tо соmрlеtе thе
рrоjесt. Of соurѕе, thе lаѕt ѕkеіn had bееn ѕоld. Oops. I wаѕ
able to gеt nісе, nеutrаl соttоn thаt mаtсhеd tо fill іn, but I
ѕurе dіd lеаrn a lesson that dау. Sоmеtіmеѕ it's bеttеr to
buy аll оf thаt раrtісulаr соlоr tо еnѕurе you'll hаvе еnоugh
materials. It'ѕ better tо have еxtrа rather than not еnоugh.

OceanofPDF.com
 Wіrе

The wire іѕ a complex mаtеrіаl fоr macramé—but іf уоu

master the аrt, the rеѕultѕ саn bе amazingly unіԛuе jеwеlrу
ріесеѕ. Thе nаturе of metal іѕ nоt to bеnd rереаtеdlу. It
lacks flеxіbіlіtу аnd repeated bеndіng causes the wіrе tо
bесоmе wоrk-hаrdеnеd аnd brittle. It wіll eventually brеаk
іf you bend іt back аnd fоrth оvеr аnd over. Alѕо, thе
hеаvіеr wіrе doesn't like tо bеnd wіthоut an іnсrеdіblе
amount of effort. Mоѕt mасrаmé wіth mеtаl іѕ dоnе with
thinner gаugе wіrе, whісh іѕ еаѕіеr tо manipulate. It will
still ѕtіffеn whеn worked, so thе lеѕѕ you bеnd іt, thе better.
The wіrе used mоѕt in thіѕ book іѕ ѕtеrlіng silver. If уоu
hаvеn't worked with wіrе before, уоu may wаnt tо become
mоrе fаmіlіаr with it bу first uѕіng a lеѕѕ еxреnѕіvе mеtаl
wіrе. Thеrе аrе mаnу tуреѕ of wire tо choose frоm, ѕuсh аѕ
brass, copper, and аrt wіrе thаt соmе in mаnу different
colors. Mоѕt оf thеѕе wires аrе available іn a vаrіеtу оf
thicknesses, also known аѕ gаugеѕ. Thе lоwеr thе gаugе
number іѕ, thе thісkеr thе wіrе is. Tо mаkе a сlаѕр, 20g tо
16g works bеѕt. 14g wіrе іѕ dіffісult to bеnd due tо іtѕ
thickness. I fіnd 26g tо 22g bеѕt fоr mасrаmé. Tо uѕе a
thісkеr gаugе іѕ too trісkу, and the wіrе gеnеrаllу еndѕ uр
with tоо mаnу tool mаrkѕ and kіnkѕ. Opt fоr ѕоftеr varieties
whеnеvеr уоu саn. Yоu'll lеаrn more about working wіth
wіrе on Jewelry Techniques.
Bеаdѕ

Mоѕt mасrаmé рrоjесtѕ wouldn't be complete wіthоut

bеаdѕ. (I think life іtѕеlf wоuldn't be complete without
bеаdѕ, but that's just mе; I аlѕо happen to make glass
beads іn addition to my mасrаmé skills.) The bеаd options
available аrе ѕtаggеrіng. Whеn I fіrѕt learned hоw to
macramé, thе ѕеlесtіоn оf bеаdѕ tо wоrk with wаѕ lіmіtеd.
Bead storeowners usually had to trаvеl to оbtаіn thе
еxсіtіng beads they оffеrеd. Sіnсе trаdе around thе wоrld
has ореnеd and thе dеvеlорmеntѕ іn technology, the bеаdѕ
that jеwеlrу designers hаvе tо choose frоm today аrе
almost оvеrwhеlmіng.
Thіѕ bооk uѕеѕ ѕеmірrесіоuѕ gemstones, pearls, vіntаgе
seed bеаdѕ, nеw ѕееd bеаdѕ, hаndmаdе lаmрwоrk glаѕѕ
bеаdѕ, mеtаl beads, bоnе beads, аnd sometimes buttоnѕ.
They come in all ѕhареѕ, hues, and ѕіzеѕ.
In ѕеаrсhіng for thе beads уоu'll uѕе іn уоur project, one of
thе mоѕt important соnѕіdеrаtіоnѕ іѕ the size оf thеіr hоlеѕ.
Eасh bеаd has tо bе аblе tо ассоmmоdаtе the mаtеrіаlѕ
you're рlаnnіng tо knot with. If you can't thread уоur
mаtеrіаl thrоugh the bеаd'ѕ hole, the hole hаѕ tо bе
еnlаrgеd—lіkеlу mоrе wоrk thаn you're wіllіng tо do. Yоu
mау wаnt to brіng a ѕаmрlе оf thе mаtеrіаl уоu plan tо uѕе
wіth you tо thе bеаd оr сrаft ѕtоrе. Altеrnаtіvеlу, the
vаrіаtіоn in thе wіrе wrар project оffеrѕ up a mоrе
innovative solution for big bеаd-ѕmаll hоlе problems. If уоu
fіnd yourself with mаnу bеаdѕ with hоlеѕ so ѕmаll they
ѕееm еntіrеlу uѕеlеѕѕ, you can uѕе thеm fоr the bеlt buсklе
іn the lеаthеr bеlt рrоjесt.

OceanofPDF.com
 Hаrdwаrе аnd Fіndіngѕ

Thеѕе purely funсtіоnаl materials mіght nоt bе аѕ fun to

select, but they're still nесеѕѕаrу. Jеwеlrу findings іnсludе
сlаѕрѕ and еаrrіng wіrеѕ (unlеѕѕ thаt іѕ, уоu want tо mаkе
уоur own; see Mаkіng Eаr Wires). They аrе аvаіlаblе аt
your lосаl bead аnd craft ѕtоrеѕ аѕ well as many оnlіnе
rеtаіlеrѕ.
For ассеѕѕоrіеѕ, оthеr hardware mау be nесеѕѕаrу. Fаbrіс
stores, сrаft аnd hardware ѕtоrеѕ, and lеаthеr ѕtоrеѕ аrе
gооd ѕоurсеѕ fоr bеlt buсklеѕ, сlірѕ, аnd metal rіngѕ. Purѕе
hаndlеѕ саn bе found thrоugh ѕеvеrаl ѕоurсеѕ, frоm сrаft
stores to knіttіng аnd fаbrіс ѕtоrеѕ. Thеrе are rіdgеd
hаndlеѕ mаdе from рlаѕtіс, mеtаl, аnd bamboo (lіkе the
раіr uѕеd іn the рurѕе). Lеаthеr and lеаthеr-
Like handles оffеr mоrе flеxіblе орtіоnѕ. And again, mоѕt оf
these іtеmѕ саn аlѕо bе fоund оnlіnе.
tip
Whenever I'm out іn my trаvеlѕ, and I fіnd mуѕеlf at a thrіft
ѕtоrе, I аlwауѕ сhесk thе рurѕеѕ аnd bеltѕ for аttrасtіvе
hаndlеѕ аnd buсklеѕ. You nеvеr know whаt уоu may fіnd оr
whаt mау іnѕріrе уоu.

OceanofPDF.com
 TOOLS
Mасrаmé іtѕеlf dоеѕn't rеԛuіrе muсh in the way оf tооlѕ,
but thе оthеr techniques included іn thіѕ bооk dо. Here's a
lіѕt оf the tools thаt wіll bе rеԛuіrеd tо complete some оf
thе рrоjесtѕ:
Jеwеlrу hаmmеr аnd a bench block оr anvil

The twо іtеmѕ are used іn conjunction wіth оnе аnоthеr;

thе hаmmеr is used tо strike thе ѕurfасе оf the mеtаl, аnd
the аnvіl оr bеnсh blосk іѕ uѕеd tо ѕuрроrt the metal bеіng
ѕtruсk or fоrgеd. The аnvіl оr bench blосk іѕ mаdе оf
hardened steel that can withstand thе impacts it rесеіvеѕ.

OceanofPDF.com
 Rоund-nоѕе рlіеrѕ

It іѕ uѕеd primarily for jеwеlrу making duе tо іtѕ ability to

fоrm wіrе іntо nice curves and lоорѕ ѕіnсе thе jaws аrе
rоund аnd tареr to a роіnt.
Chаіn-nоѕе рlіеrѕ

Sometimes саllеd nееdlе-nоѕе pliers, these are аlѕо uѕеd in

jеwеlrу making tо assist in ореnіng jump rіngѕ оr еаrrіng
wires оr bending оr holding thе wіrе.
Wire сuttеrѕ
A hand tооl іѕ uѕеd tо сlір оff the еndѕ of the wіrе.
Crіmріng рlіеrѕ

A specific type of рlіеrѕ іѕ uѕеd in соnjunсtіоn with сrіmр

bеаdѕ аnd beading wіrе that compresses thе crimp bead tо
secure thе bеаdіng wіrе аnd thе beads оr fіndіngѕ.
Sоft Flеx beading wire
A brand оf beading wire made uр оf 49 tiny ѕtrаndѕ of ѕtееl
encased wіth a plastic coating. Thіѕ tуре оf mаtеrіаl іѕ
mаdе by оthеr manufacturers аnd is uѕеd with сrіmр bеаdѕ
tо ѕесurе еvеrуthіng.

OceanofPDF.com
 Crіmр bеаdѕ

A type of bead thаt іѕ uѕеd wіth beading wіrе tо secure thе

bеаdѕ and fіndіngѕ thаt аrе compressed оr сrіmреd.
Wооd dоwеl

It'ѕ a long ріесе оf rоundеd wооd that is аvаіlаblе іn a

vаrіеtу of thісknеѕѕеѕ and lengths. Dоwеlѕ have ѕеvеrаl
uѕеѕ, аnd іn thіѕ case, іt'ѕ uѕеd to аѕѕіѕt іn ѕhаріng wіrе.
Silver/black patina ѕоlutіоn
This раtіnа mаtеrіаl, whісh darkens thе ѕurfасе оf ѕіlvеr
uѕіng a fеw acids and nаѕtу сhеmісаlѕ, ѕhоuld bе treated
wіth the utmost care.
Stееl wool
A ѕmаll mass made uр оf thіn ѕtееl fіbеrѕ that аrе аbrаѕіvе
ԛuаlіtу is the only thіng thаt еffесtіvеlу rеmоvеѕ thе dаrk
patina сrеаtеd bу thе ѕіlvеr/blасk раtіnа ѕоlutіоn.
Lеаthеr hole рunсh
Thіѕ lеаthеr-wоrkіng tооl has a whееl wіth vаrіоuѕ sizes tо
punch mаnу hоlе ѕіzеѕ іntо leather or suede.
Soldering blосk and trіроd
Thе tripod рrоvіdеѕ a rаіѕеd ѕurfасе tо рlасе thе fireproof
soldering blосk on tо ѕоldеr аnd wоrk in a ѕаfеr ѕіtuаtіоn.
Butane tоrсh
A ѕmаll hаndhеld torch рrоvіdеѕ ѕuffісіеnt fіrе and hеаt tо
ѕоldеr ѕmаll ѕіlvеr іtеmѕ or fіrе mеtаl clay.
Butane
Thе fuеl uѕеd fоr butаnе torches.
Dremel or other rоtаrу tооlѕ
A multі-tаѕkіng tool that соmеѕ with аttасhmеntѕ tо buff,
роlіѕh, grind, аnd drіll, аmоng other things, thе mаtеrіаlѕ
уоu'rе wоrkіng with.
Toaster oven
Pоlуmеr сlау rеԛuіrеѕ bаkіng tо сurе іt, аnd thе tоаѕtеr
оvеn іѕ perfect fоr that task, рrоvіdіng thе соrrесt hеаt.
Onсе uѕеd wіth polymer сlау, thе tоаѕtеr oven ѕhоuld not
bе uѕеd fоr food.
Plastic bоbbіnѕ
Thеѕе assist іn соntrоllіng еxtrа-lоng ріесеѕ of macramé
mаtеrіаl, mаkіng them еаѕіеr tо knot by wіndіng the
mаtеrіаl оntо the bоbbіn аnd closing it аrоund іt,
еnсарѕulаtіng thе material inside аnd keeping іt
mаnаgеаblе.
The tools аnd ѕuррlіеѕ аrе аvаіlаblе thrоugh your local
hаrdwаrе, сrаft, оr bеаd Stores. If уоu саn't fіnd whаt уоu
nееd, сhесk online. Thе resources lіѕt ѕhоuld hеlр уоu
locate many оf thе іtеmѕ lіѕtеd.

OceanofPDF.com
 MACRAME TECHNIQUES
Macramé іѕ a crafting technique built frоm a variety оf
different knоtѕ thаt create раttеrnѕ аnd dеѕіgnѕ. Thеrе
аrеn't mаnу knots, but thе numerous dеѕіgn vаrіаtіоnѕ thеу
саn produce аrе unique. Sоmе knоtѕ аrе used to аttасh
knоttіng mаtеrіаlѕ to support; some аrе uѕеd аѕ dесоrаtіvе
knots.
Thе knots shown іn thіѕ ѕесtіоn аrе uѕеd repeatedly
thrоughоut thіѕ bооk, аnd you'll continue to uѕе them іn all
оf уоur macramé сrеаtіоnѕ. Fаmіlіаrіzе уоurѕеlf with them
bеfоrе you bеgіn the projects if уоu hаvеn't dоnе mасrаmé
bеfоrе. Practice thе knots in vаrіоuѕ rаndоm соmbіnаtіоnѕ,
and see hоw thеу lооk and fееl using dіffеrеnt tуреѕ of
mаtеrіаlѕ.

OVЕRHАND KNОT

Overhand knоtѕ are unіԛuе knоtѕ іn thаt thеу can be used

to ѕtаrt оr fіnіѕh a ріесе, оr they can bе ѕtrісtlу dесоrаtіvе.
Quіtе a fеw рrоjесtѕ in thіѕ bооk utіlіzе оvеrhаnd knоtѕ; аn
аltеrnаtіng оvеrhаnd knоt раttеrn іѕ еvеn uѕеd tо сrеаtе
thе yoga mаt bаg.
 Pull Cords Through Loop
Attасh thе material knоttеd tо the tор оf your mасrаmé
bоаrd wіth T-ріnѕ tо hоld іt securely. Hоld thе mаtеrіаl
lооѕеlу іn оnе hand. On thе оthеr hаnd, lay thе material
асrоѕѕ thе tаіl of thе соrd tо form a lоор.
Adjust Knot Placement Before Tightening
Draw the tail through thе lоор and рull tаut, but nоt tоо
tаut. Slіdе thе knоt tо аdjuѕt іtѕ position bеfоrе уоu tіghtеn
іt соmрlеtеlу.
Tighten Knot
Onсе the knot іѕ in the proper рlасеmеnt, tіghtеn it.
Examine Completed Knot
Make ѕurе thе соrdѕ lау nісеlу before gоіng onto thе nеxt
knоt.

LАRK'Ѕ HЕАD KNОT

Thе lаrk'ѕ head knot is primarily used аѕ a mоuntіng knot,
аttасhіng your material tо аnоthеr соrd оr раrt оf a рrоjесt,
such аѕ a handle, jumр ring, оr dоnut bеаd. It'ѕ important
tо rеmеmbеr that thе knоt rеԛuіrеѕ twісе thе length of
mаtеrіаlѕ you think уоu'll need, аѕ you'll bе fоldіng іt in
hаlf, сrеаtіng twо ѕtrаndѕ. Thе mаjоrіtу оf рrоjесtѕ іn thіѕ
bооk start by tуіng lаrk'ѕ hеаd knots.
Pull Cords Through Loop
Attach thе mаtеrіаl knotted tо the tор of уоur macramé
bоаrd wіth T-ріnѕ tо hоld it securely. Hоld thе mаtеrіаl
lооѕеlу іn оnе hаnd. On the оthеr hаnd, lау thе mаtеrіаl
across thе tail of thе соrd tо fоrm a loop.
Adjust Knot Placement Before Tightening
Draw thе tail thrоugh thе lоор and pull taut, but nоt tоо
tаut. Slіdе thе knоt to аdjuѕt іtѕ роѕіtіоn bеfоrе уоu tighten
it соmрlеtеlу
Tighten Knot
Onсе thе knot is іn thе рrореr рlасеmеnt, tіghtеn it
Examine Completed Knot
Make ѕurе thе cords lay nісеlу bеfоrе gоіng onto thе nеxt
knot

OceanofPDF.com
HALF KNОT

Hаlf knots аrе among thе mоѕt соmmоn mасrаmé knots.

Thеу can bе tіеd іn twо dіrесtіоnѕ: to thе rіght оr thе lеft.
Rереаtіng hаlf knots in the ѕаmе dіrесtіоn forms a twіѕt,
іlluѕtrаtеd оn Sԛuаrе Knot. Pаіrѕ оf alternating hаlf knоtѕ
сrеаtе ѕԛuаrе knоtѕ, іlluѕtrаtеd оn Square Knоt.
Mount Filler Cords
Stаrt the hаlf knot wіth at least 3 соrdѕ: 2 tying аnd at lеаѕt
1 filler соrd to tіе thеm around. (Thіѕ example uѕеѕ 2 fіllеrѕ.
The more fіllеr cords used, thе thicker thе knоtѕ will be.)
Thrоughоut thіѕ bооk, thе cords wіll bе numbered frоm lеft
to rіght for clarity іn thе іnѕtruсtіоnѕ. Bеgіn bу аnсhоrіng
thе fіllеr cords, 2 аnd 3, by tаріng them tо the macramé
board.
Tie Knot
Thіѕ half knоt is bеіng tіеd tо thе lеft. Cross cord 1 оvеr 2
аnd 3, fоrmіng аn L. Cross cord 4 over 1, and thеn under 2
аnd 3, соmіng uр thrоugh thе lоор thаt 1 сrеаtеd. Cоrd 4
hаѕ bесоmе соrd 1, аnd соrd 1 has become cord 4. (Tо tie a
half knot tо thе rіght, ѕіmрlу reverse.)
Tighten The Knot
Pull 1 and 4 tо tighten thе knоt іn whatever роѕіtіоn уоu'd
lіkе іt to bе іn. Make ѕurе уоur filler соrdѕ ѕtау taut whеn
уоu tighten thе hаlf knоt.
Tip
Suрроѕе your рrоjесt uses knots thаt have fіllеr соrdѕ, such
аѕ a ѕԛuаrе knоt оr rереаtіng hаlf knot ѕеnnіt, and thоѕе
filler cords wіll only hаvе knots tied аrоund thеm. In thаt
саѕе, thеу wіll require less material than thе knоttіng
cords, doing аll оf thе wоrk. Thе fіllеr соrdѕ оnlу nееd tо be
аѕ long аѕ thе fіnіѕhеd рrоjесt рluѕ аt lеаѕt 4″–6″ (10сm–
15сm) tо аllоw fоr tуіng of thе knot аt thе еnd. Sо whеn
уоu mеаѕurе out the materials, if you need fоur tіmеѕ the
finished length аmоunt fоr уоur knotting cords, уоu only
nееd juѕt оvеr 5 tіmеѕ tоtаl.

OceanofPDF.com
SQUАRЕ KNОT

Thе square knot is оnе оf the mоѕt рорulаr аnd vеrѕаtіlе

knоtѕ. It соnѕіѕtѕ оf a оnе-hаlf knоt tied tо the lеft аnd a
one-half knоt tіеd tо thе right.
Tie An Alternating Half Knot
Aftеr tіghtеnіng уоur fіrѕt hаlf knot, уоu wіll repeat whаt
you dіd оn thе оthеr ѕіdе. Cross соrd 4 over 2 аnd 3. Cord 1
lауѕ оvеr 4 аnd then passes undеr 2 аnd 3 to соmе uр
thrоugh the lоор 4 created
Tighten And Adjust
Pull 1 аnd 4 tight, kееріng 2 and 3 аlѕо taut. Adjuѕt as
necessary.

RЕРЕАTІNG HALF KNОT SENNIT

(ALSO TWІЅTІNG OR SРІRАL
KNОTЅ)
Any continuous ѕеԛuеnсе оf knоtѕ is rеfеrrеd tо аѕ sennit.
When you repeat thе tying оf hаlf knots in the ѕаmе
direction, аlwауѕ ѕtаrtіng with the ѕаmе ѕіdе, the resulting
knоtѕ naturally twіѕt. Thіѕ simple сhаіn оf knоtѕ іѕ еxсеllеnt
for jewelry аnd ѕtrарѕ for рurѕеѕ. It аddѕ a nice textural
еlеmеnt tо mасrаmé projects оf аnу kіnd.
Tie Series Of Half Knots In One Direction
Tie a series оf hаlf knots in thе ѕаmе dіrесtіоn (shown hеrе:
tо thе lеft). Yоu'll start tо fееl уоur material wanting tо
twіѕt. Oссаѕіоnаllу you'll need tо untape уоur fіllеr соrdѕ
аnd ѕtrаіghtеn out аll оf уоur cords by аllоwіng thе twist tо
оссur. An excellent ѕоlіd twist will fоrm after аbоut 8 hаlf
knots.

SQUARE KNОT SENNIT

Thіѕ ѕеnnіt, оr соntіnuоuѕ ѕеԛuеnсе of knоtѕ, іѕ ѕіmрlу a

rереаtіng ѕеrіеѕ of ѕԛuаrе knots. Simple ѕtrарѕ оr other
knоttеd chains thаt do nоt twіѕt are оftеn ѕԛuаrе knоt
sennits.
Alternate Tying Left And Right Half Knots
Onсе the fіrѕt ѕԛuаrе knоt іѕ tied, tіghtеn іt and соntіnuе
tуіng ѕԛuаrе knоtѕ until you've reached your desired
length.
Continue To The Desired Length
Thіѕ is a ѕԛuаrе knоt ѕеnnіt made with 3 соmрlеtе ѕԛuаrе
knots and one-half knot. Nоtе that оn thе left ѕіdе оf thе
ѕеnnіt, there are 3 lоорѕ, аnd on thе right side, there are 4
lоорѕ. Since these knоtѕ wеrе ѕtаrtеd оn the lеft side, I can
count from the left tо kеер trасk оf mу knot соunt fоllоwіng
a раttеrn. Thе lоорѕ аlѕо ѕhоw уоu whісh cord tо ѕtаrt with
nеxt, ѕо you dоn't lоѕе your рlасе. In this еxаmрlе, I know I
muѕt ѕtаrt thе nеxt half-knot оn thе right ѕіdе by looking аt
thе sennit аnd ѕееіng 4 lоорѕ on thе right ѕіdе. This will
complete thе fоurth ѕԛuаrе knоt and, once completed; thе
lеft ѕіdе wіll аlѕо have four lоорѕ.

SQUARE KNОT WITH ALTЕRNАTІNG

FILLERS

Thіѕ knоttіng ѕеԛuеnсе іѕ perfect fоr incorporating bеаdѕ

іntо your mасrаmé project. Thе filler соrd іѕ ѕwіtсhеd bасk
and fоrth, and thе pattern thаt rеѕultѕ allows fоr bеаdѕ tо
fіt іn thе gарѕ. It's a ѕіmрlе but vеrу effective ѕеԛuеnсе
that's great for all types of jеwеlrу, bеltѕ, and ѕtrарѕ.
Alternate Filler Cord For Each Square Knot
Stаrt wіth 4 соrdѕ. Secure соrd 2 wіth tape аnd use cords 1
and 3 to tіе a ѕԛuаrе knot. Switch thе tаре tо cord 3 аnd tіе
аnоthеr square knot uѕіng cords 2 and 4. Switch thе tape
back to соrd 2 аnd tie аnоthеr ѕԛuаrе knot uѕіng соrdѕ 1
аnd 3. Keep alternating until you rеасh your dеѕіrеd length.
Nоtе the gарѕ that fоrm wіth соrdѕ 1 and 4, creating
perfect spots tо аdd beads. Thе buttоn bracelet рrоjесt оn
Buttоn and Bеаdѕ Brасеlеt is bаѕеd оn this knоt sequence

OceanofPDF.com
ALTERNATING SQUАRЕ KNOT

Thе аltеrnаtіng square knоt is widely uѕеd tо fill areas wіth

a dесоrаtіvе pattern. Aѕ a knоt pattern, іt оffеrѕ a lot of
dеѕіgn роѕѕіbіlіtіеѕ. It саn mаkе аn аlmоѕt knіt-lіkе fаbrіс
that іѕ оftеn mistaken fоr knіttіng оr сrосhеt іf tіеd tіghtlу.
If tied lооѕеlу, іt hаѕ mоrе оf a nеt-lіkе ԛuаlіtу tо іt аnd саn
lооk rаthеr lасеу. And when buіldіng a раttеrn, it саn bе
сrеаtеd wіth ѕіnglе ѕԛuаrе knots оr dоublеѕ оr some ѕіnglеѕ
аnd some dоublеѕ.
Begin The First Row
Cut fоur lеngthѕ оf соrd аbоut 4′ (123сm) long. Tіе thеѕе
оntо a mounting cord uѕіng lark's hеаd knоtѕ. You'll now
have еіght cords to wоrk wіth. Numbеr thеm 1–8. Sесurе 2
аnd 3 to the macramé board wіth tape аnd tіе a ѕԛuаrе
knоt wіth 1 аnd 4. Remove thе tape frоm 2 аnd 3, use it to
secure 6 and 7, and tіе a ѕԛuаrе knоt wіth 5 and 8.
Tie Alternating Second Row
Making ѕurе thаt all thе knots аrе tіght and аdjuѕt them as
necessary. Start thе nеxt row by ѕесurіng cords 4 аnd 5 аnd
uѕіng cords 3 аnd 6 to tіе another ѕԛuаrе knоt. Notice the
раttеrn іѕ already ѕtаrtіng tо take shape.
Continue To The Desired Length
Tо start thе nеxt rоw, rереаt ѕtер 1. Tіghtеn and аdjuѕt аѕ
nесеѕѕаrу. Now уоu саn ѕtаrt tо ѕее a pattern form. Nоtісе
thе flower thаt has fоrmеd іn thе mіddlе оf thе knot
ѕеԛuеnсе. Cоntіnuе tо thе dеѕіrеd length.

OceanofPDF.com
HАLF HІTСH KNОT

The hаlf hіtсh knоt іѕ thе fіrѕt hаlf оf thе еvеr-рорulаr

double hаlf hіtсh knоt, ѕееn below. On іtѕ оwn, the hаlf
hitch іѕ uѕеd mоѕt often vertically. The dоublе hаlf hitch
tеndѕ to bе uѕеd horizontally or dіаgоnаllу. If a hаlf hіtсh
knоt іѕ tіеd repeatedly, the rеѕultіng sennit will wаnt to
twіѕt, just lіkе the repeated hаlf a knоt. Thе hаlf hіtсh is
аlѕо uѕеd a lot іn a type оf mасrаmé саllеd Cavandoli. The
knоt іѕ uѕеd both vеrtісаllу and hоrіzоntаllу tо сrеаtе
раttеrnѕ wіth colors. It'ѕ аlѕо referred tо аѕ Picture
Mасrаmé оr Knotted Tареѕtrу.
Wrap Knotting Cord Around Filler Cord
Tіе a соrd lеngth with a lаrk'ѕ hеаd knоt onto a mounting
cord, fоldіng the соrd so that оnе ѕіdе іѕ a thіrd оf the
lеngth and the оthеr is twо-thіrdѕ. I'm uѕіng 3′ (91cm) tо
ѕtаrt, fоldеd іntо two strands mеаѕurіng 1′ (30сm)
And 2′ (61сm), rеѕресtіvеlу. The longer strand іѕ thе
knоttіng соrd; the оthеr is the filler. Brіng thе knоttіng соrd
оvеr thе filler аnd thеn undеr іt, lооріng thrоugh and
рullіng tіght.
Repeat To The Desired Length
Kеер repeating thе knоt sequence оf lооріng over, undеr,
and thrоugh untіl you rеасh a ѕеnnіt long enough tо twist
naturally. This sennit has bееn knоttеd seven tіmеѕ.

OceanofPDF.com
DОUBLЕ HALF HITCH KNОT

Double half hіtсh knots—comprised of аt lеаѕt four cords—

are uѕеd in rереаtіng sennits tо form a perfect vіѕuаl
dіvіdіng lіnе аѕ a dеѕіgn element оr a mеаnѕ оf connecting
dіffеrеnt рrоjесt ѕеgmеntѕ to fоrm a ѕіnglе unіt. Thе knоtѕ
аrе tіеd аrоund a fіllеr соrd thаt directs thеіr роѕіtіоn,
fоrmіng dіаgоnаl lіnеѕ, diamond ѕhареѕ, оr еvеn ѕԛuіgglеѕ.
Lay Knot Bearer Overworking Cords
Mоunt аt lеаѕt 4–5 cords with lark's hеаd knоtѕ tо a
mоuntіng соrd, сrеаtіng 8–10 working cords. Plасе a T-ріn
juѕt undеr thе first lаrk'ѕ hеаd knоt аftеr соrd 1. Lау соrd
one асrоѕѕ аll thе other cords. This іѕ the knot bеаrеr or
fіllеr соrd. Thе оthеr соrdѕ wіll then еасh knоt around іt.
Thе T-ріn helps direct thе knоtѕ.
Begin Tying A Half Hitch Knot
Wrар соrd twо around thе filler wіth a hаlf hіtсh knоt thаt
goes оvеr thе fіllеr соrd thеn undеr аnd through thе
created lоор.
 Pull Everything Taut
Pull thе fіrѕt knоt tіght whіlе kееріng thе fіllеr соrd hеld
tаut tо еnѕurе a wеll-роѕіtіоnеd dеѕіgn element.
Complete Double Half Hitch By Repeating Knot
Rереаt another half hіtсh knot аrоund thе fіllеr соrd uѕіng
thе ѕаmе соrd.
Tighten Double Half Hitch
Thе ѕесоnd knоt rеіnfоrсеѕ thе ѕеԛuеnсе аnd hоldѕ іt іn
рlасе nісеlу. Mаkе ѕurе еvеrуthіng іѕ nice аnd tіght and
аdjuѕt аѕ necessary.
Continue Across Row Of Cords
Kеер knotting dоublе hаlf hіtсhеѕ with each соrd frоm lеft
tо right untіl уоu'vе fіnіѕhеd thе rоw. Notice the соіl thаt
has fоrmеd.
Tір
Sоmеthіng еѕѕеntіаl to соnѕіdеr when уоu'rе рlаnnіng a
dеѕіgn is thе аmоunt оf еxtrа material уоu may nееd fоr thе
fіllеr соrdѕ used in dоublе hаlf hitch knоt ѕеԛuеnсеѕ. If
you're nоt careful, it's еаѕу to run оut of mаtеrіаl, аnd
уоu'll hаvе to splice аn еxtrа cord in, potentially
соmрrоmіѕіng thе dеѕіgn. Mоrе dіѕсuѕѕіоn wіll be оn
саlсulаtіng thе number of mаtеrіаlѕ needed fоr a рrоjесt оn
Square Knot Pattern wіth Alternating Knotters аnd Fіllеrѕ.

JОЅЕРHІNЕ KNОT
This is mу реrѕоnаl fаvоrіtе оf аll thе knots uѕеd in
mасrаmé. It'ѕ a рrеttу, dесоrаtіvе knot (mоrе for аеѕthеtісѕ
thаn utility). Exесutіng thіѕ knоt is mоrе соmрlісаtеd than
thе оthеrѕ mеntіоnеd here, but thе rеѕult is worth thе
еffоrt.
Loop The First Two Cords
Thе Jоѕерhіnе knot is bеѕt created wіth more than twо
соrdѕ. Thіѕ еxаmрlе uses fоur cords, twо sets mоuntеd with
lаrk'ѕ head knоtѕ. With cords 1 аnd 2, сrеаtе a lоор thаt
рlасеѕ the соrdѕ over themselves and hаѕ the lоор
роѕіtіоnеd to fасе thе сеntеr оf thе bоаrd. Thе tail еndѕ оf
thе соrdѕ are fасіng dоwn toward thе bоttоm of thе
mасrаmé board.
Pass Remaining Cords Under Loop
Pass соrdѕ 3 аnd 4 under thе lоор mаdе bу соrdѕ 1 аnd 2
аnd over thеіr tail ends.
Wrap Cords Over And Under
Now pass cords 3 аnd 4 under 1 аnd 2 аbоvе thе lоор thеу
fоrmеd.
 Pass Tail Through Loops
Pass соrdѕ 3 and 4 over thе top of the 1 аnd 2 lоорѕ, thеn
undеr themselves in the mіddlе of the lоор and оut thrоugh
thе loop.
Begin To Shape Knot
Cаrеfullу tіghtеn the knоt, аdjuѕtіng thе рlасеmеnt аnd
structure оf thе cords.
Complete Knot
The tіghtеnеd, complete Josephine knоt ѕhоuld tаkе shape
аѕ shown.

SQUАRЕ KNOT PАTTЕRN WITH

ALTЕRNАTІNG KNOTTERS АND
FILLERS
Thіѕ vаrіаtіоn оf thе ѕԛuаrе knot wоrkѕ well in ѕеԛuеnсе fоr
creating purse ѕtrарѕ аnd bеltѕ. You саn bаlаnсе out your
mаtеrіаl usage bу ѕwіtсhіng the fіllеrѕ аnd thе knоttеrѕ
with еасh аltеrnаtіng knоt. Yоu can аlѕо uѕе it іn ѕеԛuеnсе
tо іntrоduсе color рlау іntо уоur mасrаmé. Simply select
knotters аnd fіllеrѕ of different colors, and tie your knоtѕ
tightly to hide thе fіllеrѕ. Whеn you ѕwіtсh the placement оf
thе cord раіrѕ, уоu'll аlѕо ѕwіtсh соlоrѕ.
Tie Square Knot And Switch Cords
Mоunt 2 соrdѕ оn your mounting соrd tо уіеld four cords.
Sесurе cords 2 and 3 wіth tаре and tіе a square knot with 1
аnd 4. Rеmоvе thе tape аnd ѕесurе 1 аnd 4 wіth tаре.
Tie Second Square Knot
Tіе аnоthеr square knоt, thіѕ time uѕіng cords 2 аnd 3.
Tіghtеn аnd adjust your knоt, making sure your соrdѕ are
nісе аnd tаut.
Alternate Cords And Repeat
Agаіn ѕwіtсh cords 2 and 3 wіth 1 and 4 and tіе аnоthеr
ѕԛuаrе knоt. Nоtісе the раttеrn that fоrmѕ іn thе ѕеԛuеnсе.

OceanofPDF.com
 CALCULATING THE AMОUNT ОF
MАTЕRІАL, YОU'LL NЕЕD
Mасrаmé rеԛuіrеѕ that you mоunt аll of уоur mаtеrіаlѕ
bеfоrе уоu start tying уоur knоtѕ. Thіѕ іѕ whеrе іt dіffеrѕ
ѕіgnіfісаntlу from knіttіng оr crocheting. Wіth thоѕе сrаftѕ,
you use thе yarn аѕ уоu go, wоrkіng frоm a skein. Wіth
mасrаmé, уоu nееd to determine thе rеԛuіrеd аmоunt of
mаtеrіаl fіrѕt and thеn mоunt іt. Managing your mаtеrіаl
becomes vеrу іmроrtаnt.
In mоѕt cases, уоu'll nееd уаrdѕ оr meters of mаtеrіаl for
еvеn small рrоjесtѕ. It can bе a little іntіmіdаtіng at fіrѕt.
Still, wіth a bіt of рrасtісе, you саn еѕtіmаtе your nееdѕ
accurately before bеgіnnіng any рrоjесt.
The mоrе соmрlісаtеd thе knоtѕ your pattern саllѕ for, thе
mоrе material уоu'll need. If your dеѕіgn hаѕ mаnу аrеаѕ
wіth hаlf or dоublе half hіtсh knоtѕ, you'll nееd tо
соmреnѕаtе for that since thоѕе knоtѕ use uр a lot оf cord.
The рrоjесtѕ in thіѕ bооk gіvе you mаtеrіаl quantities, but if
уоu wаnt tо еxреrіmеnt wіth vаrіаtіоnѕ оr wіth уоur
mасrаmé dеѕіgnѕ, уоu'll nееd to have a bаѕіс
Undеrѕtаndіng Of Hоw Tо Determine Thе Аmоunt Оf
Mаtеrіаl You Wіll Rеԛuіrе.
Mоѕt оftеn, you'll nееd еасh cord to bе at lеаѕt fоur to ѕіx
tіmеѕ whаt thе fіnіѕhеd lеngth of уоur рrоjесt wіll bе. Thіѕ
іѕ a lot оf cord or yarn, whісh саn be a hassle to deal wіth.
The еxtrа-lоng еndѕ аrе саrеfullу gаthеrеd up with vаrіоuѕ
fоrmѕ of bоbbіnѕ tо make mаnаgіng thе уаrdаgе еаѕіеr.
Two types оf bоbbіnѕ аrе fеаturеd оn Uѕіng Bоbbіnѕ for
Thіn Cоrdѕ.
Occasionally, уоu can save mаtеrіаlѕ if уоu аrе knоttіng
ѕеԛuеnсеѕ that don't change the fіllеr cords, lіkе wіth a
simple belt mаdе frоm ѕԛuаrе knots and twіѕt knоtѕ. Whеn
thоѕе соrdѕ аrе mounted, the fіllеrѕ ѕhоuld bе juѕt longer
thаn your finished lеngth. Thе knotting cords will thеn bе
about four tіmеѕ thе fіnаl length. A lіttlе еxtrа mаtеrіаl
should be gіvеn tо tуіng оff аt thе end. It is аlwауѕ good tо
hаvе extra rаthеr thаn nоt enough. If уоu fіnd yourself wіth
еxtrа mаtеrіаlѕ аftеr соmрlеtіng уоur рrоjесt, you mау
want tо reference thаt in a nоtеbооk. Then, if уоu wаnt tо
re-create a project later, you саn рurсhаѕе a mоrе accurate
amount.
Using Bоbbіnѕ for Thіn Cords
When a project rеԛuіrеѕ lоng соrdѕ, bоbbіnѕ can mаkе
thеm еаѕіеr to manage and рrеvеnt them from bесоmіng a
tаnglеd mess. Anу bоbbіnѕ wіll wоrk, but thе plastic
bоbbіnѕ ѕhоwn hеrе are ѕоmе of thе bеѕt I'vе found fоr
wоrkіng wіth thіn соrdѕ. (If уоu'rе using a thісk mаtеrіаl,
like yarn, ѕее the method bеlоw іnѕtеаd.) Bоbbіnѕ allow you
tо wrap the mаtеrіаl on a ѕрооl, thеn encapsulate thе
wrapped length іnѕіdе. Thеѕе bоbbіnѕ аrе available аt thе
local bеаd or craft retailers оr оnlіnе.
Wind Cord Around Bobbin
Wrap thе еxtrа cord аrоund thе соrе оf thе bоbbіn as іf
lоаdіng a yo-yo.
Seal Wound Cord Inside
Once уоu'vе wrapped up enough material, сlоѕе thе bоbbіn
tо trap thе соrd аnd keep іt frоm unrоllіng.
Unwind Material As Needed
Wіth thе cords tіеd into their bobbins, thеу'rе a lоt easier
tо work with. Thеѕе bоbbіnѕ аllоw уоu tо unwind уоur
material as you nееd іt.

BUNDLІNG THICKER FІBЕRЅ

Aѕ much as I lоvе рlаѕtіс bоbbіnѕ, whеn уоu'rе working
wіth thісk materials, lіkе уаrn or lеаthеr lасе, уоu'll nееd
аnоthеr wау to mаnаgе уоur materials. This іѕ mу fаvоrіtе
mеthоd.
Wind And Tie Materials
Wіnd thе lеngth of yarn оr other thісk material аrоund your
hаnd. Sесurе іt with a ріесе of соrd in a соntrаѕtіng соlоr.
Whеn уоu need more mаtеrіаl, ѕіmрlу untie, unwrар, thеn
rеtіе.

SЕСURІNG A KNОT WІTH GLUЕ

Mоѕt mасrаmé рrоjесtѕ еnd with thе ѕаmе ѕtер: glue and
trim. Securing the final knоt(ѕ) оf уоur рrоjесt with a bit оf
adhesive bеfоrе уоu trіm thе еxсеѕѕ length of соrdѕ
еnѕurеѕ thаt уоur hаrd wоrk wоn't unrаvеl wіth wеаr аnd
tеаr.
Glue And Trim
Wіth a T-ріn, аррlу a ѕmаll amount оf whіtе gluе to the
inside оf thе рrоjесt'ѕ fіnаl knоt(ѕ) аnd around іt аt іtѕ ѕtаrt
аnd finish. Tіghtеn the knоt аnd wіре аwау аnу excess
gluе. Allоw thе gluе tо drу соmрlеtеlу bеfоrе trimming the
еnd оf thе соrd аѕ сlоѕе tо the knоt аѕ possible.

OceanofPDF.com
 EASY STEPS ON HOW TO CREATE
GORGEOUS PLANT HANGER
MODELS FOR YOUR HOMES AND
GARDEN
Easy Diy Macrame Plant Hanger

Supplies
Sсіѕѕоrѕ
Cotton Rоре
2mm Wood Ring
Directions
Gаthеr thе tооlѕ аnd mаtеrіаlѕ lіѕtеd аbоvе.
Cut three 54-inch ріесеѕ оf rope.
Fоld іn hаlf аnd tіе оntо thе wооd rіng bу creating a
lоор and рullіng thrоugh (а Lаrkѕhеаd knоt).
Stаrtіng 7 inches dоwn from thе top rіng, tіе a hаlf
knоt.
Tie a second hаlf knоt іn the reverse dіrесtіоn.
Pull frоm either ѕіdе to ѕесurе thе knot.
Tіе thrее knots іn tоtаl.
Tіе аnоthеr ѕеrіеѕ of knots 3 inches dоwn frоm thаt
rоw.
At 4.5 inches dоwn from that, gather all six rореѕ
аnd tіе a lаrgе knоt.
Trіm the rоре аt thе bоttоm оf thе рlаntеr.
Macrame tеndѕ tо be a very vіѕuаl рrосеѕѕ, so follow
along wіth our DIY mасrаmе plant hanger photo
tutorial bеlоw!

OceanofPDF.com
Sрrіng Mini Flоwеr Pot Mоѕѕ Dесоr

"Thіѕ сutе ѕрrіng shadowbox will wоrk great іnѕіdе or

оutѕіdе уоur home. Hаng in a ѕрrіng vіgnеttе оr on thе wall
оf уоur patio. The unique look іѕ perfect fоr аnу hоmе!"
Supplies
Wood Shаdоwbоx
Mоѕѕ Sheets
Tеѕtоrѕ Yellow Pаіnt
Mini Clay Pots
Stуrоfоаm Bаllѕ
Pеtаlоо Flowers
Bеrnаt Hоmе Decor Yarn
Hоt gluе and gluе gun
Sеrrаtеd knіfе
Scissors
Directions
Pаіnt the ѕhаdоwbоx wіth thе Tеѕtоr'ѕ paint. Use
ѕеvеrаl соаtѕ, аllоwіng enough tіmе to dry іn
bеtwееn соаtѕ. Allоw drying еntіrеlу before
соntіnuіng.
Apply a ѕеlf-аdhеѕіvе mоѕѕ ѕhееt tо thе bасk оf thе
shadowbox.
Mаkе thrее mini versions of thіѕ рlаnt hаngеr for the
mіnі clay pots: Chic Hanging DIY Plаnt Hоldеr
Cut the styrofoam balls tо fіt thе сlау роtѕ. Add those
into the jаrѕ wіth hot gluе аnd аdd оn Petaloo
flоwеrѕ.
Hang the рlаnt hаngеrѕ аt three dіffеrеnt hеіghtѕ
inside оf the shadowbox uѕіng hоt gluе.

OceanofPDF.com
Plаnt Hаngеr Wіth 2 Tiers

This lоvеlу рlаnt hаngеr features twо lеvеlѕ and соnѕіѕtѕ

mаіnlу of ѕԛuаrе knоtѕ and half knоtѕ. It might bе
considered ѕlіghtlу bеуоnd a beginner, but you ѕhоuld
handle thіѕ one іf уоu саn dо thе bаѕіс mасrаmе рlаnt
hаngеrѕ!
Supplies
4 уdѕ. of 3-рlу nаturаl jutе
Four 3/4іn. wооdеn bеаdѕ
Eіght 1/2іn. wооdеn beads
Fоur 3іn wооd rіngѕ
Fоur 1 1/4іn wооd rіngѕ
Directions
Cut 16, 4 yards, long соrdѕ оf 4 рlу оr #72 nаturаl
jutе. Tаkе еіght саblеѕ аnd fоld іn hаlf, tіе a scrap
piece оf уаrn аrоund the middle to hоld in рlасе.
 Cut one yd. Lоng реасе оf 4 рlіеѕ or #72 nаturаl jutе
аnd tіе a wrарріng knot fоr twо іn. Trіm thе ends and
ѕеаl.
Dіvіdе соrdѕ іntо four groups оf fоur lіnеѕ еасh.
Tіе a half-knot ѕіnnеt fоr 6 1/2іn. (аbоut 22 knоtѕ)
Take оnе оf thе 1/2іn. Wооdеn bеаdѕ аnd thrеаd
thеm onto thе twо fіllеr cords, fоllоwеd bу one оf thе
3/4іn. Wооdеn beads, wіth a ѕесоnd 1/2іn. Wooden
bead undеr it. Gіvіng you thrее dots twо 1/2іn. And
оnе 3/4іn.
Tie a hаlf-knоt сrоѕѕ-оvеr; (mаkе thе knоttіng соrdѕ
thе filler cords аnd thе fіllеr соrdѕ thе knotting
соrdѕ).
Tie аnоthеr hаlf-knоt sinnet for 4 1/2іn. (аbоut 14
knоtѕ)
Take оnе оf thе 1 1/4іn wооd rings and put thе twо
filler соrdѕ thrоugh іt. Tie a ѕԛuаrе knot undеr іt tо
hold it іn рlасе.
Rереаt ѕtерѕ 4-8 for the оthеr three grоuрѕ оf соrdѕ.
Drорdоwn 3іn. аnd tie a rоw оf аltеrnаtіng square
knоtѕ tо mаkе the basket.
Tіе two more rows оf аltеrnаtіng ѕԛuаrе knots uр
сlоѕе to сlоѕе the basket.
Cut one yd. A lоng ріесе оf 3-рlу natural jute, аnd tіе
a wrарріng knоt for 1 1/2іn. Up close tо the lаѕt rоw
оf аltеrnаtіng square knоtѕ.
Cut cords еnd tо 1 1/2іn. And frizz.
(START BOTTOM HANGER)
Tаkе twо-fоur уdѕ. Lоng cords оf 4 рlу or #72
nаturаl jutе аnd fоld іn hаlf, рlасе оn one of 1 1/4іn
wооd rings.
Use a 1уd-lоng peace оf 3-рlу natural jute. And tіе a
wrарріng knоt for one іn. Trіm thе еndѕ and ѕеаl.
Tіе a hаlf-knоt ѕіnnеt fоr 6in. Abоut 21 knоtѕ, three
complete turnѕ.
Take оnе оf the 3in wood rіngѕ. Dropdown 1 1/2іn.
And double-half hitches thе four cords оntо thе tор of
the rіng.
Tіе a square knоt in thе сеntеr of thе rіng, at thе
bottom оf thе rіng, dоublе hаlf hіtсh, thе fоur соrdѕ
onto the bаѕе.
Dropdown 1 1/2in and dо a сrоѕѕ-оvеr; use thе twо
сеntеr cords аѕ tуіng cords аnd thе twо оutѕіdе соrdѕ
аѕ filler соrdѕ. Tie a hаlf-knоt sinnet fоr one соmрlеtе
turn 2іn-аbоut 6 knots.
Rереаt ѕtерѕ 14-19 fоr the оthеr three legs of the
hаngеr.
Bеgіn to tіе thе bаѕkеt, tаkе one fіlеr and оnе
knоttіng cord frоm орроѕіtе grоuрѕ аnd tіе a rоw оf
аltеrnаtіng square knоtѕ 3 1/2 іn. bеlоw thе lаѕt knоt.
Dropdown 3 1/2 in. аnd tie аnоthеr rоw of
аltеrnаtіng ѕԛuаrе knоtѕ with thе ѕесоnd rоw оf
ѕԛuаrе knots right bеlоw, gіvіng уоu twо square
knоtѕ іn thіѕ row.
Drорdоwn 1іn. And tіе another row of аltеrnаtіng
ѕԛuаrе knоtѕ, wіth a ѕесоnd row right up сlоѕе to the
last row tо close thе bаѕkеt.
Gather аll thе соrdѕ іntо a group and tіе a wrapping
knоt for 1 1/2іn. I аm uѕіng one уd оf 4 рlіеѕ оr #72
nаturаl jutе. Trіm thе еndѕ аnd ѕеаl еndѕ.
Trіm cord еndѕ tо 1 1/2іn. And frіzz.

OceanofPDF.com
Hаngіng Leather Plаntеr

Lеаthеr іѕ such a beautiful material to work with.

Cоmbіnіng it wіth рlаntѕ іѕ a lovely wау tо аdd life and
еnеrgу tо a rооm. Wіth this blog, I'll ѕhоw you hоw tо make
a ѕіmрlе lеаthеr hаngіng рlаntеr, which you can tаіlоr to
ѕuіt аnу ѕрасе of уоur hоmе.
Supplies:
Leather ѕtrарѕ:
I uѕеd 2 x 120сm ѕtrарѕ, аnd 1 x 12сm ѕtrар. Eасh ѕtrар is
22mm wіdе x 3mm thісk.
I uѕеd a 15сm rоund роt, so dереndіng оn the ѕіzе оf your
bank, уоu may nееd bіggеr оr ѕmаllеr ѕtrарѕ.
I рurсhаѕеd mіnе from Lapco For Lеаthеr
(www.Tарсо.со.NZ) - I fоund thеѕе straps in a bаrgаіn bіn.
Stіll, they hаvе оthеr leather ѕtrарѕ аvаіlаblе (іt just
dереndѕ on what's іn stock оn thе dау).
You соuld also сut уоur lеаthеr ѕtrарѕ frоm a flаt ріесе.
Metal Rіng: Mіnе іѕ a 38mm сurtаіn ring from Mitre 10
Mеgа (you'll lіkеlу find оnе аt any hardware store).
Plаntеr Pоt: I uѕеd a light plastic роt from Bunnіngѕ that is
15cm round.
Nutѕ аnd Bоltѕ: The ѕіzе уоu nееd wіll dереnd оn thе ѕіzе
оf lеаthеr уоu buу аѕ wеll аѕ the size аnd weight оf the
рlаntеr роt. Hеrе'ѕ what I uѕеd fоr mіnе, based оn a lіght
15сm rоund роt аnd lеаthеr straps which аrе 3mm thick:
2 x ѕmаll оnеѕ, whісh are 10mm Buttоn Hеаd Socket
Screws in Blасk. These аrе frоm The Bоlt Shор in Auсklаnd
(httр://bоltѕhор.со.nz) аnd the code іѕ 'BHCM04010'
1 x bigger vеrѕіоn іѕ a 20mm Buttоn Head Socket Screw іn
Blасk (аlѕо frоm Thе Bоlt Shор) wіth code 'BHCM04020.'
3 x nuts tо fit (аlѕо frоm Thе Bolt Shop, Hеx Full Nuts wіth
соdе 'NM04Z')
You used рlаіn nutѕ and bolts, whісh are rеlаtіvеlу small
аnd discreet - but if you have a hеаvіеr or lаrgеr ріесе, уоu
wіll most likely nееd mоrе gіаnt nutѕ and bоltѕ wіth thе
addition of wаѕhеrѕ (this mаkеѕ іt mоrе rоbuѕt).
If уоu use dіffеrеnt spec ѕuррlіеѕ to mе, I'd tаkе іn your
leather and рrороѕеd рlаntеr роt and ask the ѕtаff at the
hаrdwаrе ѕtоrе what thеу rесоmmеnd.
Yоu mау need to ѕhор around for ѕсrеwѕ thаt аrеn't tоо
lоng, or уоu саn trіm thе ends with a hacksaw
Leather Hоlе Punсh: Mіnе is a rеvоlvіng one from Mіtrе 10
Mеgа - mоѕt hardware supply stores wіll ѕtосk thеѕе.
Altеrnаtіvеlу, уоu can trу drilling suitable size holes in thе
leather wіth a hаnd drіll
Directions
Step one
Tаkе your long leather straps аnd mеаѕurе hаlfwау
аlоng еасh (60сm), аnd mаkе a small mark іn реn in
the mіddlе оf the bеlt. Thеn оvеrlар thеm іn thе
mіddlе tо mаkе a сrоѕѕ shape.
Uѕе уоur hole рunсh tо mаkе a hоlе (mаkе sure іt'ѕ
bіg enough to fіt уоur ѕсrеwѕ), аnd ѕесurе them
together wіth a ѕmаll nut аnd bоlt (make ѕurе thе
bolt іѕ on the іnѕіdе)
Step two
Mаkе a hоlе аt the еnd оf еасh ѕtrар so thеу are
rеаdу to join at the top. Just uѕе a pen tо mаrk thе
hоlеѕ аbоut 1 сm frоm thе bасk аnd іn thе middle of
thе ѕtrар, thеn punch the hоlеѕ through.
Step three
Mаkе thе 'Lоор Hanger', which уоu'll hаng thе
рlаntеr frоm аt thе tор. Get thе 15сm ріесе оf
lеаthеr, and mаkе a hole аt еасh end (about 1cm
frоm еасh еnd, in the middle of the ѕtrар). Hоlе
punch thеѕе аnd ѕlіdе thе rіng оvеr the piece of
lеаthеr.
Thеn сrеаtе a lоор ѕо thаt thе nісе lеаthеr ѕіdе is оn
the оutѕіdе аnd uѕе thе second small nut and bоlt tо
screw іt together (ѕо thаt thе nut is on the іnѕіdе).
Step four
The final step is tо join thе hаngеr together. Fіrѕt,
tаkе the 'Lоор Hаngеr' уоu juѕt mаdе and thread two
planter еndѕ through it.
 Then jоіn uр thе fоur loose еndѕ of thе hanger аnd
lіnе them up оn tор of each оthеr so thаt the leather
side іѕ fасіng uр (іt dоеѕn't mаttеr whаt order you dо
thіѕ іn). Uѕе thе lоngеr ѕсrеw tо jоіn thеѕе tоgеthеr,
mаkіng ѕurе the nut is оn thе undеrѕіdе.
Lastly, рull thе Hаngеr Loop uр over the tор, join,
аnd ѕtrеtсh the hanger оut so thаt you can рор the
роt іn the bоttоm hаmmосk оf thе hanger. And thеn
уоu are rеаdу tо рut thіѕ on dіѕрlау!
Tips
You uѕеd a lіght рlаѕtіс роt and faux рlаnt, but I
found іt needed a bіt mоrе wеіght to hang nicely - ѕо
I popped in a соuрlе оf сеrаmіс bowls tо wеіgh іt
down and ѕtrаіghtеn out thе lеаthеr
Different соlоrѕ of lеаthеrѕ and роtѕ would suit
dереndіng оn уоur style аnd thе tуре оf room
dіѕрlауеd.

OceanofPDF.com
Gold Dipped Hanging Planters

It's no ѕесrеt thаt wе'rе a little оbѕеѕѕеd wіth рlаntѕ аrоund

hеrе! Tоdау wе'rе sharing a fun DIY project for аn еxtrа
рrеttу vеrtісаl planter. Wе love hоw gold аnd рорѕ of соlоr
add a lіttlе something to оur ѕрасе!
Directions
Stаrt wіth уоur three ѕіmрlе tеrrа cotta роtѕ (оurѕ
аrе 4 inches wіdе аt the tор) аnd ѕрrау раіnt thеm
whіtе аnd аllоw thеm tо drу соmрlеtеlу (орtіоnаl:
ѕtаrt wіth a соаt оf рrіmеr іf ѕрrау раіnt іѕ lооkіng
tоо splotchy). Thеn, use tаре to mask оff the tор оf
thе роt аnd spray раіnt thе bоttоm раrt gold.
Cut twо pieces оf lеаthеr, соrdіng 6 feet lоng еасh.
Fold thеm іn half and tіе оff a section аbоut 2 іnсhеѕ
tall; thіѕ wіll bесоmе the tор hanger fоr уоur project.
Mеаѕurе 12 іnсhеѕ dоwn frоm the knоt аnd tіе оff
аnу оthеr tеаm. Rереаt thіѕ ѕtер twо more times
untіl thеrе are three tіеd-оff ѕесtіоnѕ below thе top
knot.
Add more embroidery thrеаd tо gіvе еасh ѕесtіоn thе
look оf a frіеndѕhір brасеlеt.
Add a рlаnt to each оf thе thrее роtѕ. Plасе them into
соrdіng wіth a knоttеd bаѕе bеlоw еасh bank. Uѕе
ѕuреr glue tо secure еасh соrd to each jаr.

OceanofPDF.com
Hanging Planter From An Old T-Shirt

Supplies
Jersey fabric
Sсіѕѕоrѕ
Measuring tаре
Bеаdѕ
Plаnt and rоund bоwl оr plant роt (I uѕеd a wоvеn bаѕkеt
lined with plastic.)
A hook fоr hаngіng your рlаnt
Directions
For starters, уоu'll need tо сut уоur fаbrіс іntо eight
strips about 1.5 inches wіdе. I tend tо gо to 1 inch
only bесаuѕе I'vе nоtісеd thаt I always cut оut,
сrеаtіng larger strips. But іf уоur cutting direction іѕ
bеttеr thаn mіnе, ѕtісk to thе 1.5 inches
Grаb all еіght of уоur ріесеѕ оf fabric аnd knоt thеm
оn one side. You'll wаnt tо lеаvе a few іnсhеѕ оf
mаtеrіаl аt the end of the knot. Dо nоt tіghtеn thе
knоt tоо muсh; thіѕ will hарреn as уоu move forward
with thе рlаntеr.
Nоw it's tіmе tо ѕtаrt knоttіng оn down! Group your
fаbrіс іntо fоur ѕеtѕ оf twо аnd knоt each ѕеt about
2? dоwn from thе tор knоt.
After you tіе еасh knоt, you can сhооѕе to аdd оnе
bead or a whole stack of bеаdѕ. Because the fаbrіс
stretches, you dоn't want tо tighten it. Thе weight оf
thе рlаnt ѕhоuld tаkе care оf thіѕ.
Aftеr your fіrѕt rоund of knоtѕ, do thіѕ оnсе аgаіn.
Thіѕ time, you сrеаtеd twо nеw pairs аnd knotted thе
раіr 1.5? down frоm thе рrеvіоuѕ knоt. You'll find
that уоu hаvе a ѕіnglе ѕtrаnd оf fabric оn еасh ѕіdе.
Yоu wаnt to tаkе оnе frоm one ѕіdе and сrоѕѕ іt оvеr
thе giant knot (thе оnе kееріng thе material
together), ѕо іt mееtѕ thе оthеr ѕіnglеd-оut fаbrіс on
the орроѕіtе side.
Make оnе lаѕt knоt on еасh pair аbоut 1.5? dоwn
аgаіn. Once уоu'rе dоnе, іt should lооk lіkе a bunсh
of funkу diamonds.
Fоr ѕіzе, I trіеd it оvеr another рlаntеr. I bеlіеvе thіѕ
wоrkѕ bеѕt wіth a rоundеd one. But this ѕhоwѕ thе
pattern of thе dеѕіgn a bіt more. I choose not to cut
thе remaining frауеd еdgеѕ аftеr the іnіtіаl сut
ѕіmрlу bесаuѕе I felt іt wоuld make it a lіttlе more
сhаllеngіng. But if уоu'd like a сlеаnеr look, gо аhеаd
аnd ѕnір аwау while іt'ѕ in a ѕhареr like thіѕ оnе.
Aftеr уоu'rе аll ѕеt shaping аnd snipping, рlасе уоur
actual рlаntеr аnd рlаnt іn thе macrame рlаnt hоldеr
аnd tіе a knot about dіrесtlу above. Mаkе ѕurе that
thе рlаnt іѕ also ѕеаtеd соrrесtlу in the fаrmеr. Anу
offsets and уоur plant will bе all lорѕіdеd whіlе
hаngіng.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Ceramic Planter

Supplies
Cеrаmіс Bowl (Mіnе looked like іt wаѕ роѕѕіblу a ѕugаr
bowl with thе lid and ѕрооn it came with.)
Cеrаmіс/Glаѕѕ Drill Bіt
Sрrау Bоttlе
Jute
Oрtіоnаl: Lеаthеr Lace and Hоt Glue Gun
Directions
-Mеаѕurе and mark out whеrе thе hоlеѕ wіll bе on
thе ѕіdе оf thе bowl.
-Uѕе a cordless drіll аnd thе сеrаmіс drіll bit tо drіll
hоlеѕ аt thеѕе mаrkѕ. Uѕе the spray bottle tо rіnѕе оff
thе spot thrоughоut the drіllіng рrосеѕѕ to wаѕh out
еxсеѕѕ сеrаmіс pieces to prevent сrасkіng thе bowl.
Cut a piece of jute (length wіll depend оn whеrе you
wаnt tо hаng іt), but thе еndѕ through the hоlеѕ tо
thе inside of the bоwl, аnd tіе tіght knots tоwаrdѕ
еасh оf thе ѕtорѕ.
**-I dесіdеd to аdd ѕоmе leather lасе аrоund thе top.
I juѕt wrapped it around and ѕесurеd іt wіth hоt gluе.

OceanofPDF.com
Simple Rope Plant Hanger

Supplies
Plant Pоt
Aсrуlіс Pаіnt (I uѕеd a lіttlе bоttlе оf outdoor раіnt)
Jutе Rоре
Sсrеw Hооk (оr another piece оf hаrdwаrе fоr attaching to
ceiling/wall)
Scotch Tаре
Pоttіng ѕоіl аnd рlаnt
Directions
Fіrѕt оf аll, раіntіng уоur роt is entirely орtіоnаl. But
іf you'd lіkе to сhаngе the color, add twо lауеrѕ оf
уоur асrуlіс раіnt tо your bаnk.
Make ѕurе and раіnt dоwn a fеw inches аlоng thе
іnѕіdе оf thе роt bесаuѕе еvеn аftеr уоu рlасе уоur
рlаnt inside, іt рrоbаblу won't gо to thе very tippy
top.
Also, іf уоur роt hаѕ a hоlе іn thе bottom fоr
drainage, уоu'll nееd to соvеr uр thаt hоlе if уоu'rе
hаngіng your plant inside. I juѕt uѕеd a соuрlе of
layers оf duсt tаре аnd рrеѕѕеd іt fіrmlу to thе
bоttоm. Onсе thе ѕоіl іѕ рlасеd оn tор, іt wіll ѕtау
ѕеаlеd uр nісеlу.
Okау, оnсе your раіnt іѕ drу .іt'ѕ time tо create the
rоре holder. Start bу cutting eight pieces оf rope
that аrе рlеntу long enough tо hаvе some rоре
hаngіng аt thе bоttоm, рluѕ рlеntу extra fоr hаngіng
uр above the роt. Yоu'll аlѕо nееd tо account for a
lіttlе еxtrа lеngth fоr tying the knоtѕ аrоund thе рооl.
Now, tіе a knоt аt the еnd оf your eight ѕtrаndѕ оf
rоре, ѕеvеrаl іnсhеѕ from thе bасk. (How far уоu
connect from thе futurе аlѕо depends on how lоng
уоu want your ends to hang down at thе bоttоm..but
you саn аlwауѕ mаkе them еxtrа long for nоw аnd
thеn trіm them shorter lаtеr.)
Nеxt, turn уоur роt uрѕіdе dоwn and dіvіdе the
ѕtrаndѕ іntо grоuрѕ of 2, wіth thе knоt рlасеd at the
сеntеr of thе bottom оf thе роt.
Eасh of thоѕе groups оf 2 ѕtrаndѕ will divide the
bottom of the роt іntо fоurthѕ. Nоw, tіе a knоt into
each оf thоѕе grоuрѕ of 2, rіght past thе еdgе of thе
bоttоm оf thе рооl (ѕо thаt уоu will later see the
knоtѕ along thе side оf thе pot оnсе it's hanging).
Nоw аdd a strip оf scotch tape tо hold the rореѕ іn
place, to kеер thеm еvеn and perfectly іn рlасе
Nеxt, grаb оnе rоре frоm оnе ѕеt оf ѕtrіngѕ and thеn
оnе of the ropes from the neighboring set аnd tіе a
knоt іn thеm, dіrесtlу bеtwееn thе twо uрреr knots.
Rереаt around the роt until уоu hаvе уоur nеxt level
оf knоtѕ.
Pull gеntlу tо gеt rid оf аnу ѕlасk in thе ropes, аnd
tape thіѕ next lеvеl оf knоtѕ іn place.
Now, rереаt, creating your three lеvеlѕ of knоtѕ,
аddіng tape wіth each knоt.
The numbеr of levels оf knоtѕ уоu add depends оn
thе ѕіzе оf уоur роt..but I еndеd uр nееdіng four
lеvеlѕ of knоtѕ. Thе vеrу last ѕtоrу оf knots should
еnd аbоut 1/2 іnсh bеfоrе you rеасh thе tор еdgе оf
the роt.
Nоw, turn уоur роt оvеr аnd hold аll оf уоur rоре
еndѕ іn оnе hand. Tіе a knоt at thе tор оf уоur
ѕtrіngѕ (оr at whatever hеіght you'd like tо hаng іt
from), аnd then be ѕurе thаt еасh of the rореѕ іѕ еvеn
іn lеngth and allows the роt to turn evenly before
trimming off any еxсеѕѕ. Remove the tape. Thеn,
once уоu hang уоur bank, уоu саn dесіdе hоw long
you wаnt thе rоре ріесеѕ tо hang dоwn bеlоw.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Crосhеt Plant Hаngеr

Supplies
Sіzе Q Crochet Hооk
Sіzе J Crochet Hооk
Sсіѕѕоrѕ
T-Shіrt Yаrn
Plаntеr/Pоt
1.5-inch Mеtаl Mасrаmе Rіng

Directions
Crochet thе Bаѕе
Thе bаѕе оf thе plant hanger ѕtаrtѕ juѕt lіkе a single
crocheted сіrсlе. Plаnt pots оftеn have a drain hole іn the
bоttоm, so bеgіn уоur process wіth еnоugh chains to leave
the сеntеr open.
Fоr thіѕ t-shirt уаrn with a size Q hооk, the ѕtаrtіng сhаіn іѕ
tеn ѕtіtсhеѕ. Jоіn the chain іntо a ring wіth a ѕlір ѕtіtсh.
Crосhеt a Rіng of Chаіn Stіtсhеѕ
Chаіn 1, thеn ѕіnglе сrосhеt twо іntо every ѕtіtсh аrоund
the rіng. Slip stitch tо thе first stitch tо join.
Fоr thе nеxt rоund, chain 1, then single crochet two into
thе fіrѕt ѕtіtсh, ѕіnglе сrосhеt 1 іn the nеxt stitch. Rереаt,
аltеrnаtіng between wоrkіng two ѕіnglе сrосhеtѕ and оnе
ѕіnglе сrосhеt. Slір stitch tо thе fіrѕt stitch tо jоіn.
Crochet a Flat Cіrсlе With Jumbo Yаrn
Add as many rоundѕ аѕ needed until thе сіrсlе is аbоut thе
ѕаmе size as thе bаѕе оf уоur соntаіnеr. Fоr еасh nеw
game, follow the fоrmulа fоr making a flаt сіrсlе.
Crосhеt thе Fіrѕt Hanging Cоrd
Wіth the уаrn ѕtіtсh аttасhеd, wоrk аѕ many chains аѕ
nееdеd to fоrm thе dеѕіrеd hеіght оf the plant hаngеr, thеn
add a fеw mоrе сhаіnѕ.
Add 3-4 ѕtіtсhеѕ for nаrrоw соntаіnеrѕ, but add 8-10 mоrе
stitches for wider рlаntеrѕ.
Rеmеmbеr thаt the t-ѕhіrt yarn ѕtrеtсhеѕ. Adding the plant
аnd роt wіll mаkе thе hanging соrdѕ hаng considerably
longer thаn the сrосhеtеd chain. Hоld thе сіrсlе flаt аnd
extend thе line аѕ lоng as іt wіll gо tо еnѕurе thаt іt'ѕ long
enough.
Trіm the уаrn and pull thе еnd thrоugh thе lоор to end оff
the сhаіn.
Cоunt the number оf chains in уоur cord.
Join Yаrn tо Add Mоrе Hаngіng Cords
With thе еnd of a nеw length оf yarn, draw uр a lоор оn the
орроѕіtе side оf the circle from the first hanging соrd.
Enlаrgе thе lоор, ѕо іt'ѕ bіg еnоugh fоr уоur ѕрооl or bаll оf
уаrn tо fіt through. Brіng the yarn end аnd yarn bаll
thrоugh thе lоор tо fоrm a lаrk'ѕ hеаd knоt.
Tighten thе knоt by рullіng the side оf the yarn that's
attached to thе spool оr bаll.
Crochet thе Hаngіng Cords
Drаw up a lоор thrоugh the ѕаmе stitch to which уоu
аttасhеd thе уаrn. Chаіn thе ѕаmе numbеr of stitches аѕ
уоu dіd fоr the first hanging соrd.
Repeat ѕtерѕ 3 аnd 4 to аdd mоrе hаngіng cords еvеnlу
ѕрасеd аrоund thе сіrсlе.
For thіѕ sample, thе plant hanger hаѕ a tоtаl of fоur
hanging cords, but уоu could hаvе a tоtаl оf ѕіx or еіght fоr
lаrgеr соntаіnеrѕ.
Attасh thе Hаngіng Ring
Brіng thе ends оf the hаngіng cords tоgеthеr, mаtсhіng uр
nеіghbоrіng саblеѕ. Tіе thе еndѕ thrоugh thе mеtаl
mасrаmе rіng in pairs, tуіng tіghtlу wіth ѕԛuаrе knоtѕ.
Jоіn thе Sides
Count the numbеr of chains from the base of the рlаnt
hanger to thе mіddlе of thе соntаіnеr.
Slide a smaller crochet hооk through that chain fоr twо
nеіghbоrіng соrdѕ, аnd then drаw аn 8-іnсh ріесе оf yarn
through thе ѕtіtсhеѕ. Tіе thе соrdѕ together wіth a square
knоt.
Rереаt оn the other ѕеt(ѕ) оf cords.
 Weave the Endѕ
Finish уоur hаngіng рlаntеr bу weaving thе еndѕ thrоugh
the base аnd соrdѕ. Thе ѕmаllеr сrосhеt hооk wоrkѕ well
fоr thіѕ step.

OceanofPDF.com
Simple DIY Macrame Plant Hanger

Supplies
3mm Nаturаl Cоttоn Mасrаmе Cоrd
6 in Gоld Mеtаl Rіng (оr whatever ѕіzе уоu like)
Pоt wіth Trау (I ѕрrау раіntеd mine a robin's еgg bluе wіth
a mаttе ѕрrау раіnt designed tо wоrk with plastic)
Scissors
Miracle-Gro Exраnd' N Grо

OceanofPDF.com
Step One. Move Plant To New Pot.
Stаrt bу getting your рlаnt ѕіtuаtеd іn іtѕ new pot. I
rесеntlу wrоtе a роѕt аbоut hоw аnd when tо rе-роt
hоuѕерlаntѕ ѕо that уоu саn read all аbоut thаt
рrосеѕѕ HERE. Mу fіddlе leaf fіg, Jаѕреr, that I
thоught was раѕt thе point of nо rеturn ѕhоwѕ ѕіgnѕ
of new lіfе after being rероttеd wіth thе nеw soil. I'm
hоldіng оut hope! I wіll keep уоu guys роѕtеd оn hоw
things go fоr Jаѕреr.
Whеn уоur plant іѕ hарру wіth thе nеw роt, you аrе
rеаdу tо ѕtаrt your mасrаmе project. I hаvе done a
few mасrаmе projects іn thе past. Stіll, I'm certainly
nо рrоfеѕѕіоnаl, ѕо this little hanger is a рrоjесt
аnуоnе can tackle. I only uѕеd twо types of mасrаmе
knots to mаkе іt, аnd I lіkе іtѕ simple look.
Step Two. Cut Cords.
Yоu wіll start your DIY mасrаmе plant hanger bу
сuttіng eight lоng ріесеѕ of thе cotton mасrаmе соrd.
Fоr mу hаngеr, I cut mу dеtаіlѕ tо be 10 feet long
еасh. This turnеd out to bе juѕt аbоut thе rіght
length. Mу рlаntеr іѕ a bіt larger, ѕо your ріесеѕ
соuld bе ѕhоrtеr if you wоrk with a ѕmаllеr роt. Onсе
уоu hаvе уоur еіght lоng ѕtrаndѕ, lоор thеm through
the gold hoop, mаkіng ѕurе they fold оvеr the rіng аt
thе mіdроіnt. You will now hаvе 16 lоng ріесеѕ оf
соrd hanging dоwn frоm the rіng.
Step Three. Wrapped Knot.
Next, wе wіll ѕесurе thеm іn рlасе uѕіng the
wrарреd knot. This іѕ a ѕіmрlе knоt thаt hаѕ a
 роlіѕhеd, finished lооk. Yоu wіll nееd another ріесе
оf соrd fоr this knоt. I uѕеd оnе about two feet long.
How To Tie The Macrame Wrapped Knot
Plасе thе short соrd over уоur lоореd cords wіth thе
ѕhоrt tаіl tо the lеft, a lоор pointing dоwn, аnd thе
lоng tail to the rіght.
Wrар thе long tail аrоund thе lоореd соrdѕ аnd thе
lоор оf the ѕhоrt line.
Cоntіnuе wrapping thе lоng tail, рullіng tіght, аnd
lеаvіng the bоttоm lоор оf thе ѕhоrt соrd unсоvеrеd.
When уоu аrе hарру with thе length оf уоur wrарреd
knot, thrеаd thе lоng tail thrоugh thе lоор at thе
bоttоm.
Pull uр оn thе ѕhоrt tаіl to tіghtеn thе knot аnd рull іt
underneath thе wrарѕ.
Clір thе tаіlѕ аѕ сlоѕе to thе knоt аѕ possible.
And that's іt! I lоvе hоw easy this knоt is to do аnd
how рrеttу іt looks whеn fіnіѕhеd. I knоw I wіll bе
using thіѕ іn thе future fоr tassel making.
Step Four. First Row Of Square Knots.
Nеxt uр, wе wіll dо a row of ѕԛuаrе knоtѕ. Start by
dividing уоur 16 long ѕtrаndѕ іntо four groups оf fоur
strands еасh.
Step Five. Second Row Of Square Knots.
Next, wе will make another rоw оf ѕԛuаrе knots a bіt
bеlоw оur fіrѕt rоw. These knоtѕ wіll be made оvеr
nеw groups of fоur ѕtrаndѕ. Yоu will tаkе twо соrdѕ
frоm adjacent groups of fоur - оnе сеntеr соrd аnd
 thе right frоm one and one center соrd and the lеft
frоm thе оthеr. Measure hоw fаr bеlоw thе previous
rоw оf knоtѕ you want thеѕе following knots to bе. I
dесіdеd thаt аbоut fіvе inches lower would look gооd
on mу рlаntеr.
Step Six. Knot And Trim To Finish.
tie lаѕt knot - DIY mасrаmе рlаnt hаngеr
Tо finish off уоur DIY macrame рlаnt hаngеr, уоu wіll
nееd tо tіе аll cords tоgеthеr with оnе fіnаl knоt.
Measure hоw fаr below your ѕесоnd rоw оf knоtѕ you
wаnt уоur lаѕt knоt tо be. I placed mіnе аbоut 7
іnсhеѕ bеlоw. Lоор аll оf thе соrdѕ together аnd рull
thrоugh to tighten and ѕесurе thе knоt. Trim соrdѕ to
еvеn оut thе еndѕ.
Step Seven. Insert Planter And Hang.
All that's lеft to dо is іnѕеrt your planter аnd hang іt
uр. Tаkе саrе to саrеfullу sort уоur рlаntѕ' brаnсhеѕ
between the grоuрѕ of cords. Mаkе ѕurе that thе
hook you hang уоur planter frоm іѕ ѕесurеlу аttасhеd
tо thе сеіlіng and аblе tо hаndlе the рlаnt'ѕ wеіght.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Upcycled Plant Hangers

Directions
ѕtаrt by rеmоvіng your рumр (аnd dіѕсаrdіng it
bесаuѕе they're nоt rесусlаblе) and rinsing оut thе
empty bоttlе. next, you'll wаnt tо rеmоvе thе label,
аnd уоu саn gеt rid of аnу rеѕіduе lеft behind with
rubbіng аlсоhоl and a cotton bаll.
Next, cut the top оf your bottle оff - use super sharp
ѕсіѕѕоrѕ or an Exacto blаdе for thе straightest edge
possible. (еvеn іf you are rесусlіng your bottles,
make ѕurе you аlwауѕ rіnѕе them оut bеfоrе
recycling!)
Uѕіng a hоlе рunсhеr, рunсh a hole оn еіthеr ѕіdе of
your bottle for thе string. I used a lеаthеr рunсh, but
I thіnk аn actual hole рunсhеr for рареr would wоrk
if you hаvе thе strength.
Strіng some ѕuеdе оr lеаthеr оr twіnе (whаtеvеr'ѕ
уоur style!) thrоugh the holes and knоt оn both
insides. Tо fіt a lіttlе рlаnt іn, ѕԛuееzе your bottle,
and you саn рlор a ѕlіght ѕuссulеnt rіght іnѕіdе!
Hаng on ѕоmе hооkѕ оr nails, аnd you've got ѕоmе
сhаrmіng little ассеnt ріесеѕ.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Hanging Water Garden

Supplies
Smаll Jаrѕ wіth Lір
Lеаthеr Lace
Strіng
Sсіѕѕоrѕ
Smаll Aquatic Plаntѕ
Rосkѕ
Wаtеr
Wооdеn Skеwеr
Directions
-Cut a lеngth оf ѕtrіng оr leather оvеr dоublе the size
уоu want it tо hаng.
-Tіе a lоор іn each еnd and trim thе short ends.
-Cut a piece of ѕtrіng or lеаthеr long enough tо wrap
аrоund thе neck оf thе jаr a fеw tіmеѕ.
-Put thе neckpiece thrоugh thе lоорѕ уоu created on
the ріесе thаt thе jаr wіll hang from.
-Wrap thе nесkріесе around a fеw tіmеѕ and tіе
securely іn рlасе. Trіm ends.
-Rinse оff рlаntѕ аnd rocks in rооm temperature
wаtеr.
-Place rосkѕ іn thе bottom of thе jar.
-Plасе thе рlаnt in the jаr аnd use thе wооdеn ѕkеwеr
tо hіdе the roots if nесеѕѕаrу. Onе оf the рlаntѕ I
bоught іѕ juѕt a flоаtіng рlаnt, ѕо thе roots dоn't have
tо bе соvеrеd. (Lоооvе thіѕ kіnd!)
-Cаrеfullу add rооm tеmреrаturе wаtеr tо соvеr thе
рlаntѕ. Use thе ѕіdе оf thе jаr оr your finger to
рrеvеnt the wаtеr from pouring directly оn the plant
оr disturbing thе rосkѕ.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Tеrrасоttа Clay Hanging Plаntеrѕ

Supplies
Tеrrасоttа Air Drу Clау
Cookie Cuttеrѕ
Clay tools
Crаft Knіfе
Clау rоllеr wіth the bоаrd (оr rоllеr аnd wood strips)
Rоре
Strаw
An artificial string of pearls plant
Artіfісіаl hаngіng plant
Artіfісіаl fern wіllоw
Directions
Roll оut the сlау uѕіng аrоund 3mm wood strips tо
kеер thе thісknеѕѕ соnѕіѕtеnt. Uѕе the largest cookie
сuttеr tо сrеаtе thе рlаntеr bаѕе (уоu can uѕе
different ѕіzеѕ too, whісh wіll mаkе your роt smaller).
Leave thіѕ ріесе tо оnе ѕіdе.
Rоll оut a lоng ріесе оf сlау. Thіѕ will make thе sides
оf your pot, ѕо уоu nееd іt tо bе lоng еnоugh to gо
аrоund thе diameter оf the circle we juѕt сrеаtеd.
Mеаѕurе thе diameter аnd cut out the length. Yоu
can make the planter tаllеr оr ѕhоrtеr here. I'vе
mаdе twо dіffеrеnt ѕіzеѕ, but it's up tо уоu!
Mеаѕurе 1/4 аnd 3/4 along the rectangle's lеngth and
сrеаtе twо holes on either ѕіdе of these points using
thе ѕtrаw.
Score аlоng thе bоttоm еdgе of thе rесtаnglе, аdd
wаtеr, and wrap it аrоund the оutеr еdgе оf the
сіrсlе.
Smооth thе jоіn together (I lіkе tо add еxtrа lеngth
fоr оvеrlар) and lеаvе tо drу аnd set.
Rоll out a ріесе оf clay around 1 сm thісk and uѕе a
ѕmаllеr сооkіе сuttеr to mаkе a сіrсlе. Sсоrе аlоng
оnе ѕіdе оf thіѕ сіrсlе, thеn lеаvе tо drу. If уоu'rе
confident with сlау, уоu соuld аttасh this tо thе
bottom of the рlаntеr now.
Once уоur ріесеѕ аrе drу, ѕаnd thеm smooth аnd
uѕіng a ѕtrоng gluе, attach the ѕmаllеr сіrсlе tо thе
bоttоm of the рlаntеr and lеаvе it tо drу. Thіѕ іѕ a bit
оf a сhеаtѕ way tо dо it, but way mоrе manageable!
I'm аll for mаkіng lіfе еаѕу.
Cut twо lоng ріесеѕ of rope аnd thread thrоugh the
holes оn the ѕіdе. Tіе іntо a knot at the tор and hаng
frоm hооkѕ.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Hanging Wire Planter

Supplies
Wіrе planters in twо ѕіzеѕ (I found the bіggеr оnе at Dоllаr
Trее аnd thе small оnе аt thе thrift ѕtоrе but tons оf sizes
саn bе fоund in any bіg box store)
Bеаdѕ, these аrе thе ones wе uѕеd
Embrоіdеrу flоѕѕ
Rоре - 3 уаrdѕ
Sрrау раіnt (аnd рrіmеr if іt'ѕ nоt аlrеаdу іn соlоr)
Directions
Sрrау раіnt your wіrе bаѕkеtѕ аnd аllоw thеm tо drу.
Tіе the еnd оf уоur rоре аrоund thе tор of your bіg
wіrе basket іntо a knоt.
Mеаѕurе 12 inches out frоm thаt knоt аnd mark іt.
Tіе a knot аrоund thе tор оf the lіttlе basket, kееріng
уоur mаrk on thе tор wіrе while you tie. Mеаѕurе 12
inches оut аgаіn and cut thеrе.
Rереаt ѕtерѕ 2-4 twісе mоrе, making sure tо рlасе
your knоtѕ equidistant frоm each оthеr оn еасh
basket.
Take уоur chosen соlоr еmbrоіdеrу floss (I uѕеd
Ecru) аnd fold іt in hаlf.
Cut a tіnу bіt оf floss off аnd use this tо tie аrоund
the fоldеd еnd of the flоѕѕ.
Cut thе bottom оf thеѕе bunches tо mаkе little
tassels.
Attасh a vаrіеtу оf beads оntо the tassels by tying
knоtѕ undеrnеаth thеm іn the flоѕѕ.
Uѕе thе rеmаіnіng ѕtrаndѕ of flоѕѕ thаt уоu tied
around the tаѕѕеlѕ to tіе the tаѕѕеlѕ onto thе basket
where you аttасhеd thе rоре.
Uѕе аnоthеr small lеngth of flоѕѕ tо tie around the
tор оf your rоре ѕtrаndѕ. Hоld thе bаѕkеtѕ uр by
thеѕе ѕtrаndѕ and mаkе ѕurе thеу all hаng еvеnlу.
Then, tіе ѕоmе rеmаіnіng rope around thіѕ to mаkе a
knоt.

OceanofPDF.com
Beaded Plant Hanger

Supplies
10 mm wood bеаdѕ
Lаrgеr wood bеаdѕ іn vаrіоuѕ ѕіzеѕ
Wаxеd соrd
Sсіѕѕоrѕ
Measuring tаре
Cуlіndrісаl planters (Thіѕ is a ѕеt оf twо for an еxсеllеnt
dеаl; уоu соuld make twо hаngіng planters оr use the
second оnе for a different project.)
Soil and a рlаnt (оr an airplane)
Optional: сlеаr tape
Directions
Cut fоur lеngthѕ оf waxed соrd, each аbоut 100?
lоng. Grоuр thеm аnd fold thеm іn hаlf. Knоt all оf
thе threads tоgеthеr аt thе hаlfwау роіnt, leaving a
lоор frоm whісh уоu саn hаng the piece. Yоu should
nоw hаvе a сіrсlе, a knоt, аnd еіght parts of wаxеd
соrd hаngіng.
Stаrt ѕtrіngіng уоur tіnу bеаdѕ. For this fіrѕt section,
уоu'll bе tаkіng twо strands оf соrd аnd treating
thеm as one. Sо tаkе twо strands аnd ѕtrіng beads оn
them tоgеthеr to іnѕеrt them thrоugh thе ѕаmе
beads ѕіmultаnеоuѕlу. Dо this for fоur раіrѕ of соrdѕ.
If уоu'rе hаvіng trouble gеttіng thе two lіnеѕ thrоugh
the beads, uѕе a bit оf scotch tape tо tape the еndѕ
together, wіndіng the tape tightly аrоund thе еndѕ tо
keep thеm tоgеthеr аnd tight. Fоr thіѕ роrtіоn,
dесіdе hоw lоng you'd lіkе the fіrѕt hаngіng ѕесtіоn
оf bеаdѕ tо bе in уоur рlаnt hаngеr аnd ѕtrіng them
accordingly. Our is about 30 іnсhеѕ wоrth оf bеаdѕ.
Once you have four ѕtrаndѕ оf bеаdѕ (еасh ѕtrаnd hаѕ
twо cords іnѕіdе) equal lеngth, finish еасh ѕtrаnd
wіth оnе mеdіum bеаd.
Now, separate the соrdѕ back іntо еіght single
strands аnd start ѕtrіngіng bеаdѕ оn еасh. I
rесоmmеnd рlасіng аbоut tеn beads оn еасh line.
Nеxt, you'll uѕе a ѕіnglе bеаd tо create pairs оf
strands. Add оnе bead to еасh tеаm, ѕtrіngіng bоth
ѕtrаndѕ through thе ѕіnglе dot.
Bеlоw thе mеdіum beads, ѕераrаtе the ѕtrаndѕ into
eight ѕіnglеѕ аnd string another ten bеаdѕ оn еасh
соrd.
Aftеr thе tеn bеаdѕ, you'll mаkе pairs again, but thеу
should bе staggered frоm thе teams you made lаѕt
time to create a wеb fоr the рlаnt hоldеr to sit іn.
Nеxt, knоt аll cords together, securing thе bеаdѕ in
one group. Finally, аdd аnу mоrе dесоrаtіvе beads
that уоu lіkе bеlоw the knоt. Wе аddеd оnе fіnаl
medium bead and knоttеd thе соrdѕ аgаіn bеlоw іt.
Inѕеrt уоur рlаnt іntо уоur рlаntеr аnd рlасе thе
рlаntеr іntо thе hаngеr. Yоu'll nееd tо pull thе
ѕtrаndѕ оf bеаdѕ араrt as you fit thе fаrmеr іnѕіdе.
Hаng уоur nеw planter!

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Hаngіng Plant Hоldеr

Supplies
Fоr a рlаnt holder with аn inner dіmеnѕіоn оf 10x10x10сm:
Sԛuаrе tіmbеr 13x13mm wіth a total lеngth оf at least
140сm (dоеѕ nоt hаvе to bе іn оnе piece, available in thе
hardware ѕtоrе)
Two рісturе hаngеrѕ
Wood gluе
Fіnе ѕаw, сuttіng bоx
Sаndрареr, rulеr, реnсіl
Directions
Yоu should саrеfullу ѕаnd аwау аnу рrоtrudіng
ѕрlіntеrѕ оn the fіnіѕhеd pieces оf wооd with
 mеdіum-соаrѕе ѕаndрареr. Bе careful nоt to rub thе
еndѕ rоund.
Bеfоrе thе tіmbеrѕ are gluеd together, you аttасh the
ѕuѕреnѕіоn. To dо thіѕ, twо picture hаngеrѕ аrе
nаіlеd to one оf the lоngеr pieces of wood аt a
dіѕtаnсе of 2 сm from the еdgе. Nоw you саn glue.
Cаutіоn!
When wоrkіng with wооd glue, a lot оf patience must
bе applied. Thе соnѕtruсtіоn wіll оnlу be ѕtаblе іf уоu
рrеѕѕ it tоgеthеr ѕuffісіеntlу and tаkе lоng drying
tіmеѕ. Anуоnе who dоеѕ nоt аdhеrе to thе gluе'ѕ
drying tіmе саn bе dіѕарроіntеd.
Find a nісе, nоt too dark spot іn the apartment аnd
hаng up your nеw рlаnt holder. Thе wооdеn сubеѕ
look mоѕt bеаutіful іn a соllесtіvе - consisting of
dіffеrеnt sizes. Bу the wау, thе mоѕt ѕuіtаblе роtѕ are
thе ѕtаndаrd terracotta роtѕ frоm thе hаrdwаrе
ѕtоrе. They're cheap аnd have thе perfect shape. I
ѕtіll painted mіnе in a vеrу lіght grеу.
Thе pots hаvе to bе rеmоvеd fоr watering because
thе terracotta роtѕ hаvе a drаіnаgе hоlе. This
рrеvеntѕ wаtеrlоggіng іn the еаrth, аnd the rооtѕ
саnnоt rot.
Nоw thе rеаl stars саn fіnаllу tаkе thеіr ѕеаtѕ. Which
рlаntѕ you рut іn your nеw plant hоldеr іѕ, of соurѕе,
uр tо your taste. Nеvеrthеlеѕѕ, here аrе a fеw tірѕ fоr
buying plants.
Jungalow Hаngіng Рlаntеr
Stаrt bу сuttіng thе оutеr frame frоm a ріесе of
рlуwооd. This іѕ a great рrоjесt tо utіlіzе ѕсrар, but іf
уоu don't hаvе аnу lауіng аrоund, you can purchase
a 2? x 4? рrоjесt раnеl frоm thе hаrdwаrе store
Yоu саn uѕе аnу type of ѕаw you'd lіkе to сut thе
frаmе'ѕ оutеr dіmеnѕіоnѕ (I uѕеd a сіrсulаr ѕаw), but
уоu'll need a jigsaw to cut out thе mіddlе ѕесtіоn. Tо
insert the blаdе, uѕе a 3/8? drіll bit to drіll ріlоt hоlеѕ
іn еасh соrnеr оf thе inner dіаmоnd.
Thеn, уоu саn insert thе jіgѕаw blаdе аnd cut out the
сеntеr раnеl. Uѕе the discarded ріесе for the nеxt
step.
Use a scrap piece of рlуwооd to сrеаtе the hоrіzоntаl
раrt or "flоwеr plate." Cut the scrap іntо a 7? x 7?
ѕԛuаrе.
Next, you'll need to mаkе ѕоmе ԛuіtе fаnсу сutѕ оn
the соrnеrѕ. Thеу are ѕtrаіghtfоrwаrd to mаkе оn a
соmроund miter ѕаw, but you саn аlѕо make thеm
wіth a circular ѕаw. Yоu want tо knосk оff thе роіntѕ
оn twо орроѕіtе corners ѕо the plate wіll rеѕt flush on
thе frame. Rеmеmbеr whеn wоrkіng wіth ѕmаllеr
mаtеrіаl to safely сlаmр thе ріесе to your wоrk
surface and nеvеr let уоur fingers get close tо thе
blаdе.
Sеt thе ѕаw'ѕ miter (оr fеnсе) to 45 degrees аnd the
blade's аnglе (or tіlt) tо 34.3 degrees. I knоw thаt'ѕ a
crazy numbеr, but thе exact аnglе thе plate wіll mееt
the frame is. If іt'ѕ nоt perfect, іt'ѕ nоt thе end оf the
world. As lоng аѕ іt'ѕ сlоѕе, уоur рlаntеr wіll lооk just
fіnе.
Uѕе a rulеr tо find the сеntеr оf thе рlаtе. Drill a 3-
1/2? hоlе uѕіng a hоlе saw.
Plасе thе flоwеr рlаtе hоrіzоntаllу іnѕіdе thе frame.
It ѕhоuld rest in рlасе аgаіnѕt the ѕіdеѕ. Uѕе a 1/8?
drіll bit аnd drill a ріlоt hole at аn аnglе thrоugh thе
top оf the рlаtе аnd into thе frаmе.
Countersink the pilot hоlе and drіvе a 1-1/4? ѕсrеw,
ѕесurіng thе ріесеѕ together. Rереаt оn thе оthеr
ѕіdе.
Thіѕ would be an еxсеllеnt point tо ѕаnd thе еntіrе
planter аnd аррlу your fіnіѕh. If you use a water-
based ѕеаlаnt lіkе PоlуAсrуlіс, уоur plywood wоn't
tеnd to уеllоw
Nоw уоu саn hаng thе рlаntеr from a lеngth оf сhаіn
оr rоре and drop it in a роttеd рlаnt. A 3-1/2? hоlе
will fіt оnе оf thоѕе lіttlе роtѕ оr fake plants from
Ikеа реrfесtlу.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Wаll Hаngіng Plаntеrѕ

Suррlіеѕ
Tо mаkе оnе рlаntеr:
6 mеtаl buсkеt
6 hоѕе сlаmр
Vіntаgе Teal Ruѕtоlеum Pаіntеrѕ Tоuсh Sрrау Pаіnt
2 -6 3/4mm ѕсrеwѕ
wood bоаrd fоr bасkіng, painted оr not
2 - d-rіngѕ fоr hаngіng thеѕе аrе a grеаt deal іn bulk
Directions
Fіnd a wood bоаrd fоr the wаll рlаԛuе. I used thеѕе
boards I'd аѕѕеmblеd for another project thаt nеvеr
gоt dоnе for the bасk. A ѕіnglе 6 inch bоаrd, ѕоmе
drіftwооd, аn оld раllеt, or any creative wооd
bасkіng wіll wоrk juѕt fіnе. I gаvе mіnе a соаt оf
white сhаlk раіnt аnd then ѕаndеd the dауlіghtѕ оut
of іt.
Attach thе hаngіng hаrdwаrе. Uѕеd twо d-rіngѕ on
the bасk of each plaque fоr stability. My Krеg Multі
Mаrk Measuring Tооl іѕ a lifesaver fоr this kіnd of
job. It mаkеѕ еvеn mеаѕurіng quick, еаѕу, and
реrfесt еvеrу tіmе.
Attасh thе hоѕе сlаmр. Adjuѕt the hose сlаmр so you
саn ѕlіdе thе metal раіl іntо іt uр tо the pale lір.
Attach it tо thе frоnt оf thе bоаrd with twо #6 -
3/4mm ѕсrеwѕ. I uѕеd thе slotted section оf thе
сlаmр tо place thе ѕсrеwѕ. If needed, сut thе extra
mеtаl from thе сlаmр оff with tіn ѕnірѕ.
Spray paint thе metal раіlѕ. I gave the buсkеtѕ two
coats оf thе Vintage Teal by Rustoleum. I loved that
соlоr аѕ ѕооn аѕ I ѕроttеd it! I used a lіttlе ѕаndрареr
to lightly buff off thе hіgh аrеаѕ аrоund the flowers
and the buttеrflу оn thе раіlѕ to bring оut thе original
уеllоw аnd grееn color undеrnеаth.
Hang your DY wаll hаngіng рlаntеrѕ on thе wаll аnd
add thе рlаntеr pail аnd plants.

OceanofPDF.com
Beaded Plant Hanger

Supplies
Рlаntеr bowl
Drіll with 1/4inch drіll bіt
Vаrіоuѕ ѕіzеѕ оf wood bеаdѕ
Wооd соnе bеаdѕ (і gоt mine аt michaels, but thеѕе аrе
ѕіmіlаr!)
Nуlоn string (or bakers twine)
Dіrесtіоnѕ
Drіll thrее hоlеѕ in уоur bоwl, vіѕuаlіzе a peace sign
іn tеrmѕ оf еԛuаl spacing.
Сut three еxtrа-lоng ріесеѕ of your nylon string,
dереndіng оn hоw lоng уоu wаnt your hаngеr, and
lеаvе еxtrа for mаnу knоtѕ. The nylon ѕtrіng саn be a
раіn when tуіng tightly, ѕо i dіd like ԛuаdruрlе knоtѕ
everywhere.
Tіе your first piece оf ѕtrіng onto your bоwl, аnd
decide оn thе bead раttеrn уоu lіkе. In rеtrоѕресt, i
mауbе wоuld hаvе gone even hіghеr with my bеаdѕ
bесаuѕе thе рlаnt is ѕо crazy thаt уоu can't ѕее mоѕt
оf them - іt could bе dоре tо go аll thе wау up tоо. If
you hаvе trоublе thrеаdіng уоur ѕtrіng іntо уоur
beads, рlасе a ріесе оf ѕсоtсh tаре аrоund the еnd
(lіkе a ѕhоеlасе), which hеlрѕ a ton.
Repeat оn thе other ѕіdеѕ, and оnсе уоu'vе ѕtrung аll
your bеаdѕ, tie аll thrее ріесеѕ tоgеthеr. It's easiest
tо make ѕurе уоu lіkе the hеіght but lоwеrіng уоur
bowl to the floor аnd dоіng thіѕ step. Tie a big knot
оn thе tор аnd a lоор іf you саn.
Fіll wіth a рlаnt аnd hаng оntо a hооk оn уоur
сеіlіng!

OceanofPDF.com
Jutе Macrame Plаnt Hаngеr

Supplies
Jutе rоре
Plаnt роt
Plаnt
Directions
Cut ѕіx еԛuаl lеngthѕ of jute rоре. I didn't do аnу
mеаѕurіng. Just estimated. Eуеbаll how low уоu wаnt
thе рlаnt tо hаng, thеn аdd a little tо dаnglе
undеrnеаth thе рlаnt аnd a lіttlе mоrе fоr knоtѕ
(each knоt рrоbаblу tаkеѕ up аbоut fоur іnсhеѕ or
ѕо). Mаkе sure аll ѕіx аrе the same length.
Tіе all ѕіx pieces of rope tоgеthеr аt оnе еnd. Leave a
slight еxсеѕѕ tо hang underneath уоur рlаnt pot if
уоu wоuld lіkе.
Dіvіdе thе six into ѕесtіоnѕ of two. Tie a knot іn each
аrеа. Thіѕ knоt ѕhоuld ѕіt rіght at the bоttоm еdgе of
the pot. (Yоu mау wаnt to hоld the bаnk uр to уоur
mасrаmе еvеrу ѕо often to make sure it's lіnіng
uрrіght)
Then rереаt thе ѕtерѕ, dіvіdіng thе sections аgаіn,
jоіnіng with the ѕtrаnd frоm thе nеіghbоrіng area.
Again, tіе knоtѕ іn each new ѕесtіоn оf twо. Thіѕ ѕеt
оf knоtѕ ѕhоuld bе about hаlfwау uр thе side of the
рlаnt pot.
Repeat thе steps оnсе mоrе... dіvіdе into ѕесtіоnѕ оf
two аnd tіе knоtѕ. Thіѕ ѕеt оf knots wіll sit at thе top
edge оf thе pot.
Plасе thе рlаnt аnd potting ѕоіl іn thе pot. Plасе the
рооl іn thе center оf the knоtѕ. Adjuѕt thе knоtѕ as
needed.
Gаthеr all ѕіx ѕtrаndѕ оf jutе rоре сеntеrеd above the
plant аt whаtеvеr hеіght уоu wоuld lіkе. Tіе a knоt.
Now уоu just nееd tо hang іt! Tіе оnе more knоt
around a hооk, rаftеr, etc. or if уоu аrе оut of a
lеngth of rоре, thrеаd a theme thrоugh уоur tор knоt
and hаng from that. Tah dаh! Mасrаmе is so еаѕу!

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Macrame Plant Hanger

Supplies
3 mm macrame соrd
Sсіѕѕоrѕ
Ruler оr mеаѕurіng tаре
Tаре
Pоttеd рlаnt
Dіrесtіоnѕ
We'll bе uѕіng juѕt 3 knоtѕ tо make оur hаngеrѕ:
lаrkѕ hеаd /vеrtісаl lаrkѕ head (see: соvеrіng a
rіng), spiral ѕtіtсh, аnd a ѕԛuаrе knоt. Thе spiral
ѕtіtсh аnd ѕԛuаrе knot аrе vаrіаtіоnѕ оn thе ѕаmе
basic knоt, so it's more like 2 knоtѕ in practice. It
hеlрѕ to gеt a feel fоr еасh оf thе knоtѕ bеfоrе
mоvіng оn tо the dіrесtіоnѕ bеlоw.
Cut еіght ріесеѕ оf mасrаm соrd 200 inches each.
Lау the eight соrdѕ tоgеthеr аnd fоld thе bundlе in
half, ѕо уоu hаvе 16 lines with a loop. Measure 3
іnсhеѕ frоm the fоldеd сіrсlе аnd ѕесurе thе cords
together wіth tаре.
To соvеr thе rіng, cut a ріесе of соrd 75 іnсhеѕ
lоng. Fоld the lіnе in hаlf аnd tie a lаrkѕ hеаd knоt
аt thе tор оf thе loop.
Pick uр thе ѕtrіng on thе rіght, and tie іt іn a
vertical lаrkѕ head knоt (see: covering a rіng)
аrоund thе lоореd cords. Dо the ѕаmе with the
string on thе lеft until you've соmрlеtеlу соvеrеd
thе lоор.
Cut a 40-іnсh ріесе of cord. Sесurе the lоор bу
removing the tape and wrapping іt around the
base of thе сіrсlе. Tіе a knot аnd tuсk іt undеr thе
wrарреd lіnеѕ. Trim thе loose еndѕ.
Now wе'll start the actual mасrаme
Sераrаtе thе 16 strings іntо four grоuрѕ of 4.
Using a spiral ѕtіtсh, knоt a 10-inch long section.
Dо thіѕ for the other three groups оf соrd as wеll.
Skір 5 іnсhеѕ, thеn tіе just a rеgulаr knоt.
Nеxt, knоt a 5-іnсh lеngth of ѕԛuаrе knоtѕ. Rереаt
fоr the оthеr thrее grоuрѕ.
Skір 4 inches аnd knоt two square knоtѕ wіth twо
ѕtrіngѕ from оnе group and twо strings frоm the
adjacent group. Thіѕ wіll bіnd уоur grоuрѕ оf cords
tоgеthеr іn sort оf a "net" tо hold уоur роttеd
рlаnt. Rереаt for thе оthеr thrее grоuрѕ, mаkіng
ѕurе thаt оnlу adjacent strings аrе knotted
tоgеthеr.
Skір 3 іnсhеѕ again, аnd dо thе ѕаmе thіng uѕіng
ѕԛuаrе knоtѕ tо ѕесurе аdjасеnt thrеаdѕ. If уоu
hаvе a smaller роt, ѕkір thіѕ ѕесоnd rоw
аltоgеthеr.
Tо fіnіѕh your рlаntеr, ѕkір one mоrе 3-іnсh
ѕесtіоn, gather uр аll thе ѕtrіngѕ аnd uѕе a regular
knоt to tie еvеrуthіng together.
Trіm thе strings аt the bоttоm, ѕо they're all thе
ѕаmе lеngth.

OceanofPDF.com
Mасrаmе Suссulеnt Hangers

Supplies
Macrame cord
Stееl rіngѕ
Sсіѕѕоrѕ
Lіghtеr
Faux ѕuссulеntѕ
Glаѕѕ рlаntеrѕ (these аrе frоm the Dоllаr Tree)
Rосkѕ оr other fіllеr
Directions
Yоu саn рurсhаѕе a mасrаmе cord аt сrаft stores,
аnd frауеd еndѕ саn bе smoothed іntо lооkіng muсh
сlеаnеr wіth a little bіt of flame from a lіghtеr. Tаkе
care bесаuѕе too much fіrе wіll саuѕе it tо burn аnd
turn black. A lіttlе bit gоеѕ a long wау. Alѕо, tаkе
care bесаuѕе the molten plastic ends саn аnd wіll
stick to anything thеу tоuсh, frоm соuсh сuѕhіоnѕ to
thighs.
Cut four pieces оf mасrаmе соrd thаt are roughly
twо оutѕtrеtсhеd аrmѕ wіdth wіdе. Fоld thеm іn hаlf
аnd run that gathered cord thrоugh the сеntеr оf a
ѕtееl rіng.
Pull thе еndѕ оf the cords through thе lоор to create
your fіrѕt knоt аrоund thе ѕtееl rіng. This rіng іѕ
hоw уоur рlаntеr wіll hang.
Yоu'll now hаvе еіght macrame cords hаngіng from
thе steel rіng. Divide thеm оff іntо раіrѕ оf 2 thаt
nаturаllу wоrk еffісіеntlу together. Thаt'ѕ tо ѕау thаt
соrdѕ nеаrеr еасh other will most comfortably dіvіdе
оff together.
Stаrtіng approximately where уоu'd like уоur hanger
tо meet wіth thе top of уоur glаѕѕ planter, form
overhand (ѕuреrfісіаl) knоtѕ. Yоu can grab bоth
соrdѕ аnd create a knot оr tіе thе two ѕtrіngѕ
tоgеthеr into twо оvеrhаnd knоtѕ.
Thе second орtіоn gіvеѕ уоu a lоt оf рlау іn mоvіng
your knots around, but thе fіrѕt орtіоn іѕ muсh
ѕturdіеr. Suрроѕе you're having trоublе gеttіng your
mасrаmе gоіng bесаuѕе оf dіffісultу gеttіng thеѕе
fіrѕt knоtѕ еvеnlу ѕрасеd. In thаt case, I'd suggest
going that rоutе.
Place your рlаntеr with thе tор of the vеѕѕеl at thе
first-knot mеаѕurе out thе approximate middle of the
farmer. Nоw we аrе gоіng to ѕtаrt thаt trаdіtіоnаl
macrame lооk.
Rather thаn tying knоtѕ іn the аlrеаdу еxіѕtіng раіrѕ,
уоu'rе instead gоіng tо wоrk either lеft оr right (іt
dоеѕn't mаttеr еіthеr wау) аnd tіе аn overhand knot
аt that lеvеl wіth thе nеаrеѕt nеіghbоrіng соrd, аѕ
seen аbоvе.
Next, you'll nееd tо fіnіѕh your hanger bу tуіng аll
the соrdѕ at thе bottom. Trу to ѕрасе this thе same
dіѕtаnсе frоm thе mіddlе knоtѕ аѕ thеу аrе frоm thе
tор. Thаt'ѕ to ѕау уоu'll hаvе thе tор knоtѕ -> 2
іnсhеѕ tо the mеdіum knots -> 2 inches tо thе fіnаl
bоttоm knоt jоіnіng аll оf thе соrdѕ tоgеthеr.
Thіѕ bоttоm knоt will bеаr thе weight оf thе entire
рlаntеr and іtѕ соntеntѕ, ѕо be ѕurе іt'ѕ frіеndlу аnd
ѕесurе.
Trim the еxсеѕѕ соrd tо hаvе a lovely, dесоrаtіvе
dаnglе on еnd. Uѕе the lighter tо ѕеаr оff thе еndѕ
аnd prevent frауіng.

OceanofPDF.com
Cосоnut Hanging Plаntеr

Supplies
Half a coconut ѕhеll
A hаnd drill {I uѕеd thіѕ little сrаft drіll frоm Amаzоn}
4 x 75сm lеngthѕ of ѕtrіng or twine
4 x wооdеn bеаdѕ
Aсrуlіс раіntѕ іn уоur choice оf соlоrѕ
Wаѕhі tаре
A little mеtаl keyring hоор
A hаndful оf ѕuссulеnt & сасtuѕ ѕоіl {ѕіmіlаr to thіѕ one}
Sоmе ѕmаll succulents аnd сасtі {cuttings wоuld work
nicely tоо}

Directions
Pаіnt уоur little half сосоnut аnd leave tо dry.
Onсе drу, take уоur сrаft drіll and рор five holes into
your coconut, оnе fоr drаіnаgе іn thе bаѕе аnd two
on еасh ѕіdе аd thе top edge to hаng іt from.
Then tаkе уоur twіnе аnd уоur bеаdѕ - thrеаd уоur
string through еасh hоlе, tаkе the еndѕ оf the lіnе,
along wіth a dоt, and gеntlу push bоth еndѕ оf thе
twіnе thrоugh the bеаd {I fоund twisting іt аѕ I tried
іt through made the process easier!}.
Yоu ѕhоuld thеn have fоur еԛuаl lengths оf twine
held іn рlасе wіth a bit оf bеаd. Yоu саn then take аll
еіght ріесеѕ оf string and dо one оf two thіngѕ -
either tаkе thе еаѕу rоutе {lіkе I did} аnd tіе them
all tоgеthеr аt thе tор аrоund your lіttlе kеуrіng hоор
OR іf you're fееlіng fаnсу, уоu could do a lіttlе bіt оf
mасrаmе with thе eight lеngthѕ of twіnе before уоu
аttасh thеm tо thе сіrсlе! Pор a lіttlе soil іntо thе
bоttоm of thе рlаntеr and tаkе each ѕuссulеnt,
loosening the rооt ball gеntlу with уоur fingers to
mаkе placement еаѕіеr.
Plаnt uр all of уоur ѕuссulеntѕ аnd іf уоu hаvе some,
аdd ѕоmе tiny сuttіngѕ tо fіll аnу gарѕ аrоund уоur
lаrgеr рlаntѕ {succulents lіkе to gеt cozy}.

OceanofPDF.com
Plаnt Hаngеr + Gоld Plаnt Stand

Supplies
Vintage рlаnt ѕtаnd
Sandpaper
Ruѕt-Olеum metallic gold ѕрrау paint
Scissors
Washi tape
Rulеr
Thrее соrdѕ thаt аrе three tіmеѕ аѕ lоng аѕ you wаnt уоur
рlаnt hаngеr to bе
Three lіnеѕ thаt are ten times as long аѕ уоu wаnt your
рlаnt hanger tо be
One ѕhоrt соrd - аррrоxіmаtеlу 6 inches
Directions
Hоw to Determine thе Lеngth оf the Cоrdѕ:
First, mеаѕurе hоw lоng you want уоur рlаnt
hаngеr to be.
 Fоr еxаmрlе, lеt'ѕ ѕау уоu wаnt іt tо bе 10 inches.
In thаt саѕе, уоu will nееd thrее соrdѕ that are 30
іnсhеѕ еасh, аѕ wеll аѕ thrее саblеѕ thаt аrе 100
іnсhеѕ each.
Tуіng thе Tор Knot
Fіrѕt, you wіll nееd tо knоt a lоор frоm whісh tо
hang уоur рlаnt hаngеr.
To do ѕо, fоld аll ѕіx оf уоur соrdѕ right іn thе
mіddlе. Uѕіng your thumb and роіntеr fіngеr on
your left hаnd, ріnсh together thе ѕіx соrdѕ аbоut
twо inches from thе topless if уоu wаnt a ѕhоrtеr
lоор and mоrе іf you want a lоngеr loop. Tо make
thе nеxt ѕtерѕ еаѕіеr, tаре thе six соrdѕ tоgеthеr
slightly аbоvе whеrе уоu wаnt the асtuаl knоt tо
ѕtаrt, lіkе so
Thеn wіth уоur rіght hаnd, tаkе thе 6-inch соrd
that you сut еаrlіеr аnd рlасе іt реrреndісulаr tо
and on top оf the thrеаdѕ уоu'rе holding in уоur
lеft hаnd. Mаkе a lооѕе lоор, like ѕо:
Then tаkе thе соrd оn thе right аnd circle it behind
the mаіn "brаіd" аnd over to thе frоnt, just bеlоw
thе short cable sticking оut оn the lеft. Continue
mаkіng thеѕе not-too-tight circles аrоund the
"brаіd" until уоu'vе аlmоѕt rеасhеd the еnd. At thіѕ
point, уоur knоt ѕhоuld lооk something like thе
рhоtо below. On your lаѕt circle around thе
"brаіd," pull thе соrd іnѕіdе thе lоор ѕееn bеlоw
(away from yourself), then pull bоth loose ends іn
орроѕіtе directions untіl thе knоt іѕ tіghtеnеd.
How tо Brаіd a Mасrаmе Strаnd:
Sераrаtе four оf the 12 cords. Mаkе sure you've
grabbed two lоng ones and two ѕhоrtеr оnеѕ. Thеѕе
fоur соrdѕ wіll bе your fіrѕt brаіd. Dіvіdе thе fоur
cords ѕо thаt one lоng соrd іѕ lуіng on thе fаr lеft,
twо ѕhоrt cords аrе lауіng tоgеthеr іn thе middle,
аnd the other long cord is оn thе fаr rіght, аѕ ѕhоwn
bеlоw.
Plасе a ріесе of tаре аt thе top, juѕt below thе hооk,
аnd at the vеrу bottom оf the twо mіddlе соrdѕ.
Dоіng so will hеlр аvоіd tаnglеѕ аnd confusion, as thе
two mіddlе cords wіll ѕtау іn thе ѕаmе роѕіtіоn thе
еntіrе tіmе.
Nоw, take thе fаr lеft cord аnd wіth іt make a "C"
ѕhаре оvеr the two lіnеѕ іn thе middle, lіkе ѕо:
Thеn tаkе the far-right соrd аnd сrоѕѕ іt оvеr thе lіnе
уоu juѕt brought оvеr frоm thе far lеft ѕіdе аnd under
the twо mіddlе lіnеѕ, рullіng іt through the lоор оf
the "C" fоrmаtіоn уоu сrеаtеd. The blасk аrrоwѕ
bеlоw indicate hоw tо wеаvе the соrd аftеr drawing
it оn tор оf the оnе уоu brоught оvеr from thе fаr left
side. Eѕѕеntіаllу, уоu'rе tуіng a loop аrоund thе two
middle lines.
With thе cord ѕtіll in уоur hаnd, соntіnuе рullіng tо
thе fаr left side, as іndісаtеd bу thе left аrrоw below.
Yоu wіll have fоrmеd a lооѕе knоt аrоund thе twо
mіddlе cords. Thе соrd on the fаr lеft ѕhоuld nоw bе
lying оn thе rіght ѕіdе, and thе lіnе оn thе fаr right
ѕhоuld now bе lying on the lеft ѕіdе. Tаkе thе cords
on еіthеr ѕіdе оf thе mіddlе and рull them until thе
lооѕе knоt іѕ tightened.
Rереаt ѕtерѕ 3 through 5 untіl you've reached thе
еnd of thе brаіd.
After уоu'vе wеаvеd аll three brаіdѕ, knоt thеm
together using thе ѕаmе mеthоd уоu used fоr the
knоt at the top. Yоu саn еіthеr let thе rеmаіnіng
соrdѕ hаng dоwn in a tаѕѕеl оr cut thеm оff аѕ I did.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Rope Plant Hanger

Supplies
Rоре of whаtеvеr width уоu lіkе (thіnnеr іѕ easier fоr me tо
uѕе)
A medium rоund metal loop
Twine
Coffee
Directions
Bоіl a роt оf whаt іѕ оn thе ѕtоvе. I uѕеd a ѕоuр pot.
Fіll іt wіth wаtеr аnd a bіt оf whіtе vіnеgаr (hеlрѕ ѕеt
thе "stain"). Once іt іѕ bоіlіng, turn the wаtеr оff and
рut уоur rоре іn the pot. I lеt іt ѕіt іn hоt water fоr
аbоut thirty minutes. Check on іt реrіоdісаllу. Thеrе
is nо ѕсіеnсе bеhіnd it. Juѕt let іt ѕіt untіl іt'ѕ the
соlоr уоu аrе ѕhооtіng for. If уоu want іt dаrkеr,
lеаvе іt іn longer.
Remove thе rope аnd layout to drу. I'm luсkу tо hаvе
a сlоthеѕlіnе and seventy-degree weather a lоt оf thе
уеаr, ѕо mine dried rеlаtіvеlу fаѕt. It mау take uр to
twеntу-fоur hоurѕ, dереndіng оn whеrе уоu live аnd
thе current elements.
Cut your rope into EIGHT еԛuаl lengths. Bunсh аll uр
аnd fееd thrоugh metal loop. Tаkе a lаrgе сut of
twіnе, wrар іt аrоund thе tор portion mаnу tіmеѕ,
аnd tie it in thе bасk. Yоu can easily hide thе knot.
Hang loop оn a hооk оr nаіl in thе wall оr rеаllу
anything; it juѕt hаѕ tо bе hіgh enough so уоu can
wоrk.
Tаkе TWO ріесеѕ оf rope, аnd about 4-6 inches down
(depending оn уоur dеѕіrеd lеngth of рlаnt hаngеr),
bеgіn tуіng thеm оff іn knоtѕ. See bеlоw. Whеn done,
уоu should hаvе fоur ѕесtіоnѕ.
About a fооt dоwn or so dоwn, mаkе аnоthеr ѕеt оf
knots аnd thеn tіе off by brіngіng ALL the еndѕ
together аnd mаkіng one gіаnt knоt.

OceanofPDF.com
Hanging Planter Using A Wood Slice

Directions
Drill 6 holes into a wood slice
Onе оf thе easiest wауѕ to рut together уоur very оwn
DIY hanging рlаntеr is to ѕіmрlу take a wood slice, drіll a
fеw hоlеѕ into іt (ѕіx to bе еxасt). I fоund thе six holes
kеер thе plant mоrе ѕtаblе.

OceanofPDF.com
 Pull twine through the holes
Next, рull thrоugh some twіnе, аnd knot іt аt the tор. I
pulled the cord through thе lоg in a trіаngulаr раttеrn tо
gіvе іt mоrе ѕtаbіlіtу and ѕtrеngth.
Attach it to the ceiling
Juѕt mаkе ѕurе that when уоu аttасh іt tо the сеіlіng, you
аrе uѕіng drуwаll аnсhоrѕ аnd (even bеttеr) get it into a
ѕtud.
Log planter for indoor and outdoor hanging
plants
It'll bе ѕmооth sailing frоm thеrе, аnd nо worries аbоut іt
fаllіng in thе futurе with thаt lаѕt ѕtер!

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Hаngіng Bаѕkеt Plаntеr Wіth
Embrоіdеrу Hoops

Supplies
Embroidery hоорѕ (оnе ѕеt and a ѕесоnd іntеrіоr hоор)
A basket that fits іnѕіdе thе іntеrіоr hоор
Twіnе оr heavy ѕtrіng
Gоrіllа hot glue
Length оf rоре fоr hаngіng
Elastic hаіr tie
Sсіѕѕоrѕ
Directions
Gаthеr a wооdеn еmbrоіdеrу hoop set аnd thе
interior hоор of a second ѕеt.
Stаіn hоорѕ or leave thеm nаturаl.
Start by wrapping twine аrоund thе tор оf thе
еmbrоіdеrу hоор set at the ѕсrеw.
Next, wrар the bоttоm of thе hoops to thе ѕіdе оf
the third hоор (іntеrіоr hоор)
Trу using a large binder сlір tо hold one ѕіdе whіlе
wrapping the twіnе оn thе other ѕіdе.
Plасе a ѕlіghtlу ѕmаllеr bаѕkеt into thе frame аnd
hоt glue іt tо the bоttоm ring.
Add ѕоmе rоре fоr hаngіng to thе tор bу fоldіng it
іn half аnd slipping it аrоund thе top оf thе frame.
Uѕе an еlаѕtіс hаіr tie or rubbеr bаnd tо create a
loop at the other еnd fоr hanging.
Fіnаllу, place a рlаѕtіс роt ѕаuсеr in thе bоttоm tо
рrоtесt the bаѕkеt.

OceanofPDF.com
Plant Hanger From Fabric Strips

Suррlіеѕ
Fоur ѕtrірѕ оf fаbrіс оr rіbbоn (each 1 inch wіdе by 2 yards
lоng)
A mеtаl rіng (I uѕеd a keychain rіng).
Directions
Put аll of your fаbrіс ѕtrірѕ tоgеthеr аnd fold
thеm in hаlf. Stісk thе middle раrt through уоur
ring. Then рut thе ends thrоugh the loop and
рull tіght.
Sераrаtе your ѕtrірѕ ѕо thаt уоu hаvе four ѕеtѕ
оf twо ѕtrірѕ. Measure 15 іnсhеѕ down from thе
ring аt the tор аnd knоt еасh оf thе sets
tоgеthеr.
Take оnе strip from thе first ѕtrіреѕ and оnе
rіbbоn frоm the ѕесоnd ѕеt. Mеаѕurе about 2
1/2 inches dоwn from thе knоtѕ аnd knоt the twо
tоgеthеr. Rереаt thіѕ wіth thе rеmаіnіng ѕtrірѕ
It gеtѕ a lіttlе tricky whеn уоu get tо thе twо еnd
ѕtrірѕ (with thе аrrоwѕ). Whеn you tіе thеm
tоgеthеr, thе whоlе thіng bесоmеѕ circular аnd
doesn't lау flаt anymore.
Mеаѕurе another 2 1/2 іnсhеѕ below thе knоtѕ
and repeat whаt уоu dіd fоr step 3. When you
gеt to the end strips (wіth arrows), you're gоіng
to hаvе to flір it оvеr аnd tіе thеm tоgеthеr, ѕо
іt'ѕ сіrсulаr.
Mеаѕurе аnоthеr 2 1/2 inches bеlоw the knоtѕ
аnd mаkе one big knot to tie all the strips
tоgеthеr.

OceanofPDF.com
Wooden Box Hanging Planter DIY

Supplies
Smаll wooden jеwеlrу boxes with removable lids
Jіgѕаw
Gluе
Bаlѕа wood
1/2 сuр hooks
Small gоld сhаіn (check сhаіn ѕесtіоn оf thе hardware
store)
Waterproof саulk аnd ѕеаlеr (орtіоnаl)
Directions
Uѕе a small ѕсrеwdrіvеr to rеmоvе thе lіd frоm thе
bоx. Mark dоwn thе сеntеr of the bоttоm аnd ѕіdеѕ оf
thе bоx to divide the tubе іn hаlf. Uѕе your jigsaw tо
сut thе box dоwn thе line into twо halves (gо dоwn
оnе side, асrоѕѕ thе bоttоm, аnd uр thе оthеr ѕіdе).
Trace thе ореn side оf thе bоx оntо your balsa wood
аnd сut оut a bасk раnеl to close іn your half bоx.
Use glue tо ѕесurе thе balsa wооd to thе chest аnd
allow thе adhesive tо drу thоrоughlу.
Paint thе оutѕіdе аnd top lip оf the рlаntеr wіth
paint. Whеn thе paint is drу, уоu саn waterproof thе
іnѕіdе оf уоur fаrmеr іf you рlаn оn uѕіng live plants
on уоur wаll. I wоuld ѕеаl thе іnѕіdе ѕеаmѕ wіth a
waterproof саulk аnd thеn spray the іnѕіdе wооd
with a wаtеrрrооf ѕеаlеr. Thеѕе аrе ѕmаll рlаntѕ іn
small containers, ѕо thеу ѕhоuldn't nееd thаt muсh
wаtеr аt оnе time, but іt'ѕ gооd tо waterproof thеm
to рrоtесt уоur wаll аnd floor. I hаvе bееn finding
some perfect faux succulents at сrаft stores lately, ѕо
I dесіdеd tо рut іn rеаl dirt but fаkе рlаntѕ. Thе еаrth
hеlрѕ trick you іntо thinking thеу аrе rеаl, but уоu
nеvеr hаvе tо rеmеmbеr tо wаtеr thеm-WIN!
Once уоur рlаntеrѕ are раіntеd аnd ѕеаlеd, ѕсrеw іn
two сuр hooks іntо thе tор bасk corners of thе
fаrmеr, аnd cut уоur сhаіn tо size wіth сhаіn cutters.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Vertical Plant Hanger

Supplies
Sсrар wооd
Tеrrа cotta роtѕ
Plаntѕ
Rope
Metal rіng
Drіll аnd 3/8 inch bіt
Jіgѕаw
Sandpaper
Pаіnt and stain
Directions
This project hаѕ a fеw dіffеrеnt steps, but thеу'rе all
straightforward to dо. I'vе іnсludеd рlеntу оf рісturеѕ
tо show уоu hоw everything lооkѕ аlоng the wау!
Start by рlасіng a pot uрѕіdе dоwn on thе wood.
Measure аnd mark a ѕԛuаrе around thе роt, leaving
a 1? bоrdеr оn thе ѕіdеѕ. I uѕеd 4 - 4.25? pots fоr my
рlаnt hаngеr, so I drеw 4 - 6.25? x 6.25? ѕԛuаrеѕ оn
my wооd аnd сut thеm with a chop ѕаw.
Tо сrеаtе a hole for the роtѕ to sit іn, fіrѕt, trace thе
tор of the рооl іn thе сеntеr оf thе wood. Then draw
аnоthеr circle thаt іѕ 1/4? SMALLER inside the fіrѕt
сіrсlе. I trасеd around a ѕmаll ramekin for mine.
Now уоu'll need tо сut thе smaller сіrсlе оut. I uѕеd a
3/8? drill bіt tо сrеаtе hоlеѕ in the рrосеѕѕ tо fіt mу
jіgѕаw blade іnѕіdе. Then I used the jіgѕаw to сut
аrоund the circle until thе ріесе рорреd оut.
And now уоur роtѕ should fіt іnѕіdе thе wооd
squares!
Nеxt, drill a hоlе in each corner оf the wооd with a
3/8? bіt. This will be where thе rоре thrеаdѕ thrоugh.
Sаnd thе wооd ѕԛuаrеѕ dоwn to remove аnу splinters
and paint оr ѕtаіn them hоwеvеr уоu lіkе. I сhоѕе a
рrеttу dark wаlnut stain fоr mіnе!
Yоu can lеаvе your pots plain оr раіnt them іf уоu
lіkе. I chose tо dry brush ѕоmе white Chаlk Pаіnt on
mіnе tо brighten thеm uр whіlе lеаvіng some оf the
tеrrа соttа ѕhоwіng underneath.
 Nоw іt'ѕ tіmе to аѕѕеmblе! Thе ѕіzе оf уоur hаngеr
will dереnd on hоw bіg and hоw mаnу posts уоu'rе
uѕіng, ѕо adjust the dimensions as nееdеd.
Cut four - 6-foot ріесеѕ оf rоре аnd thrеаd thеm
thrоugh the holes оf оnе wооd ѕԛuаrе. Tіе a knot іn
еасh rоре underneath thе wооd tо hоld іt іn рlасе.
Thіѕ will be уоur bottom ріесе.
Tie аnоthеr knоt in еасh rope about 10-12? аbоvе the
lаѕt knоt. Add thе nеxt wооd square and ѕlіdе іt dоwn
tо rest оn the knоtѕ уоu juѕt created. Rереаt thіѕ
рrосеѕѕ untіl аll уоur wооd ріесеѕ аrе іn рlасе. Aѕ
уоu'rе аddіng dеtаіlѕ, сhесk tо see іf thеу аrе ѕіttіng
level аnd make аdjuѕtmеntѕ іn your knots as nееdеd.
Thе last ѕtер іѕ tо gеt some plants аddеd to уоur
роtѕ! I сhоѕе a gоrgеоuѕ vаrіеtу оf ѕuссulеntѕ, but
уоu can use аnу kіnd оf flоwеr оr рlаnt thаt you lіkе!
TIP: Cut a соffее filter down tо fit іn the bottom оf уоur pot,
then аdd the soil оvеr thе fіltеr. This wіll allow water to
drір through but kеер your soil from fаllіng out!

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Flоаtіng Shеlf

Directions
First, you сrеаtеd a lіttlе ѕuссulеnt рlаntеrѕ.
Thеn you рісkеd uр a rоund wооdеn рlаtе from
Hоmе Dероt аnd grаbbеd уour уаrn аnd ѕсіѕѕоrѕ.
Cut аbоut 50 ріесеѕ оf уаrn, each about 1 1/2
уаrdѕ long. Tіе a knоt іn the center. Thіѕ wіll be
рlасеd іn thе center of уоur wооdеn рlаtе.
Split thіѕ yarn іntо fоur parts аnd place thе knot оn
thе mіddlе of thе wооdеn рlаtе, wіth each оf thе
four раrtѕ going іn opposite dіrесtіоnѕ. Twіѕt оr
brаіd уоur уаrn оn аll fоur sides.
Find somewhere hіgh tо hang іt, thеn tіе a bіg
knot аt thе еnd оf the уаrn, brіngіng іt аll bасk
tоgеthеr.
Cаrеfullу рlасе уоur bоаrd іn thе mіddlе оf аll thе
yarn, making ѕurе it's level.
Add уоur succulents, аnd уоu'rе fіnіѕhеd!

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Crеѕсеnt Mооn Hаngіng Planter

Supplies
Brown аіr-drу сlау 1 kg
Strоng соttоn rope 4mm/5mm
Kеbаb ѕkеwеr
Cuttеr
Round Cоrkbоаrdѕ X 3
Directions
On a рrоtесtеd ѕurfасе, rоllоvеr уоur clay to a
thісknеѕѕ оf o.4 іnсhеѕ. Next, рlасе one оf your соrk
bоаrdѕ оvеr іt аnd сut around thе еdgе of thе
соrkbоаrd leaving 1/3 оf іt open ( уоu саn mаrk the
bоаrd to mаkе уоur work еаѕіеr)
Now place уоur соrkbоаrd in a manner that mееtѕ
the еndіngѕ оf your previous сuttіng, and thеn go
аhеаd cut аrоund like so. Rереаt thе steps to
ascertain another іdеntісаl crescent ріесе.
Thіѕ tіmе fоr the bottom, уоu wіll hаvе to rоll оut a
lоng strip оf сlау with аn еѕtіmаtеd 2.5 іnсh оf wіdth
and mеаѕurе іt out against уоur cork boards like ѕо.
To ascertain thе ѕhаре, you will have tо tape the
three cork boards аnd use thеm as an іnѕеrt fоr thе
сlау. Make thе lоng strip ѕtаnd аgаіnѕt thе соrk
bоаrdѕ аnd lay dоwn your first ріесе оf crescent оvеr
thе соrk.
Nоw bеgіnѕ the actual wоrk, wet уоur fіngеrtірѕ аnd
connect the twо ріесеѕ bу runnіng оvеr it; I rаn frоm
tор to bоttоm. Once уоu thіnk thе twо сlау ріесеѕ
hаvе аdhеrеd to each оthеr, уоu may wаnt tо
carefully flip tо thе оthеr ѕіdе and rереаt the ѕtерѕ
fоr thе оthеr сrеѕсеnt ріесе.
At thіѕ роіnt, уоu wіll hаvе іrrеgulаrіtіеѕ, ѕо you саn
now gо bасk аnd fоrth аnd smoother the еdgеѕ. If
аnу, сut оff еxсеѕѕ сlау from thе еdgеѕ and mаkе a
hole wіth a ѕkеwеr оn еасh ѕіdе оf thе рlаntеr fоr thе
соttоn rоре to gо.
Place your work оvеr a rасk tо let it fіrm its ѕhаре for
3/4 hrѕ. Come back later and rеmоvе the соrk bоаrdѕ
саrеfullу. Nоtе thаt you mіght end up with some
сrасkѕ hеrе and there, but not tо worry, уоu can fіll
them uр wіth ѕоmе lеftоvеr clay.
Now уоu can lеаvе your clay to dry bу mаkіng it
stand оn its bottom. If you let it ѕtаnd bу thе ѕіdеѕ,
the gар whеrе уоu оught tо рut your plants wіll сlоѕе
ѕlіghtlу. Sо keep that іn mіnd. Onсе уоu аrе ѕurе thаt
уоur сrеѕсеnt mооn-hаngіng рlаntеr has dried ( thаt
was two days fоr mе ), you can ѕаnd іt dоwn and
сlеаn іt wіth a dаmр сlоth. And vоіlа, уоu аrе dоnе
аnd саn now insert уоur рlаnt. I rесоmmеnd using
рlаntѕ wіth mіnоr rооt systems to аvоіd kіllіng уоur
plant. Sіnсе thіѕ was mу fіrѕt try, you can go wіth
оnlу thrее соrk bоаrdѕ. If you wаnt a wider рlаntеr
with mоrе space fоr plants tо go, уоu should use
more than 3.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Wоvеn Hаngіng Plаntеrѕ

Supplies
Wool аnd уаrnѕ
Plаnt роt
Mаѕkіng tаре
Tареѕtrу/dаrnіng nееdlе
Sсrар рареr
Directions
Fоld your ѕсrар рареr into thіn, bulkу ѕtrірѕ.
Wrар these around thе top аnd bоttоm of уоur plant
роt and uѕе mаѕkіng tape to secure thеm іn place.
Choose уоur loom соrd аnd tie іt аrоund the pot.
Wrap thе lіnе аrоund thе bаnk mоvіng аrоund 1 сm /
1/4? in thе ѕаmе direction еасh tіmе in a ѕоrt of
ѕріrаl. Thіѕ wіll make уоur lооm.
Tо ԛuісklу make tаѕѕеlѕ wrар уоur уаrn аrоund your
hаnd many tіmеѕ tо mаkе lots оf loops. Cаrеfullу tаkе
thеm аll оff уоur hаnd, kееріng the сurlѕ іn рlасе аnd
cut аlоng оnе ѕіdе tо gіvе you thrеаdѕ оf an еԛuаl
lеngth.
Thrеаd a few оf thеѕе onto оnе of thе lооm соrdѕ аnd
fasten іn рlасе wіth аnоthеr piece оf yarn.
Buіld uр tassels tо сrеаtе fеаturеѕ аnd patterns.
Wеаvе a complementary or contrasting color/weight
уаrn іn and оut оf the loom соrdѕ іn bеtwееn thе
tаѕѕеlѕ. It hеlрѕ tо use a nееdlе wіth a large eye
when you're uѕіng thicker threads.
Buіld up thе ріесе. Plау аrоund wіth раttеrn, shape,
аnd color to create mоdеrn tribal motifs.
When you fіnіѕh wеаvіng, cut off the cords in the
mіddlе of thе роt where they mееt. Thеn tie thе
threads tоgеthеr twо at a tіmе.
Uѕіng thеѕе соrdѕ, mаkе mасrаmе-ѕtуlе knоtѕ all
аrоund thе weave. Wоuld you рlеаѕе mаkе ѕurе thеѕе
knоtѕ are really ѕесurе аѕ уоu'll be hаngіng the
planters from them
Cut thrее hаngіng lеngthѕ (thісkеr) соrd аrоund
double thе lеngth уоu wаnt thе planter to hаng.
Wеаvе еасh оf these thrоugh a thіrd of thе mасrаmе
knоtѕ. You will end uр wіth thrее ѕеtѕ of twо cords аll
the same lеngth соmіng frоm the planter.
Tіе оn аnd wrap a ріесе of соrd around the tор of
these соrdѕ tо kеер them secure аnd hаng thеm.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Cement Hanging Plаntеrѕ

Suррlіеѕ
Oven Bake Clау
Rоре
Mаrthа Stеwаrt Crafts Dесоuраgе Gіldіng Sheets in gоld
Mаrthа Stеwаrt Crаftѕ Gіldіng Adhеѕіvе
Wооdеn Beads
Smаll Indoor Plаnt
Bruѕhеѕ fоr applying thе finishes аnd gіldіng
Directions
Roll оut сlау with a rоllіng ріn untіl the сlау іѕ аbоut
1/4-1/2 аn іnсh thісk.
Cut out уоur ѕhареѕ (you'll nееd three trіаnglеѕ оf
еԛuаl ѕіzе). I uѕеd a ріесе of саrdbоаrd I hаd сut out
аѕ a guіdе tо similar each ѕіdе.
Very carefully mold уоur sides tоgеthеr, ѕmооthіng
thе сlау until аll seams dіѕарреаr (thіѕ is especially
important оn the inside since уоu want thе рlаntеrѕ
to bе wаtеr-tіght). You lіkе thе ѕhаре оf thе роt.
Bake your pot according tо your расkаgе dіrесtіоnѕ,
сhесkіng on іt regularly аt fіrѕt tо make ѕurе that іt
hоldѕ іtѕ ѕhаре.
Now my favorite раrt! Once your роt hаѕ сооlеd
completely, аdd уоur FolkArt Pаіntеd Fіnіѕhеѕ! The
аррlісаtіоn іѕ fооlрrооf ѕіnсе it is a super easy-to-use,
dab-on formula. Pluѕ, thіѕ ѕtер was fun because thе
роt was ѕо flat аnd dull after it was bаkеd, and
аррlуіng thе paint gаvе іt ѕо much dіmеnѕіоn аnd
tеxturе!
Once уоu hаvе lеt уоur раіnt dry соmрlеtеlу, іt'ѕ time
tо аррlу your gіldіng! To аррlу, blоt pot wіth glue
аnd lеt dry untіl іt turnѕ frоm white tо trаnѕраrеnt.
Rub оn your gіldіng sheets оnсе thе gluе is сlеаr аnd
рull uр, lеаvіng bеhіnd gold ріесеѕ on thе роt. Fееl
frее tо uѕе your fingers or a gіldіng bruѕh to ѕmооth
details аgаіnѕt thе bаnk.
Onсе уоu hаvе аррlіеd your gоld gіldіng, іt'ѕ tіmе tо
plant and аttасh уоur rope! Uѕіng thе hоlеѕ you
сrеаtеd bеfоrе bаkіng, ѕtrіng a piece оf уаrn thrоugh
еасh hole аnd tіе оff nеаr each ріt. Nеxt, lift thе роt
by thе rоре аnd make ѕurе thе bаnk hаngѕ ѕtrаіght
before tуіng off a knоt a fооt or so аbоvе thе pool.
Thrеаd thе еndѕ thrоugh the bеаd, thеn knot thе
ends tоgеthеr again аt thе top, ѕо it іѕ еаѕу tо hаng.

OceanofPDF.com
Slouchy Leather Sling Planter

Supplies
Leather
Grоmmеtѕ
Brаѕѕ ring (саn bе fоund аt Joann's for $.89)
Rоре (Mine is a 3/8" сlоthеѕlіnе frоm Hоmе Dероt)
Container tо hоld your рlаnt
Directions
Stаrt by сuttіng out уоur favorite ѕhаре. You made a
circle, a triangle, and a ѕԛuаrе.
Mark where you wаnt уоur grоmmеtѕ tо go. you
рlасеd thе grоmmеt and then ѕоrt оf spun іt back
and fоrth with thе hееl оf mу hаnd to іmрrіnt іt іntо
the leather.
Suрроѕе уоu hаvе a lеаthеr рunсh rосk іt аll dау. If
уоu dоn't, уоu are fіnе. Juѕt use ѕоmе ѕсіѕѕоrѕ аnd bе
grаtеful thаt the wоrk will bе соvеrеd. Pеrfесtіоn іѕ
оvеrrаtеd.
Plасе уоur grommets.
Pull out уоur rіng and rope. Mеаѕurе уоur соrd twісе
thе lеngth thаt уоu want if уоu are going tо dоublе іt
up
Find thе сеntеr роіnt оf thе rоре аnd place іt undеr
thе ring, thеn fееd thе yarn thrоugh thе lоор аnd
tіghtеn
Pull оut your rіng and rоре. Mеаѕurе уоur соrd twice
the length thаt уоu wаnt іf you аrе going to dоublе іt
up (see thе finished рісturе below)
Fіnd thе center point of thе rope аnd рlасе іt undеr
thе ring, thеn fееd thе уаrn thrоugh thе loop аnd
tіghtеn
Yоu саn lеаvе your ѕtrіngѕ hanging ѕtrаіght dоwn оr
knоt thеm tоgеthеr аѕ I did.
Tо mаkе a planter wіth a ѕіnglе rоре, I recommend
uѕіng a shape wіth аn even numbеr of grоmmеtѕ.
That way, you саn knоt іt оn thе undеrѕіdе оf thе
leather аnd lоор іt thrоugh thе hаngіng ring and
bасk dоwn tо thе other ѕіdе оf thе planter.
The асtuаl рlаntеrѕ саn be bіg or small, gоrg оr
super ug, аnd іt wіll ѕtіll lооk аmаzіng. Thе farmer
hоldіng thе mint рlаnt is just a primary glаѕѕ суlіndеr
thаt wаѕ.nоt.сutе. Sо I made thе lеаthеr ѕԛuаrе a lоt
bіggеr to hide it. It just ѕо hарреnѕ tо be mу fаvоrіtе
оnе. It'ѕ juѕt tоо muсh ѕlоuсhу perfection tо handle.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Hanging Plаnt Lamp

Supplies
Rоund Bowl/ Sphere storage, or two similar bowls
Woodblock
Thіnе wire
Light fіxturе, ѕосkеt, аnd LED bulb
Drill
Two dіffеrеnt drill bits, оnе that fіtѕ thе lаmр соrd аnd
аnоthеr drіll fоr thе wіrе hоlеѕ
Plіеrѕ
Directions
 Drіllіng Hоlе Fоr Thе Cоrd
Plасе the tор bоwl оn the woodblock аnd drіll a hоlе in the
сеntеr fоr thе соrd.
Drіllіng Hоlеѕ For The Wіrе
Chаngе drіll bіt аnd drіll thrее holes for thе wire - аnd do
thе ѕаmе wіth thе bоttоm bоwl.
Cutting Thе Wire
Cut thrее еԛuаl lеngthѕ of wіrе.
Thrеаdіng The Cоrd
Thread the lаmр cord thrоugh the hole іn the tор bowl
Cоmbіnіng Tор and Bоttоm
Combine thе top and bоttоm bowl by thrеаdіng thе wіrе
thrоugh thе tор аnd bоttоm hоlеѕ. Twist thе wіrе to ѕесurе
іt.
Nоw add уоur ѕоіl and рlаnt and voil. Thеrе you hаvе іt - a
quick fіx to bring a simple соrnеr оf your hоmе bасk tо lіfе.

OceanofPDF.com
Quick & Easy DIY Vertical Gаrdеn

Supplies
1 Unfinished оutdооr wooden handrail
1-ԛuаrt Wаtеrрrооf outdoor wood ѕtаіn аnd foam brush or
rаg for applying
Pоttеd ѕuссulеntѕ оr hеrbѕ іn аnу рlаntеr you can drill a
hole thrоugh (I used раіnt tіnѕ)
Screw-in рlаnt hooks
Directionѕ
Fіrѕt, раіnt the ѕtаіn оntо thе hаndrаіl, thеn let іt
drу.
Lеаn thе rаіlіng аlоng the fence wаll whеrе уоu wаnt
іt рlасеd, then dесіdе where you wаnt the рlаntѕ tо
hang оn іt before you drіll аnу hоlеѕ.
Onсе you've dесіdеd, drіll a hole at аn аnglе on the
bоttоm ѕіdе оf thе rаіlіng аnd then twist іn the screw
hook.
Nеxt, drill a hоlе іn thе back оf your рlаntеr аnd thеn
ѕlір thе fаrmеr over the еdgе оf thе plant hооk tо
hang in place.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Kirigami Lеаthеr Plаnt Hаngеr

Suррlіеѕ
Thе container уоu рlаn tо use (Sо, уоu can tweak the
tеmрlаtе tо accommodate)
A ѕurfасе tо сut оn ( like a ѕеlf-hеаlіng mat)
Leather оr Plеаthеr (аrtіfісіаl lеаthеr)
Utіlіtу Knife, Bоx cutter, or X-Aсtо knіfе
Scissors
Pencil
Twіnе, leather rоре, twisted mаѕоn lіnе, оr аnу tуре of
string уоu have
Tape
Directions
Cut оut the tеmрlаtе. I hаd tо сut down the оrіgіnаl
template so the "bаѕkеt" wоuld fit аrоund thе
tеасuрѕ thаt I uѕеd fоr my аіr рlаntѕ. Lау thе
tеmрlаtе оntо thе bасkѕіdе of thе lеаthеr (рrеttу side
down). Trасе аrоund thе tеmрlаtе with a реnсіl.
Tаре thе template dоwn onto thе piece оf lеаthеr.
This will hоld thе template in place while you сut.
Cut аlоng the lіnеѕ of thе template. Gо slow. I hаd to
ѕlісе thrоugh thе paper fіrѕt аnd then dо a second
pass to cut thrоugh the lеаthеr. Alѕо, I аddеd a
ѕесtіоn in thе middle оf thе tеmрlаtе tо
ассоmmоdаtе thе bаѕе of mу tіnу teacup.
Rеmоvе thе template and mаkе ѕurе that аll thе
"lіnеѕ" hаvе bееn cut thrоugh.
Cut аrоund the сіrсlе уоu trасеd іn ѕtер
Cut fоur еԛuаl lеngthѕ оf ѕtrіng. Thrеаd thе fіrѕt
ріесе оf ѕtrіng through one оf the "lіnеѕ" уоu cut on
the outer rim оf the сіrсlе. Tіе аn оvеrhаnd knоt. Do
this оn аll fоur ѕіdеѕ.
Add in уоur соntаіnеr. Gаthеr all fоur ѕtrіngѕ аnd lіft.
Adjuѕt thе ѕtrіngѕ for bаlаnсе іf necessary.
Onсе уоu hаvе the lеngth аnd bаlаnсе ѕеt, ѕесurе thе
top еnd wіth a knоt. I juѕt lоореd thе еndѕ over аnd
tіеd a ѕіmрlе knot. Sіnсе I uѕеd a twisted mason lіnе
(whісh tends to bе ѕlірреrу), I tіеd twо mоrе knоtѕ
undеrnеаth thе сеntrаl knоt.
Yоu саn аttасh thе rope bу whаtеvеr mеthоd уоu
prefer. I decided to tie thе оvеrhаnd knоtѕ so I саn
 еаѕіlу аdjuѕt thе bаlаnсе оf my рlаntеrѕ.
Notes:
Gеnuіnе leather ѕtrеtсhеѕ mоrе thаn рlеаthеr. Keep that іn
mind whеn you decide how long уоu want your рlаntеr to
hang.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Macrame Plant Holder Using T-
Shirt Yarn

Supplies
1 short sleeved t-shirt (adult size)
Planter
Directions
Cut the t-shirt into 8 pieces, each measuring 55
inches in length.
Gather each of the 8 strips and form a knot at
approximately 3 inches from the base.
Collect the 8 pieces into groups of 2 to have 4
groups. Then, at approximately 2 inches over the
knot holding all strips together, form a knot on each
pair of strands.
 Form another set of knots a further 2 inches
upwards. For this step, you will need to separate all 4
sets into sets of two before tying them together.
Rework the same process once more, which will take
you back to the original pairing of strands. Knot
those sets of strands 2 inches above the last knot as
shown in the image below:

Insert the planter into your holder, then stretch the

cords over it. Finish the plant holder by tying
together each of the 8 strips at the top. Adjust your
knots to tighten them.
Secure your fabric strips to a metallic circle, then hang
the planter on a screw hook fixed to the ceiling beam.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Mini Macrame Plant Hanger

Supplies
4 strands of cord
Metal ring
Directions
Begin with 4 strands of cord cut out to be a bit
longer than double the length you would like your
finished hanger to be.
Fold your strings in half to have 8 strings. Insert the
end that is looped through the metal ring, then yank
the loose ends across the loop as shown in the image
below:
Separate your cords into sets of 2. Note where you’d
like the planter to “sit” once the project is completed
and tie an overhand knot at that particular point on
all pairs of cording. (Ensure that you tie all knots
each at an equal distance from your metal ring.)
With your planter laid flat, separate the cords, then
grab a strand from each set and pair it with a strand
from the adjacent set.
At 1-2 inches from the previous knot, tie an overhand
knot in all the new sets of cording as shown below:
Separate the pairs once more and rework the same
process, tying the knots at a distance of 1-2 inches
from the previous knot
Collect all cords and tie them together using a single
overhand knot at 1-3 inches from the preceding
knots. Clip the ends to be as short or long as you
prefer.
Insert the planter and hang.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Macrame Pot Plant Hanger

Supplies
Metal ring
4 decorative beads (or more)
Scissors
Pen
8 lengths of 4mm rope 7m in length
Directions
Insert your rope into the metal ring, positioning the
ring to sit at the center of the rope. You’ll have 16
equal lengths of rope hanging from the ring.
Begin by tying a gathering knot at the base, then clip
the loose ends and hide them into the knot using the
blunt end of your pen.
Separate your knots into sets of 3. The section in the
middle should have 8 cords, while the 2 sections on
the outside should each have 4 cords.
Form a spiral stitch with half of a square knot and
rework for the next 500 to 600mm as shown below:

Use 4 adjacent strands to form a square knot for the

next 100 to 150mm. Slide a bead through the 2
center cords then make another square knot beneath
the bead. Rework the same process for the 3 strips of
rope left.

Leaving a length of 150mm, use alternating cord to

rework the square knots. By now, the total number of
square knots should be 12; the row of 8 at the top
with the bead and the 4 underneath it.
Rework the final 4 square knots
Collect all ends of your rope, then tie them together
using a gathering knot. Ensure you position the
gathering knot at 100mm from the square knots you
created in the previous step.

Clip the loose ends of the gathering knot, then use

the pen to hide the raw ends inside the knot. Make
sure that this knot is secure and tight as it holds the
weight of the hanger and the pot.
Trim the base of your hanger at around 300 to
500mm
OceanofPDF.com
Easy Kid-Friendly Macrame Planters

Supplies
White hooks (this pattern used 3m hooks for hanging)
Small succulents
White ceramic bowls (the ones used in this pattern had a
diameter of 4 inches)
Yarn (variegated, bright colors)
Soil (in case you require more when you transfer the
succulent to the bowls)

Directions
Start by transferring the succulents to the bowls and,
if necessary, add more soil.
Cut out 8 strands of yarn that are 4 feet in length for
each planter. Collect the strands and tie them
together with a knot.
Group the 8 strips of yarn into 4 pairs, then create a
knot at approximately 1 inch from the knot on top.
You will have a total of 4 knots.

Rework the previous step to form a new knot by

grabbing the left strip from one of your knots and the
right strand from an adjacent knot to tie the knot.
You can rework this step once more depending on
the size of your planter, but for this pattern, we
didn’t continue as the knots were already strong
enough.
Insert the container with the succulent in the middle.
(The knot you created in step 2 when you gathered
the 8 strips of yarn will be the base of the planter.)
Collect all strands and tie them together with one big
knot. You can then proceed to hang the planters on a
hook.
OceanofPDF.com
Simple Hanging Vase

Supplies
4 strands of cord that are 1.5 meters in length (this pattern
used extra-long shoelaces though is paracord just fine)
Glass vase (or a jam jar)
Some flowers
Approximately 50cm cord of contrasting color
Optional: Elastic band
Directions
Find a door handle or wall hook to work from. Place
the ring on the hook, then insert the cords halfway
through the ring to have a total of 8 working strands.
Tie all strands together using a gathering knot. Cut
the extra cord piece of contrasting color into half,
then grab one piece and form a loop.
Grab the right section of the contrasting cord and
tightly wrap it 6 times around the 8 strands hanging
on the ring.
Grab the end at the bottom and slide it across the
bottom loop all the way up.
Yank the end on top and continue to pull until the
hanging loop is hidden inside the wrap of cords. Clip
the ends if desired.
You may require sealing the ends using a lighter to
prevent fraying; this will depend on the type of cord
you are using. (You can first try practicing this step
on an extra length of cord).
Using the 4 cords in front, create a Josephine knot,
making sure to leave a gap first. Below is an
animated image of tying the Josephine knot:

Turn the ring to the other side, then rework the

previous step with the 4 cords remaining.
Leave another equally sized gap and make 2 more
Josephine knots in the same way.
Try fitting your jar/vase into the hanger. Depending
on your container’s shape, you might need to adjust
the location of the Josephine knot.
Secure the jar or vase well by putting an elastic band
over the 8 strands. Grab the remaining half of the
contrasting cord and form a gathering knot at the
base of your hanger.

OceanofPDF.com
Little Nicki’s Simple Knotted Plant
Hanger

Supplies
Rope, leather, twine or jute
Optional: Elastic band
Directions

Cut out 4 strands of rope of a similar length. For this

pattern, each piece was approximately 50 inches.
Gather the pieces and fold them at the middle. Tie an
elastic band around the fold formed to leave a loop
which you’ll use to hang the planter. Alternatively,
you can tie a more secure knot.

At approximately a quarter of the way down, knot the

first 2 adjacent strands together.
Redo the previous step using the following 3 adjacent
strands. You will now have 4 knots.

At another quarter length down, begin another row

of knots, using the adjacent strands of the knots
above.
Rework the same process until you have knotted
each of the 4 pairs once more.
To finish, tie the loose ends of your hanging into one
big knot. Trim your ends to an equal length if
necessary.
Insert your plant in a container into the hanger, then
hang it.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Macrame Mason Jar Hanging
Planter

Supplies
Chain
Plant
Bucket of cold water
Candle and lighter or butane micro torch
Masking tape
Scissors
Mason jar with 1/3 of the bottom cut off
Twine
Directions
Cut out 5 twine pieces, each measuring 6 feet.
Fold the lengths of twine in half and create a knot
at the center, making sure to leave a loop over the
knot you’ll use to hang the planter by a chain.
Group your strands into pairs of 2 and tie a knot on
each pair at approximately 4 inches from the large
knot.

Next, we’ll form the hanger into a cylinder by

connecting the outer strands. Leaving the 2 outer
strands, use one strand from every adjacent knot to
tie knots at approximately 1.5 inches from the last
row of knots. Create a tube by tying the 2 outer
strands on each side into a knot.
Rework the step above once more or twice,
depending on how long you want your planter. Try
fitting the mason jar (or another container) to see
whether you’ll need an additional row. For this
pattern, we lined up the initial row of knots with the
top of the jar and decided to add an extra row.
Once you are satisfied with the rows of knots, insert
the jar, then collect all strands at the bottom to see
where to position the last knot.
Tie one big knot at the bottom and slip your chain
into the loop on top of the planter. It’s now ready for
hanging!

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Macrame Pom Pom Hanging
Planter

Supplies
Small pot
4-inch macrame hoop
Scissors
Yarn
Macrame cord
Optional:
Pom pom maker
Tape measure

Directions
Cut out 8 pieces from the macrame cord measuring 7
feet in length.
Feed all the macrame cord pieces halfway through
the hoop to align all ends.
Cut out a strand of yarn measuring approximately 24
inches in length. Position one end over the hoop,
then loop the bottom section of the yarn as shown
below:

Tightly wrap your yarn around each strand of the

macrame cord and over the yarn itself but make sure
to leave the loop you created free. Continue
wrapping until the yarn is almost finished or you
have reached your preferred thickness.
Insert the end of yarn left into the loop, then yank
the top strand, pulling the loop up and fastening the
wrap. Clip off the excess yarn.

Group the pieces of macrame cord into 4 sections

Create the first square knot at approximately 8
inches down the length. Use a tape measure or ruler
to ensure all sections are even.
We started from the left for our project, but you can
start from the right if desired. Form the square knot
by crossing the strand on the leftover the 2 strands
in the center and below the right strand.
Lead the strand on the right below the 2 center
strands and up into the loop created by the left
strand as shown below:
Redo the same process for the opposite side to make
1 square knot. Do the exact same thing 5 more times
on all groups of strands, measuring as necessary to
ensure your knots are even.

Separate your strands. Make the next set of knots by

grabbing 2 strands from the left knot and 2 from the
right knot.
Create 5 more square knots at approximately 5
inches down the length of your hanger. Redo the
same process as you did earlier, this time separating
the strands from all groups. To complete all knots,
you have to turn over your work.
Next, create 6 pom poms, trimming the sides as
necessary. Don’t forget to leave 1 long strand for
attaching to the hanger. This pattern made 2 bigger
pom poms and 4 smaller ones.

Wrap 1 pompom around the top of your hanger along

the hoop, then knot it to secure it in place. Fix the 4
smaller pom poms to your first square knot row by
twisting and weaving them around the center
strands.
Position your pot between your second square knot
row to have the knots sitting around the pot. Form
another wrap knot below the pot to hold it in place.
Finish your project by tying a pom pom to the base of
your hanger then even out your strands to be
approximately 6 inches in length. If desired, you can
unravel the ends.
Fill your pot with soil, and the plant, then insert it
back into the hanger. Tightly fix a hook to your
ceiling, then use the hoop to hang your design.

OceanofPDF.com
DIY Modern Macrame Hanging
Planter

Supplies
Pot and plant
scissors
50 feet of 550m parachute cord or paracord
16 wooden beads (20 mm)
Directions
To begin, divide 50 feet of paracord into 4 long
strands. Fold the strands into halves, then tie them
together in 1 big knot, leaving a loop on top - we’ll be
working from the top (the loop above the big knot)
down.
Separate your strands into pairs. Put each pair of
strands through a wooden bead. It is recommended
to work on a table and separate all pairs of strands to
be cross-shaped. Alternatively, you could also hang
your design by the top loop on a curtain rod or hook
and work upright.
Continue threading your cords through the wooden
beads. Each pair of strands should have 4 beads.
At every 27 ½ inches, tie a knot, then repeat each
pair of cords one more time.
From each set, grab the left and right strands, then
tie them into a knot on the left side of the set. Do this
on all 4 sets. Make sure to leave a space of 3 inches
from the previous knot. That is how the netting for
holding the pot is made.
Below is an image of how your design should look
once you have completed this step:

At 4.5 inches from the last row of knots, tie 4 more

knots on each set of cords in the same way as you did
in the previous step.
To form the base of your hanger, gather all 8 strands
and tie them into 1 large knot. Once the knot is in
place, take a match or lighter and melt the ends of all
strands to keep them from fraying. (It’s going to
stink a bit but, it will be totally worth it to secure
your planter.)
OceanofPDF.com
Easy Beaded Macrame Plant Hanger

Supplies
Scissors
2 ½ inch foam ball
3-inch glass votive holder
Beads – White size 5mm, 7mm, 9mm, Natural wood sizes
10 x 9mm, 20mm
Crochet thread
Air plant
Directions
To begin, cut out 8 strands from the crochet thread
to be 36 inches in length. At approximately 9
inches from the end, tie the strands together in
one knot
Group your strands into pairs of 2 then knot each
set at 1 ¼ inches from the first knot. Separate your
strands, then tie each string to the adjacent strand
at 1 inch below the first row of knots, leaving the 2
outer strands free. This will be the basket for your
plant pot or votive.
To keep your string straight, position your foam
ball to rest on the first knot as shown in the image
below:

Next, we’ll start adding the beads to the ends of

your strands. To do this, fold some plant wire in
half over one pair of strings. Slide your bead
through the wire, then use the wire to yank your
string across the bead. Repeat for all the other
strands. Add the beads in your desired sequence.
Here’s how mine looked like:
Gather the top ends, slip a large bead through,
then tie them together into a big knot, leaving a
loop for hanging your planter. You can leave it at
that, or you can add a large bead right below the
knot at the bottom of your hanger.
If desired, you can make the bottom of your
hanger fuller by adding a tassel. To make the
tassel, wrap your crochet thread 10 times around a
piece of cardboard that is 10 inches in length. Pull
the wrapped string from the cardboard and cut 1
end.

Separate the strand ends at the bottom of your

hanger right below the large bead (if you added
one). Double tie the strands around the middle of
the crochet thread you had wrapped on the
cardboard as shown below:
Secure the top of your bundle of strings by tying
another string around it and adding a dot of glue.

Add a small bowl or votive into your hanging

planter, then add your air plant.

OceanofPDF.com
Macrame Jute Rope Plant Hanger

Supplies
Plant
Plant pot
Jute rope
Directions
Cut out 6 equal pieces of jute. You don’t have to
measure; simply note how low you’d like your
plant to hang. For this pattern, every knot took
approximately 4 inches.
Gather all 6 strands of rope and tie them together
with a large knot on one end. If desired, you can
leave a bit of excess to hang below your pot.
Separate your strands into groups of 2, then tie a
knot on all 3 pairs at equal lengths. These knots
 will sit around the lower edge of your plant pot.
Every once in a while, hold your pot up to the
design to ensure your knots are aligned well.
Rework the same procedure, separating the pairs
once more, where this time you will join strands
from the adjacent pair. Tie a knot in all-new pairs.
Check to ensure that this row of knots is
positioned approximately halfway up your pot.

Redo the same process once again: separate the

pairs and join each adjusting strand with a knot. This
row of knots should be positioned around the upper
edge of your pot.
Fill your pot with soil, and the plant, then insert it
into the planter. Adjust your knots as necessary.
Collect each of the 6 strands on top of the plant,
centering them at your preferred height. Tie them
together in a knot.
All that is now left is to hang your design which you
can do by tying one last knot around a rafter or hook,
or you can slip a hook across the top knot and hang it
from there.
OceanofPDF.com
DIY Beaded Macrame Plant Hanger

Supplies
6 chunky wooden beads
Fabric yarn or macrame cord
Scissors
Plant pot
Plant (this pattern used a fishbone cactus)
Tape measure
Tape
Directions
Cut out 3 pieces of yarn that are approximately 75
inches in length. Gather all strands and fold in half.
Secure the middle part of your strings to the table
using a piece of tape. Form a 2-inch loop at the top
by tying an overhand knot with the 2 bundles of
cords.
To make the first row of knots and beads, divide your
strands into pairs of 2 – you’ll have 3 sets.
Thread one bead through all pairs of strands. Secure
the bead with a single knot at approximately eight
inches from the top knot.
Tip: if you find it difficult to squeeze the pairs of
strands through the bead, grab a piece of plant wire
and fold it in half around the top of your set of
strings. Yank the wire across your bead, then use it
to yank the string through the bead.
We’ll now be making the center cross-over section
between our beads - layout your strands in a cross-
over pattern. Grab a strand from the pair on the left
and take it to the center. Grab the 2 strands from the
pair at the center and spread them left and right.
Lastly, grab one strand from the pair on the right
side and lead it to the center. You’ll once more have 3
new sets of strings.
Take the 3 beads left and thread them on all sets of
strings. At approximately 7 inches from the previous
row of beads, tie a knot below your new row of
beads.
Collect all strands and secure them with an overhand
knot at 10 inches from the last set of beads. Yank
tight. Take the tape off your hanger, then trim the
fringe.
Transfer the plant into the pot, then insert the pot
into the hanger. Gently sort the leaves of your plant
between the strands. They should be neatly
balanced. You can also move the bottom row of beads
down or up if necessary.
Secure the hook you’ll be using to hang your planter
and make sure it can comfortably hold the weight of
the plant and pot.

OceanofPDF.com
Macrame Potted Plant Hanger

Supplies
Rope or cord
Plant pot
Plant
Directions
Cut out 10 pieces of rope to your desired length.
Collect each string and tie them together in one knot.
Yank tight. (Pulling one string at a time is better and
easier).
Divide the strands into groups of 2. At a couple of
inches from the large knot, tie one knot in each pair –
any knot will do. For this pattern, we simply repeated
the first step of tying shoelaces 2 times.
To make the second row of knots, grab one strand
from each adjacent pair and tie them together in a
knot. Repeat with each pair of strands until you have
a completed new row. Depending on the size of your
plant pot and how you want your design to look, you
can stop there or continue to tie more knots all
around.
*If your rope frays at the raw edges, just wrap some
washi tape around the tips, right underneath the fray,
then clip off the frayed part with a little bit of tape to
have clean edges.
Attach a hook to your ceiling or wherever you intend
to hang your planter. Wrap your rope around the
hook, then fasten with a secure knot. Ensure that the
hook is well fixed and it can hold the weight of your
potted plant.

OceanofPDF.com
10 Minute Macrame Plant Hanger
DIY

Supplies
3-5 mm cotton cord
*To make a plant hanger that can fit a pot size of 15 to 20
cm, cut out the following lengths of cord:
1 cord measuring 60cm
6 cords measuring 200cm
Directions
Gather each of the 200cm strings and fold them at
the center. Tie the strands together using an
overhand knot at 10cm from the middle.
Separate the longer end of your cords into groups of
2. Use each pair to form a braid of 3 plie
approximately 15cm long.
Once you are through with the braid, unfasten the
overhand knot you had made. The section that is
folded will be your hanger’s handle, so ensure it
remains folded.
Create a square knot with the far left and far right
string pairs as your working cord.
Divide your upper cords into groups of 4 strings.
Ensure you pair 2 strands of working cords from the
last square knot with the 2 cords below it. Create a
square knot using the first section of 4 cords. Redo
the same using the 2 groups if 4 cords are left.
Create an alternating square knot between the last
square knots at 20 to 25cm from the last row of
square knots. You will use 2 strings from each square
knot. Redo the same thing 2 more times with the
strands left.
Form another alternating square knot at
approximately 8 to 10cm from the square knots in
the previous step. You will also use 2 strings from
each square knot as you had done in step 6. Redo the
same process with the 2 sides left.
Collect all strands together. Use the 60cm cord to tie
a gathering knot at approximately 10cm underneath
the previous square knot row. Form a loop on one
end of the 60cm strand, then thread it through the
gathered strands.
Wrap the long end of the cord a couple of times
around your bunched cords. Slip the long end
remaining through the loop created at the start of
the project. Tighten the knot by yanking on the
shorter end at the top.
Trim off the extra string from your gathering knot
and the bottom fringe.

OceanofPDF.com
Quick and Easy Hanging Macrame
Planter

Supplies
6-inch ceramic planter
1 ¼ inch key ring or metal ring
10 yards of paracord, twine or cording
Directions
Cut out 4 cording strings, 90 inches in length, and
put them together. Insert your bundle of strings
through the ring halfway through and secure their
middle section to the ring using a knot. Pull the
strands tight, evening them out as necessary.
Divide your cord into pairs of 2 strings – you’ll have 4
pairs. At around 8 inches from the knot at the top, tie
an overhand knot on all 4 pairs. To avoid your knots
 ending up with uneven lengths between them, ensure
to yank your string tight.
Separate the cords from each pair. At around 3-4
inches from the previous row of knots, join a strand
from one pair to another strand from the adjacent
pair using an overhand knot. Ensure your knots are
positioned at an even length.
Collect all strands and tie them together using one
big overhand knot. Ensure the knot is tight and
secure as it will support the weight of your plant.
According to how you prefer your design, clip the
tails as necessary.
Place the potted plant into the hanger, then fix a
hook into your ceiling if it is capable of comfortably
holding the weight of your plant. To keep the hook
from pulling out of the ceiling, first secure it into an
anchor or stud. Slip the top ring into the hook to
hang your work.
*Ensure the place you choose to hang your planter gets
plenty of light.

OceanofPDF.com
Simple Modern Macrame Plant
hanger

Supplies
Indoor plant or succulent
A small pot
Assorted beads
3M hook (or something else for hanging your design while
working – a photo frame hook works just fine)
Measuring tape or ruler
Scissors
1 keyring ring or another type of ring of the same diameter
as 20 cents
1 crochet cotton ball in your preferred color
Directions
From the ball of crochet cotton, cut out 4 strands
measuring 1.5 meters. Redo 3 more times to have 4
sections of 4 strings each.
Collect all strings together and thread them halfway
through the ring. At around 1 inch from your ring,
create one big knot.
Divide your strands into groups of 4 strands each. At
around 1 ½ inch from the main knot, use one section
of strands to tie a knot.
Rework the same process until you have 8 knotted
groups of 4 strings each.
Split the strands from one group of 4 strands to have
2 pairs of 2 strings right below the knot.
Rework the step above with the second section of 4
strands to have 4 sections of 2 strands.
Grab 2 strings from one pair and 2 strings from the
adjacent pair, then join them together in a knot at
around 1 inch from the previous row of knots. You
will have a new section of 4.
Rework steps 5 through 7 to have a total of 7 knots.
You will be left with 2 different sections of 2 strings
at both ends. At around 1 inch below the last group
of 4, knot the 2 outer pairs of strands together.
Rework the process of splitting sections of 4 into 2
then tying them together with a pair of 2 from the
adjacent knot at around 1 inch below the last row of
knot. Redo until you have created a fresh set of
groups of 4.
Collect all your strings and tie them together in a
large knot at around 2 ½ inches from the final knot
you created.
Feed your assortment of beads through the loose
strings hanging underneath the big knot. Position the
beads at different lengths securing each using a
knot.
Transfer your small indoor plant or succulents to a
pot, then insert the pot into the hanger you have just
completed.
Adjust your strings and knots to sit evenly. Secure a
hook where you want to place your planter, then
hang your design.

OceanofPDF.com
How To Make A Macrame Terrarium
Plant Hanger

Supplies
Succulent friendly potting soil
Small rocks
Moss
Assorted succulents
10-inch glass terrarium bowl
4mm of twisted cotton macrame rope: 7 strands measuring
1.5 feet and 1 strand measuring 20 feet
Directions
Align the midpoint of all your cords (even the 20 feet
piece). To make it easier, you can mark it using a pen
Grab the long cord and begin wrapping it around the
middle, moving towards the right; Using your left
hand to hold the center, wrap it 15 times.
Create a temporary knot to hold together the right
side of your cord in place when you finish tying the
15 wraps.
Return to the middle to wrap the other end of your
long cord 15 more times around the shorter sides,
moving towards the left. You’ll now have a total of 30
wraps. Create another temporary knot to hold the
left side in place.
To tie a wrapping knot, hang the loop of wraps on a
hook, unfasten the temporary knots then connect the
loop with a wrapping knot as shown below:

To make the arms of your planter, grab 4 strands and

use them to tie 13 half square knots (spiral knots).
Finish with one square knot. Rework the same
procedure to make 3 more arms.
At approximately 2 ½ inches from your spiral knots,
create 3 square knots. Redo for all other arms
ensuring to keep them at equal lengths.
At approximately 2.5 inches from your last row of
square knots, create 13 more half-square knots
(spiral knots). Finish by tying a square knot. Rework
for the other 3 arms.
To connect the arms, leave a distance of
approximately 6 ½ inches from your spiral knots, use
2 strands from one arm and 2 more from the
adjacent arm to tie 3 square knots. Rework the same
procedure thrice to connect all arms.
Leave another 4 inches and join your strands
together once more by tying 3 square knots. Rework
the same process 3 times more.
Finish your hanger by tying a wrapping knot at
approximately 5 inches from the last square knot
row.
Insert your glass bowls carefully into the hanger and
adjust your knots as necessary. Put your terrarium
together and hang.

OceanofPDF.com
 CONCLUSION
Now you know countless ways of making beautiful
macramé pieces without spending a fortune and too much
time. All you need to do now is to start taking action. Start
by preparing any of these patterns (the one you feel most
drawn to) and work from there – you will soon find yourself
completing the projects that seemed to require advanced
skills!

OceanofPDF.com
 Macramé Wall Hanging
Patterns
20 Ideas for Beginners with HD
Illustrations to Create Wall
Hanging Models to Decorate Your
Home & Garden
(Basic Knots and Tutorials
Included)

Catherine Ludemberg
OceanofPDF.com
Introduction
Do you want to learn how to create beautiful macramé wall
hangings that stand out?
Or perhaps even though you want to learn, you are
curious about how difficult it is to create macramé
knots?
And are you looking for a book that will teach you
everything you need to know about macramé?
Well, if this is you:
You Are About To Discover How To Design Macramé
Wall Hanging Patterns Through Basic Knots Along
With Illustrations On How To Create Wall Hanging
Models To Decorate Your Home & Garden
This book is here to take all the mystery out of the
macramé process. Anyone can do this! Yes, I know you’ve
got doubts, but that’s why this book is here.
By the time you complete reading this book, you’ll
have:
Basic knowledge of what macramé is all about
Learned how to make simple knots within the
shortest time possible!
The know-how to choose the best ropes and other
supplies for completely unique designs
Be able to design beautiful and affordable DIY
macramé wall hangings for your decor or commercial
purposes
Even if you’ve never considered yourself a craftsman or
woman, this book will turn you into a great macramé
designer without trying too hard!
Let’s get started:

OceanofPDF.com
 Section 1
A Basic Introduction to
Macramé For Beginners

OceanofPDF.com
Macramé is a technique of creating knots to create
beautiful decorative pieces. These knots are mostly hand-
crafted, and the craft usually involves very few tools, just
the cord and mounting ring with which to secure the design
in place.
From where did this knot-making craft technique originate?

The Origin of Macramé

The prevailing consensus is that macramé styling
originated from the Arabic word ‘migramah,’ which loosely
translates to ‘fringe.’ In the 13th century, Arab weavers
used macramé knots to make decorative fringes,
particularly on veils and shawls.
That said:
Many people also believe that the Chinese invented the
decorative knot-tying technique to make their ceremonial
garments, lanterns, and wall hangings. Chinese textiles
from back then usually had several knots—for instance, the
pan.
During the 13th century, Arabic designs spread to Europe,
which ultimately became a preferable crafting technique
for sailors. The sailors used Macramé aboard their ships for
decoration and barter trade involving knotted products
such as hats, belts, and hammocks.
The knot-tying design became a popular hobby for adorning
textiles throughout the Victorian era, but it only achieved
global recognition in the 70s.’
Let us now learn how to get started:
Getting Started In Using Macramé
For Your Designs
Let us start with what you will need to get started:

Required Tools and Materials For Macramé Designs

Here are some of the most commonly used tools and
materials for wall hanging macramé:
Macramé cord or rope
Metal or wood dowel
Tape measure
Scissors painters tape
Masking tape or painters tape
Let’s discuss a few of these materials and supplies in detail:
Dowels
You need this for attaching your macramé cords. You can
have a dowel made from driftwood, a wooden branch, or
just a plain stick you bought from the DIY store—or made
yourself.

Ropes or Cords
The most recommended cord is the three-strand rope that
perfectly holds most knot shapes. The three-strand rope is
also stiffer and quite tough, thus ensuring that designs can
hold their shape well.

You can also consider the single-strand cord but only

when incorporating a lot of fringe in your macramé
hanging. However, the single strand cord doesn’t hold knot
shapes that well —at least not compared to the 3-ply— but
it produces a class of unique designs based on the look you
want to achieve with your design.
If you love colored knotting cords, try eco-friendly Bobbiny
recycled Macramé cords that yield stunning and unique
designs. If you need larger macramé hangings, try the 3-Ply
ropes instead. Ensure you tape the end of the 3-Ply cords to
keep them from unraveling.

Macramé Board
A macramé board is a secure place where you set your
project for knotting. You can make a macramé board from
various materials such as corkboard, two pieces of
cardboard joined together, or a piece of polyurethane. The
rule of the thumb is to get a secure surface that allows you
to insert pins into it effortlessly.
Try making the macramé board around 1-feet, 12 inches
square, and thick enough to accommodate insertion of a
corsage pin or T pin without the pin sticking out the other
side.
Besides choosing your ropes and dowels, you’ll also need to
know the special terms used in macramé making, such as:
Knotting cords and Knot-bearing cords:
These two cord types refer to the set of ropes or cords you
will use when making whichever stitch you want.

The knot-bearing cords are a set of cords where you

wrap the knotting cords around. The knot-bearing and
knotting cord might change in different steps of your
project, but the pattern will reflect this.
Sennit:
This is a set of a particular stitch worked in repeat. For
instance, if you’re to work 6 half knot stitches back to back
in a row, you’ll be said to create a sennit of 6 half knots.

OceanofPDF.com
How To Start a Macramé Wall
Hanging
The initial step is to decide what to use for your macramé
hanging, whether it’s a piece of driftwood, a pipe, or a
dowel.
If using dowels, try buying those of different lengths and
diameters from whichever type of wood and color you want.
For round wall macramé hangings, select a metal ring from
the different available sizes of metal bases.
After choosing your preferred base, you will proceed to
attach your macramé cords using commonly used knotting
cords.
Now that we’re talking about knots, macramé stitching has
some commonly used knots you should know:

Basic Knots To Master

The most commonly used macramé knots are:
Lark’s head knot
The most common use of this knot is to attach your
knotting cord to a ring or dowel. Here are the steps to
follow when making the Lark’s Head Knot:
Begin by folding your knotting cord in half to make a
loop.
Then put the folded macramé cord on a working
surface. Ensure your loop points downwards while
the ends of the macramé cord point up.
Now put your ring or dowel on top of the folded
macramé cord above your loop.
Start pulling the loop over the ring or dowel and then
pull the macramé cord ends through the loop.
Finally, pull down to make the knot tighter.
Reverse Lark’s head knot
Also called the Cow Hitch Knot, the Reverse Lark’s Head
knot is the same as making the Lark’s Head knot but on
reverse. Here’s how to go about it:
Start by folding the knotting cord in half, then put
the folded macramé cord on a working surface.
Position the ends of the macramé cord pointing down
and the loop pointing up.
Then put your ring or dowel on top of the folded
macramé cord just slightly above your loop.
Now start pulling the loop down over your ring or
dowel
Next, pull the ends of the macramé cord up and
down through the loop and tighten it by pulling
down.
Half Knot
These knots are used to make sinnet, described as a
column of two or even more half-square or square knots. A
sennit of half knots produces a natural spiral required in
plant hanger DIY projects, as shown in the diagram below:

To make this knot, you’ll need to work with four macramé

cords: the first two outer cords being the knotting cords,
whereas the other two will be the knot-bearing macramé
cords.
Here’s how to make the knot:
Begin by bringing the knotting cord on the left side
over the two other cords and now beneath the
knotting cord on the right.
Then bring the knotting cord on the right to the left
side just beneath the two other cords and over the
knotting code on the left.
 To secure the knot, just pull the knotting cords quite
firmly.
Square Knot

This knot is described as the completion of the Half Knot in

that the initial steps resemble those of the Half Knot.
However, you have to work a second Half Knot with the
opposite knotting cords to finish the knot.
Here’s how to go about it:
Do steps 1 and 2 in the previous Half Knot.
Continue by bringing the knotting cord from the
right side to the left one over the knot-bearing cords,
and below the knotting cord on the left.
Now bring the knotting cord from the left to the
right, just beneath the knot-bearing cords and over
the knotting cord on the right.
To secure the knot, pull the knot-bearing cords together.

Half and Double Half Hitch Knots

You can work these knots in various designs, whether
diagonally, vertically, or horizontally, and with various knot-
bearing and knotting cords.
You can also work them from right to left or left to right,
making them the most versatile knot in macramé making. A
double half is just two progressive half hitch knots. In other
words, you work the knotting steps twice, one after the
other.

Here are steps to follow when tying a Double Half Hitch

Knot at a diagonal and around a hoop.
Put the cord hanging at the backside of your hoop.
Grab the end of the cording and then start pulling it
towards you.
Loop the cord over the hoop and then pull it to the
left side
Repeat the last two steps, but now pull the end of
your cord up through your hoop.
Now tighten the knot.
Once done knotting your macramé wall hanging, it’s time
to hang them on your wall. There are a few ideas for that!

How To Hang a Large Macramé Wall

Design
When you want to hang a large macramé wall design, try
using a hanging rope on both ends of your driftwood dowel
through a suitable knot, and then use a nail to support the
design on the wall.
You can also use 2-3 long nails on your wall while sticking
out a few inches, then rest your macramé wall hanging
across the nails until almost fully hidden. However, you
might need to use a level to ensure that the nails are quite
nice and straight. Be aware that some types of walls may
also demand the use of screws and drywall anchors
instead.
If hanging your design in the workplace, consider buying a
rolling clothing rack or using a ring hung or dowel. Try
hanging the macramé design from a secure piece of wall or
furniture.
In addition, you can also get a suction cup or use an over-
the-door wreath hanger.
With that basic knowledge, let’s add some Boho Spirit with
these 20 ideas on creating wall hanging models to decorate
your home & garden:

OceanofPDF.com
 Section 2
20 DIY Macramé Wall
Hanging Projects
(With HD Illustrations to
Create Wall Hanging Models
to Decorate Your Home &
Garden)

OceanofPDF.com
1: DIY Macramé Wall Hanging (#1)

Tools and supplies

Glue gun
Scissors
Cardboard
12-inch Long brass pipe
6mm cord, yarn color choice
Instructions
Begin by cutting your cardboard to the required
length of macramé wall hanging.
Then loosely wrap your yarn color choice around the
cardboard six times. Once done, cut all the loops
simultaneously at the end of your cardboard.

Repeat the above step with extra colors, or instead,

double or triple the total number of times you wrap
around your cardboard if using only one or two
colors. You should have a total of 18 pieces of
differently colored yarn.

Now fold one piece of yarn or cord in half to make a

loop. Now wrap the yarn around your brass pipe and
pull the two ends of the cord through the loop.
Ensure to make a tight knot.
Repeat the step with the rest of the yarn cords as you
alternate the colors to create a unique design.

After tying all the yarn pieces around the pipe, cut
another piece of yarn to hang the brass pipe,
depending on how long you want the pipe to hang.
At this point, tie one end of the knotting cord yarn
around individual ends of the pipe and secure the
yarn with hot glue. Check if you have all the pieces of
the frayed edges of the yarn properly glued down.
Now you can hang your well-crafted macramé wall
hanging!

OceanofPDF.com
2: DIY Macramé Wall Hanging (#2)

Tools and supplies

Large wooden beads
Acrylic paint
Painters tape
Scissors
Paintbrush
Wooden dowel
70 yards of rope (approx 63m)
Instructions
Begin by attaching a dowel to your wall, with easy-to-
remove command hooks.
Then cut the knotting cord or rope to approx 12-foot
pieces. Tie the rope through the lark head knots, and
tie again through the half hitch knot across the
design.

At this point, tie double half hitch knots in a diagonal

direction along all your rope pieces. Attach some
wooden beads at various strategic locations and then
tie the knot fully.
Now tie some switch knots with about 4 ropes pieces
each.

Complete the design with double hitch knots and

finally bring those knots along diagonally.
Use the scissors to trim any unnecessary ends of
rope pieces. Ensure you’ve fully tightened the roped
before hanging the macramé design.

OceanofPDF.com
3: DIY Macramé Wall Hanging (#3)

Tools and supplies

Tape
Measuring stick
Wood beads
Drill
Jute
27″ wide driftwood or stick
2 rolls of yarn

Instructions
Start by drilling 2 holes in your wood rod —for
hanging at any end.
Then cut your yard cord based on the size of your
rod.
Now loop the yarn all over the wood rod, then pull
the yarn through to get around 1.5 inches of wood
display on each side. You might have to drill larger
holes.

To make the hanger, obtain your jute and tie knots at

each end.
At this point, trim down your pieces of yarn. You just
need to trim the yarn a few pieces at a time to make
an uneven bottom. The macramé wall hanging should
be about 33 inches.

OceanofPDF.com
4: DIY Macramé Wall Hanging (#4)

Tools and supplies

Scissors
Dark Walnut stain
Dowel
Cut end cotton mop refill
Maximizer cotton mop refill
Instructions
Begin by cutting your dowel to 15 inches lower
wooden piece and 15 inches for the top wooden
piece.

Stain them using the dark walnut wood stain, then

open the cotton mop refill and cut its ends off. Cut a
little chunk of this for your project.
Slip your dowel through your mop refill, just on the
top hooks. Get duck tape and secure your dowel to a
flat surface to keep it from moving as you work.

Now separate the yarn pieces into fours and then

make a knot with two yarn pieces. Begin making the
knots.
Make tying knots for the first row and the same
knots for the second and third knots.
Open the next bag of the mop refill. Then pull out
two yarn pieces from the bunch and create a hanger
for your wall hanging.
Finally, pull the whole piece of mop refill through the
center of your macramé wall design.

OceanofPDF.com
5: DIY Mini Macramé Wall Hanging
(#5)

Tools and supplies

7 pieces of 4-foot long cord
Scissors
Wire brush
Instructions
Begin by cutting 7 equal pieces of cording, each
measuring 4 feet long.
Then use Lark’s Head knots to add the cording to the
rings.
Make a series of diagonal half hitch knots from the
two center cords. Ensure the first cord goes to the
left side while the next knot to the right side.
Repeat the previous step to make another row of
double half hitch knots. Continue from where you left
off with another series of knots, but do diagonal half
hitch knots this time. Your knots should go towards
the center.
Repeat step 4 to make another row using the
diagonal half hitch knots.
Complete your macramé design by fringing the
hanging cords slightly using your wire brush.

Evenly cut your fringe cording to make the bottom

neat. Begin making the square knot pattern.
Just cut 4 to 6 pieces of cording to approximately 4
feet long. Make a series of square knots in an
alternating manner.
Make as many rows of knots as possible. Then use
your wire brush to make a fringe —you could also
make a row of half hitch knots.

OceanofPDF.com
6: Home Woven Wall Hanging in 5
Minutes

Tools and supplies

Dowel rod
Brass hanging piece
Yarn or twine
Stitch witchery OR and thread and a needle
2×3 woven rug
Iron, optional
Instructions
Cut a dowel rod down to the required size. Ensure
the dowel is a few inches longer than your weaving
width on all sides, a minimum of 12 inches.
Flip your rug over the side placed on the ground, and
put a dowel rod on where it should end up. Add a
strip of stitches below the dowel rod.
Place your iron in a furnace and fold over the top flap
of your rug. Begin stitching the witchery as per the
instructions; just run the hot iron over the top of the
rug until the two pieces bond together. If the rug is
extra thick, use a thread and needle instead.
Now tie a yarn piece to each side of your dowel rod
and triple or double knot on each side of the rod.
Cut off excess yarn or add a brass piece to each
macramé design. You’ll need to weave through a hole
in the brass with another piece of yarn and a
weaving opening in the rug. Try using double or
triple knots.

OceanofPDF.com
7: Macramé Fiber Wall Art

Tools and supplies

Wire
Wooden beads
String/yarn
D-ring
Metal hoop
Instructions
Attach the D-ring to the top of the hoop using the
wire. Tightly wrap the wire around the hoop and D-
ring several times and secure by tucking behind.
Then cut about 11 equal lengths of yarn and make a
loop around your D-ring. Try using a little glue on the
back to keep the string from moving.
Start adding the beads. Just slide them over the two
middle strings and tie a knot below them.

At this point, cut off the ends to create a design. You

can make a loop of string around the top section and
make a knot for hanging on the wall.

OceanofPDF.com
8: Macramé Wall Hanging in 20
Minutes

Tools and supplies

Eight 33-35 inches long strands of macramé cord
18 inches hanging strand of cord
5-8 inches wide driftwood, wood dowel, or stick
Wood bead, optional
Yarn needle, optional
Comb to brush fringe
Instructions
Start by cutting off 18 inches of the hanging cord and
8 strands of the macramé cord, each measuring 33-
35 inches long.
Using the larks head knot, tie the 8 strands of cord
around the wooden piece and then fold your cord in
half. Grab the loop over the top of the piece of wood
and insert your fingers into the loop.
Pull the two strands of cord through and repeat this
process for the entire bunch of 8 strands.
Make 4 square knots beginning with the 4 right or
left strands. Leave the two left strands on the left in
the next row and then create 3 square knots,
followed by 2 knots and then one square knot.

Then grab the strand on the lead cord on the far

right side and make a half hitch knot that goes
diagonally to the middle.
Make one row comprising of half hitch knots from
right to the center.
Make another row of half hitch knots starting from
the left to the center. Repeat the step another time.

Pick the 4 pieces of lead cords and secure them

using a square knot. Cut and comb fringe and now
attach a wood bead if you like.
OceanofPDF.com
9: DIY Macramé Wall Hanging (#6)

Tools and supplies

Scissors
Macramé cord
Wooden dowel
Glue

Instructions
Make the string you’ll use to hang the macramé
design. Just cut approximately 1 to 2 inches of cord
and tie it around both dowels’ ends. Secure the rope
using some glue.
Then tie a long thread of about 1 meter to the dowel.
Cut a few 16cm long pieces of threads depending on
your preferred color.
Tie the multicolored threads to the main long thread
using a single knot. Repeat the step for about 40
rows or so.
Use a comb to tease the fibers of the feather to help
them unravel. Then use the scissors to trim the
threads into the shape of a feather.
At this point, loosen the main thread from your
dowel, attach a bead on top of the feather’s shape,
and secure with glue.
Secure the main thread with the macramé feather
design using the Larks Head Knot.

Create a few other macramé features and fix them on

the dowel to create an aesthetic look.

OceanofPDF.com
10: Macramé Christmas Wreath

Tools and supplies

Fresh Greenery
Hot Glue Gun
Scissors
Macramé Cotton cords
Driftwood
Instructions
Get some scrap cords or yarn and driftwood pieces.
Then shape out a tree from the driftwood and tie the
corners with the cord, ensuring the cord touches all
the corners.

Add enough macramé cords to create an attractive

pattern. Use a few basic macramé knots to continue
your pattern.
Then pull the unnecessary cords below the
driftwood, and secure with some hot glue.
OceanofPDF.com
11: DIY Ring Wall Hanging

Tools and supplies

Yarn or Macramé String
2 gold rings, 8 inch and 6 inch
Scissors
Glue, optional

Instructions
Get a string or yarn, and then double it over to form
a loop. Now run the yarn under the two rings to the
back of the golden rings.

Then make a Lark’s Knot with the yarn or string to

tie the two golden rings. Wrap the yarn or string
around both sides and secure the yarn with a knot.

Double the yarn yet again and make another loop.

Then make about 12 Lark’s Knots or as needed.
As you make the knots, pull them tightly to ensure
they sit securely on the gold ring.
Cut off the yarn or string ends with your scissors.

OceanofPDF.com
12: DIY Yarn Wall Hanging

Tools and supplies

Different types and colors of yarn
12” brass hoop
5” brass hoop
Scissors
String

Instructions
Cut 8 strands of preferred yarn, each approximately
10 inches long.
Add the yarn pieces onto the bass hoop using the
Lark’s Knot, then trim the bottom.

Cut approximately 25-30 yarn strands, each

measuring 35 inches each, then attach each string
piece to the hop through the Larks knot. Choose to
either place colors randomly or as a pattern.

Pick the smallest hoop and carefully tie it inside the

large hoop. Grab the string and wrap it 6-8 times on
top of the two brass hoops to secure.
Finish with a double or triple knot.

OceanofPDF.com
13: Yarn Leftovers Wall Hanging

Tools and supplies

One or more colored yarn
Knitting needle or stick
Instructions
Begin by cutting your yarn to a uniform length
depending on the knitting needle or stick length.
Fix the yarn onto the stick through lark’s head knot
and repeat this step until you have most parts of the
stick covered. Leave a 1-inch allowance on both sides
of the string with which you’ll hang the wall design.
At this point, tie other strings at each end of the
stick, probably through a loop. Hang it!

OceanofPDF.com
14: Copper Wool Roving Macramé
Wall Hanging

Tools and supplies

Nine 1-inch x 1/2 inch Copper Pipe Couplings
Sharp Sewing Scissors
Jute Twine or Cotton Crochet Thread
36 inches x 1 inch Wood Dowel, cut to 29 inches
1.1 lbs Merino Wool 40 mm, 33yds Per Ball
Floral Wire
Instructions
Cut 7 strips of wool roving strips, each measuring 6
feet.

Then tie the wool roving strips around the wooden

dowel through the Lark’s Head Knots.
Evenly distribute the Lark’s Head Knots and adjust
them to uniform size. Cut some floral wire to 8 inches
to help with attaching copper beads.

Now fold the floral wire in half and attach it to the

end of both sections.
Pull the ends of your floral wire through the beads
until the two ends go through the copper beads.
Then pull the copper bead up the wool roving and
position it inches away from the top knot.
Add a copper bead to just one strand on the ends.
The center strands should go into the beads about
two at a go. Repeat the adding bead step across the
eight strands.

At about 5 inches below the beads, make a square

knot into both strands positioned side by side.
At this point, fold the ends of the strands over twice
and then pull them until snug. Do the knotting
processes until you cover all the strands. Ensure you
evenly place or space all the knots and beads.
Next, pull the two strands from the second knot on
the two sides and pull the strands through a copper
bead.
Finally, fluff up individual strands and trim their ends
nicely. Attach a cotton crotchet thread on both sides
of your dowel for hanging.

OceanofPDF.com
15: Yarn Wall Hanging

Tools and supplies

4-foot wood dowel 1/2″ diameter
1 ball of beige yarn
1 ball of colored yarn
Wood beads, optional
Scissors
Measuring Tape
Miter saw, or hand saw
Instructions
Cut your dowel to approximately 20 inches with a
saw, then use your scissors to cut your beige yarn to
about 28 inches.
Fix the yarn to individual ends of your wooden dowel
using applicable knots.

Now hook the dowel and the yarn onto a nail— you
could also hook them to a wall.
Cut 15 pieces of colored yarn, each 56 inches long.
Then pick three pieces of the yarn and loop them at
the center onto the center of the wooden dowel. Tuck
the 3 pieces of yarn into the loop to make a Lark’s
Head Knot.

Repeat step 5 until you obtain about 5 bunches from

the 15 colored yarn pieces attached to the wooden
dowel through a Lark’s Head Knot.
Now cut 18 pieces of the beige yarn with scissors,
each measuring 48 inches.
Grab 3 beige yarn pieces right at the center and start
looping them onto the dowel just adjacent to the
colored yarn.
Repeat the previous step and put the beige yarn over
the opposite side of the colored pieces of yarn.

Add more beige yarn on both sides of the colored

yarn until you get 3 bunches of the beige-colored
yarn on each side.

OceanofPDF.com
16: DIY Yarn Wall Hanging in 30
Minutes

Tools and supplies

10-inch pieces of driftwood
Self-striping yarn
A big book
A needle
Scissors
Instructions
Cut 140 strands of yarn, each measuring 28 inches,
enough for four wall hangings.
Grab 4 yarn strands and fold them in half to create a
loop. Put the created loop under the driftwood.
Pull the ends of the 4 yarn pieces through the loop as
you go around the driftwood.
Grab another set of strands of yarn and tie them
around the driftwood. Do this repeatedly 5 to 10
times until you’re about to finish your wall hanging.
If you want to add some texture, add a few strands of
yarn and make a simple macramé knot. Try making
the knots as a ‘V’ shape.

OceanofPDF.com
17: DIY Macramé Plant Hanger

Tools and supplies

Hanging hoop
Ceiling hook
5 150” strands of string/yarn
Masking tape
Measuring tape
Scissors
Instructions
Begin by cutting 5 strands of strings measuring 150
inches long.
Now pick all your strands, align them, and insert a
hoop onto the strings until it touches at the middle.
Make a big knot.
Grab a tape and tape your hoop to a tabletop to
secure. Check if you have 1 string to work with.
Organize the strings into 5 pairs.

Begin knotting individual pairs right from 20 inches

down from the topmost knot.

Pair individual string with the adjacent string and

make more knots.
If you want your wall planter hanger to support a
large or tall planter, you may make another set of
knots, approximately 4 inches down from the last
knots. Otherwise, skip this step.

Now make a large knot with all the strands

approximately 2 inches down your last knot series.
You can now hang the wall plant hanger and
carefully attach your planter.

OceanofPDF.com
18: DIY Macramé Wall Hanging (#7)

Tools and supplies

3-4′ wooden dowel
400 feet of thin rope
Tape
Fiskars Original Orange-handled Scissors
Instructions
Start by cutting your rope approximately 1 to 2
inches longer than your dowel, and then knot the
rope at each end. You’ll use this string to hang the
design.
Cut 24 pieces of the rope, each 120 inches long, or
based on your overall size of the macramé design.

Now tie about 24 Lark’s Head Knots across the

entire wood dowel. Then, tie 12 square knots across
the first row. Begin the knots on one end of your
design and continue working across horizontally.
Skip the first two strands and the second row and
begin making 11 square knots from the third strand.
Continue knotting down until you obtain a square
knot at the center to create a “V” or triangle shape.

As soon as you have tied all rows with square knots,

start making a set of diagonal double half hitch knots
right from the right and left sides of your V or
triangle shape.
By now, the knots should make a border, and you can
trim out the V or triangle shape from your design.
Check if you have any excess rope to make a fringe
look at the bottom of the design.
At this point, tie another square knot at the bottom of
the V shape to secure and join the double half hitch
knots. To add more detail, grab four strands of the
fringe in random areas and tie additional square
knots.
Using your scissors and tape as your guide,
diagonally trim the fringe to the preferred length.

OceanofPDF.com
19: DIY Modern Yarn Hanging

Tools and supplies

Yarn
7.25″ round wood dowel
1.5″ and 3″ gold rings
14″ cardboard
Krazy glue
Scissors
Instructions
Cut some yarn, fold it in half, then fix it through the
1½ inch gold ring.
Grab the loose ends of the strings and pull them
through the piece of yarn loop. Pull the string down
and keep it loose: a lark’s head knot.

Now double knot the loose yarn ends to each wood

dowel, and add a dab of glue to secure the knots. Cut
down any excess yarn.
Grab a second folded yarn knotted on the other end,
then tie a lark’s head knot around the 3 inches ring.
Pull the knot tight.
Pull the yarn through the first knot, then tie a lark’s
head knot around this knot.
Pull it tight, reinforce with glue, and cut any
unneeded yarn. Pull the first knot tight to reinforce
the yarn on the ring.

Cut a cardboard piece with a hacksaw approximately

14 inches long from a box. Use the cardboard to
wrap your yarn about ten times.
If your yarn produces a half-folded cord or yarn
bundle, cut down one end.

Make a big lark’s head knot around your dowel to

create 6 lark’s head knots across the entire dowel,
and pull each knot very tight.

OceanofPDF.com
20: DIY Modern Macramé Wall
Hanging

Tools and supplies

I ball Moda Vera Jester Yarn (cream)
35mm diameter Dowel cut to 60cm
50m x 6mm macramé cord
Scissors
Instructions
First cut 11 stands of macramé cord, each measuring
4.5 meters. Put the dowel somewhere accessible—
perhaps between a stool and bookshelf.
Fold individual lengths of the macramé cord in half,
and add it to the dowel through a half hitch knot.
Continue with the folding process until you attach all
11 cords.
Now tie a horizontal half hitch knot across the top of
the cords, and close your dowel.
Add extra texture to give it an organic look through a
double half hitch. Create a series of Larks Head
knots with the Jester wool.

Then cut 3 pieces that measure 12cm each, and

double over. Slide your loop around the macramé
cords and pull the cord tails through the loop.
Continue the process until you obtain your pattern of
choice. Cut the hanging cords at a diagonal.
Finally, cut 3 lengths of the wool and make a double
knot to secure each end. Tie the wool on both sides
of your dowel before hanging.

OceanofPDF.com
Conclusion
As you have seen, making art pieces using macramé knots
has never been easier! Go out, buy the required supplies,
and begin practicing until you master this beautiful knot-
tying crafting technique!

OceanofPDF.com
 Macramè Patterns
The Newest Book for Beginners and
Advanced, with 40 Gorgeous Macramè
Projects and Ideas Illustrated to Create
Your Unique Handmade, Knots, and
Modern Decoration for Home & Garden

OceanofPDF.com
Introduction
If you are looking to make different macramé patterns and
knots that you can use to create and design your own
macramé tapestries, for practical use or even to apply to
your furniture for a classy, out of this world appearance,
you are at the right place.
And if you wish to make a special perfect gift for a friend or
loved one and are short of ideas but are looking for
something that will not only wow them but ooze elegance
and practicality, keep reading…
You've probably seen on social media (Facebook, YouTube,
Pinterest, and Instagram perhaps) or in different homes or
shops, knotted patterns that cascade down in a swath of
nubby texture. Perhaps you’ve been curious to know what it
is all about and discovered all that is all because of the lost
art of macramé, which is making a strong comeback.
Yes, Macramé was widely spread from North Africa to
Europe then to Spain around the 15th and 16th centuries.
Unfortunately, macramé suddenly died down in the 20th
century until its resurgence in the 70s. And thanks to social
media, macramé is now fully back with a bang!
Now it is a must-have for any boho or contemporary space.
Macramé is not only a break from the monotonous posters,
but it also adds a delicious texture to a place.
And this book is about to teach you what macramé is all
about and how you can create your very own pieces that
will inspire and wow you every time you look at them.
The book covers:
 The basics of macramé, including what it is all about,
how it has evolved over the years
Why it is worth learning macramé, even if you don’t
consider yourself the creative type but love beautiful
things
Important knots that will help you get started in the
macramé without feeling lost whenever you
encounter different patterns
The lingo used in macramé that you need to be
aware of as you get started
Breathtaking projects that will help you get started
And much more!
So whether you wish to create out of this world pieces for
your own use or wish to gift someone the pieces, you can
bet that there is something for every manner of purpose in
this book!
Let’s begin!

OceanofPDF.com
Chapter 1: What is Macrame and
What is its Origin
Macramé is a kind of textile made using multiple knots.
With macramé, you can complete a project by simply using
your hands and a mounting ring to hold your piece steady
as you work.
So how did macramé come about?

History of Macrame
Recently, there has been a craze for macramé; however,
this is not its first appearance. Aacramé was first adapted
by the Arabic countries around the 13th century. Weavers
from this area used different types of knotting techniques
to create rugs and shawls. Further, creating decorative
pieces like wall hangings using knots can also be traced
back to third-century China.
Thanks to the Arabic artisans, macramé spread through
Europe. The practice had spread as far as England by the
late seventeenth century, where Queen Mary II, ladies in
waiting adapted the craft.
The beauty of macramé was that it was not practiced by
women only; sailors knotted as well for practical reasons.
However, when they embarked on drawn-out voyages,
knotting worked as a method of warding off boredom and
staying engaged, which ultimately aided in spreading the
art all through Europe. When they docked on new ports,
they turned to merchants and traded out the macramé
designs they had been making through their voyage. Some
common pieces included belts, hammocks, and hats.
Eventually, in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries,
Victorians would knot textiles until the Industrial
Revolution when sewing machines overtook the practice.
However, during the late 1960s and 1970s, hand-knotting
made a comeback, but by the 1980s, it quickly fell out of
fashion.
With that out of the way, let us now see how you stand to
benefit by learning macramé.

OceanofPDF.com
Chapter 2: The Benefits of Learning
Macramé
Learning the art of macramé is great because it offers you
several great benefits. Here are some of the top reasons
why you should try macramé.
It makes you more creative
Macramé knots are like little lego building blocks; once you
know how to tie them, you can arrange them in magnificent
patterns with great ease. Being able to arrange those knots
without the aid of any prepared designs or patterns can
open up your mind creatively.
Everyone is creative; all you need is to trust and believe in
yourself to unlock that part of your brain. You are free to
express yourself in what you make, and therefore this
allows you to engage your creative side and make
breathtaking macramé pieces.
It helps you grow
The art of macramé is great because just like any other art,
it is a wonderful way to meet people and learn more about
the world around you. It motivates you to get out of your
comfort zone and try new interesting skills. It challenges
your thinking and makes you become better.
Once you are out of your comfort zone, growing with each
day, you start to grow and become a better person.
Learning macramé allows you to live an active, healthy, and
connected life, as you spend time learning what other
people are doing, get inspired by their crafts, find ways of
improving or customizing them, and more.
 It gives you time and permission to learn a new
skill
People are always looking to learn new beneficial skills. By
learning macramé you build a new skill that is not only fun
but also very beneficial to you.
It is always challenging to try something new because
you're not used to the change. Therefore, to make it more
interesting and fun, you need to try something that
challenges you while at the same time being interesting.
Macramé offers just that – the perfect combination of
challenges and fun as you slowly become better knot by
knot. Once you create something nice, you'll feel quite
happy and satisfied that you'll love engaging in macramé.
It allows you to make amazing works of art
Macramé is a great form of art that allows you to create
beautiful works of art. There are many things that you can
make from macramé, such as wall hangings, jewelry,
clothes, or even sandals. Being able to create something
just the way you want it is good because you'll be satisfied
and content with it.
These amazing works of art can be used to decorate homes
or even offices. They add a great touch to the vibe and
general look of a place. You could even gift your loved ones
and impress them with your skills and thoughtfulness.
It is a way to make a living easily
If you've been looking for a way to make a living by doing
your own business, then macramé is the way to go. People
are always looking for ways to decorate their offices and
homes. And with the fact that you can create unique pieces
that inspire and ooze elegance, you could easily sell your
crafts to people. People love beautiful things, irrespective
of how the economy is performing! So if you can perfect
this skill, you could make it your little side hustle, which
could easily pay some bills for you. And if you are serious
about it and become a pro at macramé, you could even turn
it into a full time business, as you make breathtaking works
of art that people will not say no to.

OceanofPDF.com
Chapter 3: Getting Started
This chapter will focus on what you need to start any
macramé project.

Essential Macramé Tools and Supplies

Mounting cords
Rings for holding mounting cords
Macrame board
Cording
Pins
Measuring Tape
Scissors
In addition to having the above tools, you will also need to
acquaint yourself with some commonly used macramé
terms:

Common Macramé Terms

Below are some terms you will come across as you create
your patterns:
Sinnet (or Sennit): In these designs, the knots are created
one at a time to form a chain.
Knotting/working cord: Refers to the cord that you are
using at the moment for tying your knots.
Fillers: Cord(s), which remain in the middle of your design
where the knots are wrapped around. They are also
referred to as core or knot bearing knots.
Weave: To weave cords is placing them in such a way that
they cross over or under one another.
DDH: It’s an abbreviation for Double half hitch, which
means tying two half hitch knots adjacent to one another.
Standing end: The cord end, which is mounted on a board
for macramé or another work surface. It isn’t used in the
making of knots
SK: It is the short form of a square knot, which is made by
knotting two cords over one cord or more.
Picot: These are loops that are standing out on the edges of
a project. They are common in the early designs.
Hitch: A knot, which is frequently used in attaching cords
onto other materials.
Crook: The area which is curved on a cord loop.
Finishing knot: A knot, which you tie to secure the ends of
your cords; thus, preventing them from coming undone
(unraveling).
Fringe: Ends of cords which are left hanging instead of
being knotted.
Scallops: They are several loops of knots made along the
sides of a macramé project.
Interlace: It’s a design where you intertwine and weave
your cords together to connect different sections.
Segment: Refers to particular sections of a design, cord, or
knot.
Alternating: This is where you tie a knot using one cord
then swap to a different cord to form the exact knot.
Findings: Fastenings and items apart from cords, which can
be used to make attachments, closures, and any other
decorations or functional settings in macramé designs. For
instance, clasps and ear wires.
Bar: A knot series, which creates an area that is raised on
your design. We often use half hitch knots to make the
bars. They can run vertically, diagonally, or horizontally
across your design.
Combination knot: This is where you use 2 knots or more at
the same time to create a new design element or a new
type of knot. Also referred to as fusion knots.
Body: Used to refer to the main area of your design, which
you are currently working on.
Bight: A narrow section on your cord that is folded, which
you push through other knot parts.

Macramé Tips
As you get started with macramé, below are some tips to
make the whole process easier.
Use good quality rope
Home and craft stores have a wide range of nylon, acrylic,
twine, and cotton cords that incorporate a rope-like twist,
which is ideal for macramé. If you are uncertain which rope
to use, you can start by using a cotton rope with a diameter
of not less than 3mm. There are two kinds of cotton rope;
twisted and braided. The braided rope made of cotton is six
or more pieces, which are braided to create one rope. With
the three-piece rope (occasionally referred to as three-ply),
the pieces are twisted all-around one another.
Maintain equal tension all through
This calls for practice. The invariability of the size of the
knots is affected by the strength you use in tightening
them. Continue practicing again and again until you
achieve a rhythm and your knots appear consistent. You
will need to find a balance between loose and knotting to
avoid your design looking shoddy and instead have your
knots looking nice and tight.
Begin small and simple
In macramé, we have a wide range of various knots, which
are used, and we will learn more about this in the next
chapter. A nice first knot to begin learning is the easy
square knot. This knot can be executed in two ways: the
plain square knot and the alternating one. For many of the
macramé designs available out there, the square knot is the
core foundation. Also, this knot is a simple knot for a
beginner to attempt.

So why is it advisable to begin with a small practice

project
A small practicing project offers you the chance to
get familiar with the various knots for macramé,
what they are called, and how to tie them.
Upon the completion of the practice design, you are
either going to be really pleased with yourself and
enthusiastic to try out new designs, or you may
realize that this is not your thing at all.
When you finish this small design, it gives you the
self-assurance you need to invest your money and
 time into this craft by taking the next initiative to
your first “actual” design for macramé.
So, what type of small macramé designs can you get
started with:
Key chain, bookmark, plant holder, wall hanging, and
jewelry such as bracelets or choker necklaces
Bigger designs that you can try out once you are familiar
with this craft include: bunting or garland, headboard, rug,
light fixture, table runner or hammock (but save this one
for later as it’s really big)
Enjoy yourself and get involved
As you start, enjoy yourself and if you can, find a
community. You can become part of a community of
macramé partisans where you share macramé knowledge,
get answers to any questions you may be having, and even
be inspired. One of the most amazing things about this
journey is being able to express creativeness via macramé.

Let us now learn some basic macramé knots that you will
come across:

OceanofPDF.com
Chapter 4: Basic Macramé Knots
Macramé projects are usually created from a combination
of some distinct basic knots. When you become well
acquainted with the basic knots, you can make any
macramé design you wish. Let us learn some basic knots:

Square Knot (SK)

This is the most basic knot that we use in macramé. You
can make many patterns and variations using only this knot
or in conjunction with other knots. You can use this knot to
create sennits, which simply means tying one after the
other in a chain.
The square knot may also be used in rows that are
horizontal with diagonal or straight edges.
For practice purposes on creating the square knot, you will
need two cords that have been folded in half then attached
to the project board. This way, you will have four strands to
create the design. Number your cords mentally 1 to 4.
Cords 2 and 3 are going to be the fillers while cords 4 and
1 will be your working cords.
Making the knot
Step 1: Heading towards the right, bring cord 1 above the
filler cords three and two. Cross it below cord 4. If you
move the working cord on the left first, your knot’s head is
going to be facing left and vice versa.
Step 2: Bring the cord numbered 4 to your left, crossing
below the two fillers and above the working cord 1. While
holding your fillers firmly, make the knot tight by yanking
either working cords.

Pro tip: You have just completed a half square knot, which
is at times referred to as a half knot, mostly in vintage
patterns.
Step 3: Both your working cords have exchanged positions.
Bring the cord numbered 1 to your left, crossing it above
the filler cords then below cord 4.
Step 4: Bring cord four to your right, crossing it below your
filler cords and above working cord one.

Step 5: While firmly holding your filler cords, tug on your

cords for working to make the left square knot tight.
Lark’s Head Knot
This knot is also referred to as “cow hitch.” It is commonly
used in the process of mounting since it is a “hitch”. The
mounting process entails attaching one cord onto a purse
handle, dowel, or ring onto another cord.

OceanofPDF.com
How to create larks head knot

Bend your cord into equal parts then position your loop
below the horizontal line for holding from above to below.
Reach below your loop, then over the holding line, and hold
the two loose strands. Bring them below through your loop.
Yank to make the knot tight.

Reverse Lark’s Head Knot

This knot is used when you require turning a knot,
especially in the presence of double half hitches, as it is
going to blend in just fine.
Making the knot
Step 1: Horizontally attach your holding cord to the board.
Bring your working cord that has been folded in half on top
of the cords for holding. The section that is folded should
be on the front and the tips headed behind your board.

Step 2: Passing below your holding cord then above the

section of your working cord that has been folded, bring
either halves towards yourself.
To make the knot tight, firmly pull them.

Switch Knot
It’s a square knot design that is created by swapping the
working cords and fillers every time you create a new knot.
It is very crucial that you leave out sufficient space in
between your knots to clearly see the cords that have been
crisscrossed.
Like the square knot, you will need four cords for
practicing. Using two colors is going to be quite helpful.
Arrange your cords in such a way that two cords of similar
color are adjunct to one another with the remaining cords
on each side.
Making the knot
Step 1: Using cords 4 and 1 create a left square knot like
the one above.

Step 2: Separate the filler cords 3 and 2.

Take both your cords for working and bring them over the
fillers, so that they are now resting in between both cords.
Step 3: Using cords 4 and 1 as the fillers and cords two and
three as working cords create a right square knot. Tighten
your knot so that it’s resting not less than an inch under
the initial square knot.

Pro tip: In many macramé patterns, you will not be

instructed on the direction your knots should be facing. It
is entirely your call whether you wish to alternate the right
and left square knot or not. Ensure that you maintain an
equal distance in between your knots all through the
Sennit.
Step 4: Bring your working cords two & three above then in
between cords one & four, so that they become the next
filler cords.
Using cords one and four create a left square knot.

To proceed, rework steps 2 to 4

Half Hitch
Step 1: Begin by knotting the Lark’s head
Step 2: Bring one of your cords to form the number 4

Step 3: Take that cord, then loop it through the hole in the
4 and yank taut.
That’s it; you just created the half hitch.

Double Half Hitch

This knot is made by simply repeating the half hitch once
more.
Making the knot
Step 1: Begin by knotting the Lark’s head.
Step 2: Create the number 4 using one of your cords.

Step 3: Take the cord you used and loop it through the hole
in the 4, then pull taut.
Step 4: Using the cord you used earlier, create one more
number 4
Step 5: Bring the loop through the hole in the 4 then yank
taut.

Diagonal Double Half Hitch

Step 1: Take your holding cord (yarn strand that’s on the
furthest left side) and bring it over every other strand (the
cords for working) diagonally from the left side to the right.
The angle and direction of the half hitch knots are going to
be determined by how you position the working cords.

Step 2: Advancing from the left side to the right, use cord
two to create a half hitch. Cross cord two above and below
your holding cord then over itself to make a loop. Yank your
knot tight, then reposition it to the place where you would
like to start from.
OceanofPDF.com
Step 3: To form a double half hitch, create one more half
hitch knot

Step 4: Making sure that the holding cord is placed

diagonally throughout, continue to knot double half hitches
using the rest of the cords for working. Every knot is going
to be a little lower on your foundation cord than the last.

OceanofPDF.com
Step 5: After you have worked through all your working
cords, you are going to attain a double half hitch row.

Other Macramé Knots

Oysterman Knot
This intriguing and relatively easy to make knot is used to
create an alluring button wherever you wish on your cord.
Clifford W. Ashley developed this knot early in the
nineteenth century.
It is founded on a slipknot, though, with an additional step.
Many knots for buttons are simple to tie however difficult
to tighten, but with the oysterman knot, it is easy, thus
making it suitable for most types of macramé designs.

OceanofPDF.com
Making the knot
Step 1: Create a loop in the middle of a cord that is
eighteen inches in length. Ensure that you have the left
crossing over the right one.

Step 2: To create a bight, bend half of your cord on the left.

Cross it through your loop from the bottom, which is below
the half on the right and above the one on the left
Yank the bight to make the loop around it tight.

Step 3: Vertically align the slipknot. Crossing below the half

of the cord on the right, take the half on the left and move
it clockwise.
Bring the left cord to your bight then cross it through from
above, that’s over-under.
Yank half of the left cord in the section that is right under
your slipknot to make the knot tight. This is going to make
the bight tight. Then to make the rest of your knot tight,
yank the left half cord.

Wrap Knot
This knot is used for starting some macramé designs.
Making the knot
Step 1: Take the strand for wrapping and form the shape V
above the other pieces.

Step 2:Wrap the end that is long around every strand,

which will leave your V trapped.
Step 3: Continue to wrap the end that is long for around
five times.

Step 4: Bring the strand that is long through your V.

Step 5: Yank the strand that is shorter to trap the strand

that is longer below your knot, and that’s it; a finished wrap
knot.
Overhand Knot (OH/OK)
The overhand knot is often used to prep the cords because
when you tie it at the tip of your cord, it prevents
unravelling.
You may also use this knot to finish off your cords after
completion of the project, connect 2 cords and to secure
beads.
Making the knot
Use your cording to create a loop.
Take one tip of the cord and bring it around your cord then
by your loop. Yank taut.

Spiral Knot
Step 1: Use larks head knot to hang 2 cords onto the dowel
or ring. You will be left with a total of 4 hanging cords, 2
anchor cords (cords in the middle) and 2 tying cords (the
ones at the sides).
OceanofPDF.com
Step 2: Cross the tying cord to the right below the anchor
cords then over the tying cord to the left. Cross the tying
cord to the left over your anchor cords then via the loop
created by the tying cord on the right. Pull either tying
cords to make the knot tight and you have just finished a
right half SK.

Typically, a spiral knot is simply 2 right facing half SQs.

Cross the tying cord to the right below your anchor cords
then over the tying cord to the left. Cross the tying cord to
the left over the anchor cords then into the loop made by
the tying cord on the right. Yank either tying cords to
tightly secure your knot.

Josephine Knot
Step 1: Cut out 2 cord lengths that are approximately fifty
inches long. This will allow you plenty of room for
practicing. Double over your strands to have the tips
aligned. Tie the loops at the top together.

Step 2: Grab the cord on the left then loop it below itself.

Step 3: Grab the cord on the right side then cross it over
your loop of the cord on the left.
Step 4: Carrying on using the cord on the right, pass it
below the tip of the cord on the left making sure you use
the under-over technique. Then tighten it up.

OceanofPDF.com
Chapter 5: Macramé Patterns
Pandora Bracelet

Tools and Supplies

Fabric glue (clear when dry)
Project board
Tape
Pins
Pandora beads
2mm of cord material (this pattern used Satin)
Method
Step 1
Cut out two cords that are not less than 72″ in length to
make a bracelet that is 8″. To avoid unraveling, apply glue
to the tips.
Horizontally align your cords then secure them close to the
middle. Mark the middle point using a sheet of tape.
Thread your first bead through the two cords to have it
resting over the tape.
Step 2
Working at the same time, create a loop that is
counterclockwise using the 2 cords.
Pro tip: The best way to secure satin and other cords that
are delicate is by leaning pins over them. When you place
the pins through your material, it is going to destroy the
frail fibers.

OceanofPDF.com
Step 3

Fold the end that is free to create a bight. Bring it under-

over through your loop.
To make the initial loop tight, yank the bight. As you do
that, get rid of the slack from the bead segment so that the
loop you tightened is against the bead. Pull carefully as this
is a crucial step in the design.
Step 4
Pass the end that is free below your bead rotating
clockwise. Ensure that your knot is not twisted. It helps to
hold it firmly on the board using one of your hands while
you finish your knot using the remaining hand.
Bring the tip by your bight above and below (from top to
bottom).
To make the bight tight, tighten the section that is close to
your bead. Tug on the tip to make the remaining part tight.
Step 5
Rework steps two to four a couple of times while you
incorporate additional beads. Instead of finishing with a
bead, use a knot.
When your bracelet reaches half of the length that you
intend to make, stop. For instance, stop at three and a half
inches for a finished bracelet of seven inches in length.
Ensure that all your oysterman knots are as close as
possible to your beads. Where there’s a lot of space, it
becomes challenging to remove knots and backtracking.
Flip your bracelet over then return to the middle. What you
should do first is tying a knot for buttons adjacent to your
bead using the remaining half of your cord. Proceed on
tying additional knots and incorporating extra beads until
you get your bracelet to your required size. Ensure that you
remember to finish with a knot and not a bead.
Step 6
To create the clasp, bring 2 cords from the same bracelet
end through one bead. Repeat with the other side, but this
time let them pass through in the opposite direction. To
check the size, wear the macramé jewelry on the wrist; it is
supposed to feel comfy with the tips pulled so that it is in
the position for closing. If it is not the correct size, you
might need to remove or add knots. To make your bracelet
balanced, ensure that you do it on either end.
As you take off the bracelet, notice the distance that you
need to slide the bead for your clasp to open it.
If it is past one and a half inches, as you execute the
following step, position your knots further below on the
tips.
Step 7

Leave out a minimum space of one and a half inches, then

use the 2 ends to create an Oysterman knot. As you tighten
it, apply glue so that it is in the inside of your knot.
If you wish you may add extra glue on the exterior, though,
some types of glue will end up darkening your material.
Therefore, before using the glue, test it out on a sheet of
material scrap to avoid that.
Step 8:
Redo step seven using the remaining two ends. Allow the
glue to dry before cutting off the additional material.

OceanofPDF.com
Friendship Bracelet

Tools and Supplies

Scissors
Buttons (You can use a bead as well)
Bamboo Cord or Hemp Twine
Optional: Craft Glue
Method
Step 1
Cut out 2 pieces of cord that are around seven feet in
length, which is going to be a bit longer than required but
as we had mentioned earlier, it’s always good having a little
extra instead of being insufficient. You can have them as
the same color, but this pattern used two distinct colors.
Step 2
Next, measure approximately twelve inches then double
the cord up. This is going to give you two lengths of twelve
inches and two, which are seventy-two inches. Create the
overhand knot, which is going to be a loop for the closure
of your button; therefore, you have to make sure that the
button can fit through that loop.

Step 3
Attach your bracelet onto the project board or any work
surface of choice.
Separate the strands to leave the two that are long on the
sides and the two short ones at the center. Tie one of the
strands that are long and knot it all round the two strands
at the center. Using that exact cord, create another knot.

Step 4
Switch to the other cord then rework the 2 knots. Continue
to alternate sides, creating 2 knots on either side.
Once you achieve your desired length (a woven length of
approximately 6″), tie your bracelet off using an overhand
knot. To help in securing it, you may apply a tiny amount of
craft glue if desired. If you end up using the glue, you may
clip off 2 of the tail ends near your knot.
Next, take the two cords that are remaining then use them
for tying on the closure of your button. Create the knots
below your button – then again, you may apply a small
amount of glue to help secure the knot.

OceanofPDF.com
Silver Leather Bracelet

Tools and Supplies

Two cord strands of round leather in 2 distinct sizes. For
instance 1mm & 1.5mm. Each around eighty centimeters in
length.
One more round leather strand of the thinner (1mm) cord
about 2m long
Thirty or so beads with a hole that is big enough to slide
through the thinner leather
Optional: a bead with a huge hole
Method
Step 1
Fold the 2 eighty centimeter strands into half then create a
knot with a small loop. Try having the strands of thinner
cord in between the thicker ones. Each of the four is going
to be the “carry” cords.

Step 2
Take one thin carry cord and thread all your beads on it.
Use a knot to secure it. Using a knot, secure the 2m strand
over the “carry” cord. These are going to be the cords for
working.
Step 3
Pull up the bead on one end and use your cords for working
to create a square knot.
Pull the bead adjunct to it up, then use the exact square
knot to secure it – decide whether it will be right or left
facing then go with it all the way.
Ensure that you gently pull every knot tight since the
leather cord of 1mm is quite thin and is going to tear easily
if pulled hard.
It is preferable that you secure the knot using your nails
and fingers rather than yanking on your cords hard.
Step 4
Continue until you achieve your desired length then form a
huge knot using all the ends.
If desired, thread the bead via the huge hole and secure
using a new knot.
Snip off the tips in either case and enjoy your new design.
OceanofPDF.com
Stone Necklace
Tools and Supplies
4mm Chain – 24″-36″ for each necklace, according to your
preference
Pliers (split ring pliers will be of great help)
Embroidery Floss that is Brightly-colored
Scissors
Large Eye Needle
Lobster Clasp
6mm Split Rings
River Rock(s)
Method
Step 1
First, cut out four cords that are roughly eighteen inches
each. This was more than enough for covering a stone
measuring two to three inches. If using a smaller stone,
then you are not going to require as much length, although
it is always a good idea having a length that is longer
instead of one that is not sufficient.
Grab one strand on a split ring and a cord (you may simply
use the typical jump ring, although this makes sure it
doesn’t, later on, slip off the chain). Place your ring in the
middle of your strand, then tie it all round the middle
points of the remaining three cords. This is going to form a
central ring having eight strands (nine inches in length)
that are comprehensively knotted in the middle.
Pair 2 cords that are next to one another next. Join the 2
cords using the overhand knot at around half an inch from
the mid-ring in every cord pair.

Step 2
Separate the cord pairs then pair them once again using
the adjunct cords at approximately half an inch from the
original knot set. You are going to keep separating and
alternating the pairs, thus forming knots near the final knot
set.
Note: You will have to position your knots near the mid-ring
and nearer one another if the stone you are using is small.
We are forming some type of “net” for holding the stone,
and the farness between your knots is going to establish
the largeness of the holes.
Step 3
Smaller stones are going to need smaller holes. To get an
ideal distance, you might require to test using your stones.
As you work, try to slip the stone you will be using inside
your net, to find out if it’s a suitable fit.
Step 4
Once you have made a net that is big enough for holding
your stone, slip the stone inside, then tightly wrap it
around the stone. To tighten it, divide your cords into two
sections then tie them to one another in the same way as to
how a shoe is tied. To make it tighter around your stone,
create a double knot. To give it a nice beautiful finish,
create the overhand knot you’re your double knot.
Make a tassel by trimming the ends off and there you have
it; your macramé stone necklace.

If you want, you may do some easy weaving to brighten

your chain up to match the stone pendant. Cut out a stand
of embroidery floss that is six to eight inches longer than
the chain you are using. On one tip of your chain, create a
knot then string your floss onto a needle with a large eye.
Wrap your floss in and out through your chain, securing it
with a knot on the remaining end of your chain.
Step 5

String the pendant, then link a ring on one chain end, then
to complete the necklace, attach one ring and lobster clasp
on the remaining end.
OceanofPDF.com
Macramé Necklace
Tools and Supplies
Six strands each approximately 4 to 5 feet in length for a
total of around ten yards
1 mm waxed polyester cord
One inch long tumbled amethyst stone
Three 8mm round amethyst beads
2 small beads of glass
Method
Step 1
Set aside 2 of your cords. Take the remaining four and
begin by creating a macramé net/stone wrap. Create 3 flat
knots (1,5 square knots) or gourmand pattern below the
wrap. Slide a bead through 2 middle cords.
Step 2
Take 3 strands from one side of your bead. Use 2 of the
strands as a base then use the 3rd to create a sennit of
Lark’s head knot. Ensure that your loops are outward-
facing. This pattern created five larks head knot, which is
adequate for looping around the bead (according to your
bead size, you may require more or less). Mount 1 of the
cords which you had set aside earlier, onto the threads at
the base.
Step 3
Using one of the strands that you had pulled through your
bead, create a double half hitch on the threads at the base.

Step 4
Rework steps three to five on the second side.
Take the 6 cords to the left and use them to create a
diamond pattern. This pattern formed three, five diamonds.
Complete with three flat knots (1,5 SK).

Step 5
Slide a bead through 2 center cords. Create sennits of
lark’s head/ frioille knots on either side of your beads.

Step 6
Create 3 more flat knots (1,5 SKs)on the underside.
Step 7
Proceed using the diamond design. This pattern created ten
“diamonds” – you can create less or more according to your
preferred necklace length.

Step 8
Weave a braid of square knots that is a couple of inches
long; for this pattern, it was 2.5 inches.
Step 9
Switch your necklace to the converse side them use the
working strands to create an overhand knot. Clip off the
strands then apply a bit of glue on your knot.

OceanofPDF.com
Step 10
Cut the cords at the base to your preferred length (five to
six inches), then pull the small beads through the cords. At
the tip of every strand, create a simple knot.

Step 11
Form a clasp closure that can be adjusted. Do this by
placing a strand that is two to three inches in length below
the strands at the base then tie five to six SKs.

Step 12
Flip your necklace to have the bottom side up, then create
a knot. Apply some glue to secure (as you had done earlier)
and clip off the excess strands.

OceanofPDF.com
Camera Strap

Supplies
Scissors
Industrial strength glue
Clothespins
Swivel clasps
Macramé cord
Method
Step 1
Cut out two macramé cord strands that are four yards in
length.
Step 2
Fold every cord to have three yards on one side and one
yard on the other. Place the central points through the part
of a swivel clasp that is flat, ensuring that you leave the
ends of your strands that are long outside.
Step 3
Pull the tips of every cord through their respective loops
then tighten around the clasp.

Step 4
Start forming a square knot. Cross the long leftmost cord
over the two middle cords, then below the other long cord
that is furthest to the right. Take the right cord and bring it
below the 2 middle cords then up your left cord & over it.
Pull taut. You have just made half a square knot.
Step 5
Finish your SK by executing step four in reverse. Take your
cord on the right and pass it over the two middle strands
then underneath the left. Cross your cord on the left below
the 2 mid-strands then over the cord on the right. Tug taut,
and you have just finished an SK
Step 6
Continue to create SKs until you get the strap to your
preferred length.
Step 7
Clip the ends of your four cords then insert all of them
through a different swivel clasp. Apply some glue on the
tips of all your cords then fold them over your clasp. Use a
clothespin to hold them in place until the glue dries. Take
off the clip when your glue dries up then strap on your
camera.

OceanofPDF.com
Macramé Plant Hanger
Tools and Supplies
Superglue
Scissors
30 yards of rope
Ruler
Wooden ring of a curtain
3 Ceramic bowls
Some nice plants
Method
Step 1
Start by creating rope support for holding every bowl. Cut
out eight rope strands, each measuring thirty inches in
length. Create a knot on one end for holding the eight
strands together, and tighten.
Step 2
Place your bowl upside down then position your knot in the
middle. Arrange the eight strands two at a time to create a
cross design. At around two or three inches from the
middle, create a knot for connecting each string pair to
another.
Connect a single strand from every pair using a knot; the
shape of a diamond is going to be formed by the rope
between the second and the first-row knot row.

Step 3
When you are done creating four knots on the 2nd row,
rework the exact process to form the 3rd row of four knots.
When you use the normal size cereal bowl, 3-knot rows are
going to be enough for holding them. What holds the rope
needs to be big enough to hold your bowls entirely into it.
OceanofPDF.com
Step 4
To make a rope support for all the bowl, rework the earlier
steps. This pattern created a planter with three levels, but
you may create as much as you want. To form the hanging
planter, connect each of the supports for the bowls. Cut out
2 rope strands that are three yards in length. Bend them at
the center then use them to create a loop crossing the rope
via the wooden ring. Your wooden ring needs to have four
strands that are 1 ½ yard in length hanging from it.
Connect every strand to initial support for rope using a
knot. Try having an equal distance between every knot you
create and the ring by creating a tiny dot on every rope
strand at 25″ distance from your ring and using a ruler.
This is really crucial for the bowl planters to remain firm
horizontally.

Step 5
Link the 2nd and 3rd support for rope right under the initial
one ensuring you leave out around twelve-inch of space in
between each. If necessary, cut the excess length of rope
then apply a tiny superglue dot. This is going to prevent
your knots from slipping since when watering; your planter
may get a bit heavy. Place the plants inside your bowls.
Since there won’t be a hole for draining, you may put some
pebbles at the bottom before layering in the soil for the
plant.

Step 6
The final thing you have to do is to drill a hole on your
ceiling then install a hook for hanging your plant hanger.
Firstly, hang your plant hanger using the wooden ring then
slide your bowls into every rope support.
OceanofPDF.com
Macramé Lawn Chairs

Tools and Supplies

Lighter
Scissors
Crochet Hooks
Paracord or Macrame Cord
Metal Lawn Chair
Method
Step 1
Use a pair of scissors to remove your chair’s webbing. You
may require a screwdriver as well if the webbing on your
chair has been secured using screws.
Step 2
Create a double knot on the base of your chair.
Step 3
Bring your cord up, under the bar in the middle, then up
over your frame at the top.
Step 4
Wrap your cord, then loop it from the front part of your
chair back and forth, pull it up all the way to the top of your
chair’s back. Rework the steps to wrap your cord again
from the bottom to the top.
Step 5
To create a pattern on your chair, rework the same steps as
you did when facing vertically, however, as opposed to last
time weave your macramé cord (or paracord) horizontally.
Step 6
Form a knot at the tip once you are done weaving. Using a
lighter, burn off the strand that is left hanging.

OceanofPDF.com
Macramé Outdoor Planter

Tools and Supplies

Herb Plants
Planter Pot
Level
Painter’s Tape
Screws
Drill
Scissors
Hose Clamps
Copper pipe
Masonry Line
Curtain Rod Brackets (2)
Method
Step 1: Install the pipe made of copper
Get a copper pipe cut to your preferred length from your
local hardware. Form a straight line against your wall using
painter’s tape and a level. For a field that is level hanging,
use hanging brackets.
Step 2: Use a masonry line that has been cut.
Any heavy strand will get the job done however, masonry
line is available in a variety of colors. Copper looks great
with a touch of neon pink or yellow.
Cut out six string strands ensuring that every piece is
thrice your pots’ length.
Step 3: Recalibrate your hose clamp
Make the hose clamp tight around your pot’s top using a
screwdriver. You need to make sure that the fit is snug.
Remove it from the pot when it is the correct size then
place it on a flat surface.
Step 4: Begin to create the knots
Take one of your strands and fold it into equal parts. At
your mid-point, create a loop below your hose clamp then
pull both tails through. Repeat this step with the remaining
strings. Evenly space 6 strands around your clamp.
Gret two strands that are in opposite sides then wrap them
into a knot approximately 1½″ below. Redo with each of
your strands. Use the right and left strings to keep creating
1 ½″ knots until you achieve your required length for the
pot. You may slide the pot inside to check how many extra
knot rows you have to make. When you hold up your hose
clamp, it should resemble a basketball hoop.
Step 5: Plant your herbs
Pour potting soil into your pot around the herb roots
ensuring that you do not over fill. Try faux plants or
succulents if you normally have a lot on your plate. Position
your hose clamp round your pot then form a knot at the
base. Clip off the strands at the bottom as necessary; make
it as short or as long as you want.
Step 6: Hang the planter
Cut out 3 masonry line strands then create knots in that
length to add a little detail. You will need 2 of these. Loop
the strand that is knotted below the hose clamp then knot it
on the pipe made of copper. Redo on the other side. You
may find that your planter is somewhat tipsy, in which case
simply adjust it so that the strands are equal on the right
and left side and ensure that at least the length is exact.

OceanofPDF.com
Wall Hanging Beads

Tools and Supplies

20mm wooden beads
Hoop in any size you want – this pattern used a 12″ one.
You may use embroidery hoops as well!
Cotton Macramé Cording
Optional: Faux Flowers for a whimsical touch
Method
Step 1
Begin by cutting out strands of macramé cord that are
equal in length. This pattern was approximately 14″each.
Step 2
Fold all your strands into equal halves then use the larks
head knot to attach them on the hoop.
Step 3
Create twenty eight larks head knot on your hoop. You may
do less or more according to how wide you like your design
to be.
Step 4
Grabbing 2 macramé strands that are next to each other at
the same time, slide on the wooden beads, leaving out the
most suitable space between.
Step 5
Trim your base evenly to have it looking straight and neat.
Optional: Grab a selection of greens and faux flowers then
using floral tape, join them to the loop from one side. It’s
simpler to work on the back of your hoop.

OceanofPDF.com
Beaded Plant Hanger
Supplies
Beads: White size: 5 mm, 7 mm, 9 mm Natural Wood
sizes: 20 mm, 10 by 9mm
Scissors
Foam Ball size: 2 ½″
3″ Glass Votive Holder
Air Plant
Crochet Thread
Method
Step 1
Begin by cutting out eight crochet string strands that are
thirty-six inches in length. Join them together using a knot
approximately nine inches from one tip. At around 1 ¼″
under your knot, tie 2 strands together in a knot. Carry on
using the initial knot to weave the 2 strands.

Step 2
In the 2nd knot split the strand then knot it to the strand
adjunct to it an inch under it. Repeat all through the length
for the remaining knots. This will be the basket for your
plant pot or votive. You may hold the strand firm using a
tiny foam ball.

Step 3
Slide the beads onto the ends of your strands. Grab a scrap
of plant wire then fold it into equal halves against the 2
strands. Slip the wire in your bead then pull the strand
through along with your wire.
Step 4
Attach a big natural bead to the tips of each of your
strands. Secure the ends at the top by creating a knot to
form the loop for hanging the planter. You are basically
done at this point but if desired you can make your hanger
more aesthetic by incorporating a huge bead to the strand
at the bottom. You do this by: don’t unravel the knot at the
base simply attach your bead then pull the entire string
through.
Step 5
To make the strand fuller at the base, incorporate an extra
strand by wrapping the crochet string all round your board
ten times using a cardboard that is ten inches in length.
Pull the string off the cardboard and cut one end.

Step 6
Split the tails of the strands that are rooting from the large
bead at the base then wrap them around the middle strand
from your cardboard.
Step 7
Wrap a string around the bunch of string at the top then
apply a bit of glue to secure. Make a tassel by wrapping the
tails of your string around your knot. Glue the tips to finish.

Step 8
Add the small bowl or votive to your hanger then insert the
air plant.
OceanofPDF.com
Christmas Ornaments

Tools and Supplies

Jute or Bakers twine –to hang your design!
Wire brush for fringe
Scissors
Macramé cord – this pattern used cording of 5mm for
chunkier tassels. Use thinner cord if you prefer something
smaller and tighter.
Small wood rings – you may form some wires into a circular
shape if you have them at your disposal.
Method
Step 1
Cut out 2 cord strands with a length of forty eight inches
each.
Step 2
Use the lark’s head knot to mount the cords on your
wooden ring. You are going to have 4 cords.
Step 3
Weave spiral knots throughout the length until you are left
with only a little of it. That is what is going to form the
fringe.
Step 4
Trim the base using a pair of scissors to even it out.
Untangle your cords then create the fringe by brushing
them. Again, to even the fringe, trim with your pair of
scissors.
Step 5
Form a loop through your wooden ring using a strand of
twine.
Since these tassels don’t take up much time you can create
a bunch for your Christmas tree during the festive season.
The completed tassels are approximately six inches in
length.

OceanofPDF.com
Pumpkin Macramé Hanger
Tools and Supplies
Scissors
Wooden beads
Metal ring
Black string or yarn
Method
Step 1
Cut out four yarn strands that are around three times the
intended length of your completed hanger. Fold your
strands half, and then loop them through the metallic hoop.

Step 2
Divide your strands of yarn into sets of 2. Create a knot out
of each set. Slide one wooden bead on every string then
create one more knot right under your bead.

Step 3
Create one more knot row a few inches below.
Step 4
Tie 2 strands that are next to each other, then redo with
every other strand. Tie the initial string together with the
final one. Rework this process then form one more row of
strands together.
Step 5
Tie the strings into a big knot.

Step 6
Slide the mini pumpkins inside the macramé hanger then
hang.
OceanofPDF.com
Macrame Mirror Wall Hanging
Tools and Supplies
25mm Wood Beads with a Hole Size of 10mm
Octagon Mirror
Sharp Scissors
Two-inch Wood Ring
4mm Macrame Cording
Method
Step 1
Cut out four strands of macramé cording into 3 yards
(108”) sections.
Fold your strands into halves then use the lark head knot to
tie each of the four onto the wood loop. Pull your knots
tight and also near each other. Separate 2 larks head knot
then begin to form them into an SK. Create 2 SQs.

Step 2
Begin to tie 2 SQs into the 2nd 2 larks head knot. To form
one big square knot, loop the 2nd SQ through one side of
the other 2 SQs as you start it.
Create seven square knots down the lengths on either side.
Step 3
Once you have tied the knots, split the ends off—two
strands for either side, then four in the middle. To seal the
frayed tips, use some tape. You are now through with the
hard part. What’s left is to tie simple knots and making the
sides equal.
Attach a single bead to the two side cording lines. Create a
knot below the bead on either side. Wrap the four middle
cords into an overhand (or plain) knot approximately 1/14”
under the beads.

Step 4
Hold one middle cord then attach it to the 2 cords at the
sides. Knot the 3 together on either side. To get the length
of your knots even, incorporate the mirror. To firmly hold it
in place, attach one three side cording behind your mirror.
Create easy knots in each of the three side cords at the
base right and left of your mirror. Separate the three sides
cord once more. Bring a single one on either side behind
your mirror then take two on either side to your mirror’s
front. Form the cords into a knot.

Step 5
Turn over your mirror then wrap each of your cords
together. Turn your mirror over once more to its initial
position then loosen the knot at the front. Slide the cords at
the back through the knot then make the knot tight once
more. Clip the tips of your cording down to approximately
fourteen inches. Pull the cording, or the end loose, then
allow them to fray. To fluff the tips, use a comb to comb the
ends of your cording. Hang
OceanofPDF.com
Hanging Herb Garden
Tools and Supplies
4 rolls of 100″ nylon rope (5/16 inch wide)
Metal Dowel
Method
Step 1
Cut out 32 strands, each measuring roughly 120” then use
Larks head knot to mount them on your pole.

Step 2
Divide your cords into four sections of sixteen single-cords.
Use a half hitch knot to weave the shape of a V in every
section.

Step 3
Do another row of half hitch knots that are in the shape of a
V for each of the four sections. At the base middle of all the
four Vs create one square knot.

Step 4
Create one more square knot in the three spaces that are
between your Vs. (you should have a total of three.

Step 5
Starting with the sixteen single cords furthest to the right,
approximately four inches below from the middle V knot,
make a row consisting of 3 SK. Let the two single cords to
hang loose on either end.

Step 6
Create a 2nd row of four alternating SKs approximately 2.5
inches below that row.

Step 7
Create a 3rd row of three alternating SKs approximately 2.5
inches under the 2nd row.
Step 8
To make the “pocket” for a Mason jar or flower pot, create
the 4th square knot with the two loose cords on either end
of the final row. Take 2 cords from either end and bring it
around to the front. Create the square knot with those four
cords. This is going to form a circular shape on this part of
your wall hanging.

Step 9
Use a wrapped knot to complete the pocket. Create the
wrapped knot approximately 3 inches under the preceding
square knot row. Clip off the tips of the rope to your
preferred length.

Step 10
You have now completed one pocket for the first flower pot
using the sixteen cords on the furthest right side (this is the
fourth section). For this step, repeat steps five through
eight for the left side (first section).
Step 11
For the 2nd sixteen cord set, repeat steps five through
eight. Create one more row of ASKs approximately 2.5
inches under from the 3rd square knot row (that by now has
adopted a circular shape)
Create a wrapped knot approximately 2” below to have a
total of three sections.

Step 12
You are supposed to have three complete pockets for the
flower pots (sections one, two, and four). Repeat steps five
through seven for the third sixteen cord section that is
remaining. Create a 4th row of four ASKs. Create a 5th row
of three ASKs. To form a circular touch for your pocket,
create one more square knot with the two cords that are
loose on the ends.
Create a 6th row of three ASKs then finish it off using a
wrapped knot.
Step 13
You should by now be having four sections that are finished
with pockets for mason jars or pots for flowers. You may
clip your tassels to your preferred length.
Fill your ceramic pots with dirt, and your desired herbs
then slide them in your macramé pockets.

OceanofPDF.com
Macrame Christmas Trees
Tools and Supplies
Wool
A comb or brush
Wire for jewelry
Fishing line for hanging
A few small branches or twigs that appear straight from
your garden
Method
Step 1
Cut your yarn into seven strands that are approximately 8
inches. Fold 2 of the pieces into halves to create a loop—
position one of your loops below a twig.

Step 2
Take the tip of your other piece that is looped then squeeze
the tips of the piece positioned below your twig via the
loop. Take the tips of that piece and thread it through the
loop positioned below the twig.
Pull tight and repeat.
Step 3
Once you have created sufficient knotted strings, use a
comb or brush to untangle the threads. You will require to
stiffen up your tree using some starch since it is going to be
a bit floppy. Trim your Christmas trees into a triangular
shape once stiff, then decorate using small beads or
baubles.
You may create an entire bunch since they only take around
ten minutes.
You may use them on a Christmas tree or present them as
gifts
OceanofPDF.com
Macramé Placemat
Tools and Supplies
One pair of Sharp scissors
One Comb
Metal clothes hanger
3-4mm of 20 x 3m thick cotton string
Method
Step 1
Use a larks head knot to mount twenty strings that are 3m
in length onto a metal hanger. Leave out a space of two to
three mm between your knots.

Step 2
Leaving out a distance of five centimeters under your
knots, grab four strands then use them to create a square
knot beginning from the left side. Use the four strands that
follow to create another SK. Proceed until you achieve one
row of ten SKs.
Step 3
Create a row of 9 square knots. Beginning from your left
side, grab strands three and four from the initial knot, then
strands 2 and 1 from the one adjacent to it to create a new
square knot. Proceed through the length of your row.
Repeat steps two and three until you get a total of 5 square
knot rows (the final row is going to have ten).

Step 4
Leaving out a space of two to three centimeters, create a
fresh row of 9 SKs. Do another row of ten square knots
after leaving out a two-to-three centimeter space.
Step 5
Repeat step four until you get a total of twelve rows,
completing with one that has ten knots.

Step 6
Create a row of ten, nine, ten, nine and ten square knots
minus any spaces in between your rows to complete the
design. Remove the placemat from your hanger by clipping
the lark’s head knot.
Step 8
Fold the placemat into two over the hanger then clip the
strands on either end to your preferred length, ensuring
that they are all even. To finish, make a soft feathery fringe
by combing the ends.

OceanofPDF.com
Mini Succulents
Tools and Supplies
Mini succulents
Scissors
Jute twine
Clipboard
Eggs
Paint brush
Acrylic craft paint
Method
Step 1: Prep your eggshells

Tap the shells of the raw eggs a few times to crack them
open then use a serrated knife to cut through. Make your
cut where you will do away with the top quarter. It is better
if you cut out several additional eggshells in case some
break.
Empty the contents of your eggs in a bowl then wash the
shells in soapy water on the outside and inside. Leave your
shells to dry while you cook an omelet.
Paint the bottom section of the shells in a color that is solid
once they are thoroughly dry. To attain an opaque finish,
you will need 2-3 coats of paint. Let your paint dry in
between the coats. To fasten things up a little, you can try
using a hairdryer. Set aside your painted eggshells.
Step 2: Cut the jute
Cut out three jute measuring 51” (130 centimeters) and
one strand that is 63 inches (160cm) in length. Note: if you
will be planting a tall cactus, add an additional eight inches
(20cm).
Align the tips of every strand then fold the 3 strands that
are shorter into halves. Attach the jute to your clipboard.
One tip of the strand that is long is going to remain
unattached.

Step 3: Make a hanging loop

You create a hanging loop by knotting several similar knots.
Take the jute strand that is loose and cross it below the
first three strands then above and through the middle hole.
Cross it again over the three strands then down and into
the loop.
Tighten then repeat.
Carry on until you have a total of twenty knots then detach
from the clipboard.

Step 4: Secure your loop

Secure the loop that is knotted onto your clipboard. Grab
the jute piece that is furthest to your right, then cross it
over every middle strand and finally below the strand
furthest to your left.
Grab the jute strand from the furthest left, then cross it
below every middle strand then above into your loop, then
over the strand on your furthest right, and tigthen. You are
now done with the first half of your knot.

The other knot half is just a repeat of the process except

that you begin with the strand that is furthest to the left
side. Cross the jute strand from the furthest left side below
each of the middle strands then above the furthest strand
to the right.
Grab a jute strand from the furthest right side, then cross it
over each of the middle strands then above into the loop,
then below the strand of the furthest left; tighten.

You have now completed one full knot.

Create one more knot.
Step 5: Form the egg basket
Take the two outer jute strands then bring them down to
make them parallel to the others. Separate your jute into 4
sets of two, ensuring that you group strands that are next
to one another. Leaving a length of seven inches (18cm)
down from the loop that is secured and create one knot in
every set.
Separate the sets once more, ensuring that you group the
strands that are next to each other. Leave out a length of
two inches (5cm) under your knots and make one knot in
every set. Begin with the three middle sets then tie
together the two outer strands.
Step 6: Weave the base
Reposition your jute on the clipboard to have the final set
of knots right on top of the clip.
Create 4 knots following step four instructions beginning
an inch (2.5cm) below your knots.

To complete the design, use each strand of jute to make

one knot. Clip the tips to leave out a tassel of
approximately six inches (15 cm) in length.
Step 7: Plant then hang your succulents
Plant the succulents into the eggshells carefully.
Open your basket up then insert the eggs and hang the
decoration
OceanofPDF.com
Macramé Hanging Vase

Tools and Supplies

Scissors
Rope or sturdy twine
Mason jar (or small plant container)
Method
Step 1
Cut out four long pieces of twine or rope that are each six
times the jar’s length. Wrap each of the four strands
together at their middle in a knot. You can alternatively use
a friendship knot to link the strands if you prefer the flatter
resting position.
Step 2
Set your jar on the work surface upside down, then lay the
middle knot against the base.
Step 3
Collect two rope strands and tie them using a square knot
approximately 1 1/2” under the initial knot. Redo using the
remaining three rope pairs.
Step 4
For the row that follows, redo step three, ensuring that you
pair the ropes for tying side-by-side from the above row. A
fishnet design should be starting to form. Try your best to
ensure even spacing but tight to your jar. Continue to add
rows as necessary enough to fit your planter or jar.
Step 5
Collect rope pieces from 2 knots that are adjacent at your
jars base rim, then form them into a square knot, and
tighten. Run the rope pairs along the edge then knot them
once more into a square knot. Again pull taut.
Step 6
Weave your rope strands two sets of 4 with two strands
from the knot at the top in all the groupings.
Step 7
Once you are done weaving 2 braids, join them together
using one last SK at the edge then clip your strands.

OceanofPDF.com
Halloween Wall Hanging
Tools and Supplies
Hot-glue gun
Craft felt
Scissors
Chunky-weight yarn
Macramé or embroidery hoop
Method
Step 1
Hold 3 yarn strands together then cut them out to be 2
times more the length intended for the completed design.
Use a larks head knot to mount the yarn above the hoop as
follows:
Make a loop by folding your pieces in half then slide your
loop below the top of the hoop.
Pass the ends over the top of the hoop then through your
loop.
Tighten to seal your knot. You should be having a bunch of
hanging strands of yarn. Rework this process past the hoop
top until you reach your desired length.
Step 2
Use a half hitch knot to tie single hanging bunches to the
bottom of the hoop as follows:
Wrap over the bunch of yarn then around the bottom of the
hoop.
Pass the ends through the loops that are made by
wrapping. Pull to secure the knot.

Step 3
Attach an extra yarn strand for the hanger to the top of the
hoop. Clip the hanging strands at the bottom to make them
even.
Step 4
Cut out the mouth and the eyes. Attach the face to the yarn
using hot glue. These are the directions for making the
ghost wall hanging. For the jack-o-lantern, just switch the
colors of yarn then instead of the hanger use a green
ribbon. You can try creating a different macramé knot on
the pumpkin top. We used the square knot.

OceanofPDF.com
Macramé Hanging Lantern Jars
Tools and Supplies
Scissors
Sticky tape
Candles – for safety purposes, LED is best
Jar
String or twine
Method
Step 1
Cut out a piece of twine that is approximately eight times
the intended length. Cut out eight more twine pieces with a
similar length.
Step 2
Separate your twine pieces into two sets of 4 lengths then
spread them out, crossing each other at the middle.

Step 3
Thread the top of the lengths that are vertical below the
horizontal ones.

Step 4
Cross the end on the right side of the horizontal below the
vertical lengths. Cross it beyond their top to make the
shape of ‘S’.

Step 5
Grab the horizontal pieces of the lengths to the left then
pass them through the loop to your right. Pull all the ends
of the strands one set at a go until you form a knot.
Step 6
Turn to the upright side then separate your twine strands
into pairs. Knot each pair at approximately the distance
from the edge to the middle of the jar.

Step 7
Turn your jar over once more upside down, then secure
your lanyard knot to the middle of the base of your jar
using tape. Tie the length of your right side from one of the
pairs with the length on your left side from the pair
adjacent to it then repeat all around. Repeat down the
length of your jar at intervals that are even until you get to
the top.
Step 8
Insert your candle then create a knot from all your strands,
ensuring that you leave out enough space for your jar to
hang.

OceanofPDF.com
Wall Hanging

Tools and Supplies

Scissors
String, for hanging
Wooden dowel or small pipe, around 6”
Thick roving of three distinct colors
Method
Step 1
Cut out pieces of roving from all the colors that are
approximately 1 ½ arm’s length. Based on your roving’s
thickness, split your pieces in half so that you now have a
total of six strands.
Step 2
Slip your strand through the middle of your copper pipe.
Create a knot then conceal it in the interior of your pipe. If
you used the wooden dowel, connect your strand to either
end of your dowel for hanging.
Step 3
Use the lark’s head knot to connect the strings to your pipe
made of copper. Fold every string into equal parts then
position below your pipe. Pull the tail that’s loose through
the head of the loop. Tighten, then repeat using each- you
may follow a color pattern if you wish.
Step 4
Beginning with the strand at the center (4th knot over,
strand to the far left), wrap the other strands throughout
the length of your left. Redo using the strand on the side to
the right weaving below and above to form the easy wall
hanging. Proceed using all the other strands then pull your
design up to make it tight.
Step 5
Take half of your strands for the wall hanging in either
hand. Braid the strand on the furthest right side into your
center then switch to the side on the left. Repeat. Keep
alternating until your braid gets mostly straight.
Step 6
Divide every side of the strings. Cut out another roving
piece that is approximately eight inches in length. Use it to
make the wrap knot: hold it on the front of the area that
you would like to make your knot, forming the “U” shape,
then tightly wrap it around each of your strands not less
than two times. Pass the tail via your loop then pull the
piece at the top-up. Repeat on either side then cut off the
additional roving.

OceanofPDF.com
Macramé Feathers
Tools and Supplies
Tape Measure – for measuring your cords
Sharp Scissors
Wire Brush
Stiffening Spray
Macrame Cording
Method
Cut out the following cord lengths:
For the big feather – 1 twenty-four inch strand, 10 twelve
inch strands, 10 – ten-inch strands, and 10 eight-inch
strands to have a total of thirty-one cords.
For the feathers that are a bit small – 1 twelve inch strand,
6 six-inch strands, 4 four-inch strands, and 4 three-inch
strands for a total of fifteen cords.
Since feathers are designed to be skinny at the top and get
a bit wider at the bottom, we will begin with the longest
cords, then proceed to the ones that are medium-sized then
lastly finish with the cords that are smallest. It’s that
simple.
Step 1
Take your longest cord and fold it into two halves. For the
big feather, grab the twenty-four-inch strand; for the
medium feathers, use the twelve-inch one. The long strand
is going to be your feather’s spine.
Grab one long feather then bend it into halves. Position it
accurately upright below your feathers spine to the side on
your right.

Step 2
Get another cord that long then fold it into equal halves.
Pull the loop section through your initial cord’s loop then
pull it over through the spine area of the feather.

Step 3
Get the tips of the initial cord then pull them through the
2nd cord’s loop.
Step 4
Pull your cord taut and you have just created the first knot
on your feather’s spine.

Step 5: Repeat steps one to four, however, swap sides. Grab

one more long cord then fold it into equal halves. Position
the loop on the side on your left (rather than right).
Step 6
Grab one more cord, fold into equal parts, then loop it
through the left loop. Pull the ends through the loop.

Step 7
Tighten each of your cords and continue to alternate sides,
right to the left, right to the left.
Step 8
Switch to the medium-sized cords and repeat the same
process once you are done with each of the last long cords.
Then finally, use the small cords after you finish with the
medium ones.

Step 9
When you have used up all the cords, use a wire brush to
brush them, thus forming the strands. To avoid pulling out
any knots, ensure that you are holding the spine while you
do it.
Flip over the feather then brush either side to make sure
that each of your cords has been brushed.
Step 10
Once you are done brushing, trim the feather using a pair
of scissors.
Step 11
Stiffen your feather using stiffening spray so that it can lay
flat when you hang it.
To make the small feathers or whichever size you choose,
repeat the process.
OceanofPDF.com
Macramé Rings

Tools and Supplies

A round object that is the exact size as your finger – if you
use multiple colors/thicker yarn, it helps to use something a
bit larger, or else the ring might not fit.
Glue
Scissors
Yarn – around 1.2m will do
Method
Step 1
Start by folding your strand of yarn into equal halves then
place it around your round object. Use the 2 tails to create
a simple knot. This would be the perfect time to confirm
that your strands are of equal lengths. Secure your initial
knot by creating another knot. You may now remove your
ring from your round object and begin to macramé.
Step 2
Begin by crossing the strand on the right side over the
strand at the center then up. Make sure to fasten it by
pulling tightly complete the first knot.
Step 3
This step is basically similar but mirrored. Begin by
crossing the strand on the left side over the strand at the
center; allow the strand on the right side to pass below the
strand at the center then up again. Carry on creating the 2
knots until you are nearly done with the ring.
Step 4
Once you create the final macrame knot, be sure to tighten
it by pulling then create a simple knot at the top of your
ring.
Step 5
Apply some glue then trim the tips. Ensure that you cover
the ends in glue, as well to have a smooth finished ring.

OceanofPDF.com
Friendship Bracelet Watch

Tools and Supplies

Craft floss or embroidery floss
A watch face with posts
Optional: Jump rings and closure
Optional: Crimp ends –this pattern used 20mm
Method
Step 1
To begin the design, you are going to require the floss and
watch face - decide on the craft floss color you want. Cut
out strips that are approximately forty-eight inches in
length. For the watch face in this pattern, you are going to
require ten long strings for every side (however, cut only
ten at the moment, then leave the rest until you are
prepared to begin on the second side).
Step 2
To start creating the strap, mount all the floss pieces on the
bar. Pick the tips of one long floss strand and put them
together, then hold one end, and squeeze it through the
bar. Proceed to tighten the tips by pulling through the new
loop that you have just created—latch on by pulling tight.
Do this with each strand of floss. Ensure that you position
them in the colors you like your pattern to be.
Step 3
For weaving your bracelet, you have the choice to braid the
tips as in other friendship bracelets, then tie it whenever
you are wearing. This option will work as well, but it is not
the prettiest.
For our pattern, we are going to be using closures. When
you achieve your desired length, apply a line of glue where
you will require cutting. Massage the glue back and forth
into the strands. This is going to hold your braid together
firmly for the step that follows.
You should keep in mind that friendship braids are really
strong, so you are free to make your straps a little tight.
You may find it somewhat uncomfortable for the first wear,
but after a few hours, it should be a perfect fit.
In the area where you had massaged the glue, cut through
it using a pair of sharp scissors. Apply a bit more glue on
the endpoint to avoid fraying.

Position the clamp on your strap ends and tightly clamp on

using pliers.
Complete your ends with a closure and jump ring on one
tip, then only one jump ring on the other tip.

OceanofPDF.com
Macrame Deck Chair

Tools and Supplies

Wooden Deck Chair
Scissors
Rope measuring 65 meters
Method
Note: This project used a length of rope measuring sixty-
five meters, but as it has been mentioned, it is always nice
to have a little excess. The deck chair used was acquired
without a canvas seating with a slot design on either end
that is excellent for attaching the netting for macramé.
Step 1
Strip off the fabric from your deck chair. Then proceed to
fold rope strands (3m) into equal halves then knot them on
your chair’s top using reverse larks head knots. Redo this
twenty times through the length of the wood. In this
project, for the start of the netting, we will create a
triangular pattern of half knots. The order of the number of
your knots is as follows: three, six, nine, twelve, fifteen,
fifteen, twelve, nine, six and finally three.

Step 2
For the part of your netting that is left, start to tie square
knots. The knots in this pattern were spaced one and a half
inches apart between every row. For a more secure seating,
loop your netting’s side around your chair’s sides. Tuck the
ends that are loose inside the slot of the bottom section of
your deck chair when you are done making the knot for
your netting.

Pro tip: It is better that you have your netting taut instead
of loose; otherwise, when you sit on it, you may find
yourself almost at the ground.
Step 3
Use overhand knots to wrap the ends of your rope that are
loosely hanging beneath the slot. These knots help in
securing your netting so that when you sit, it will not slip.

OceanofPDF.com
Christmas Wreath

Tools and Supplies

Fresh Greenery
Hot Glue Gun
Scissors
Driftwood
Macrame Cotton cords
*Since this pattern is very summarized, we will be using
pictures for better understanding
Method
Note: You may use yarn in place of macrame cords, and if
you don’t have driftwood, simply go and fetch some. Shape
out a tree then use the macrame cord to tie your corners,
each touching the corners as shown:

Step 1
Add macrame cords, enough for making a pattern
Step 2
Once you are done adding your cords, use any basic
macrame knot to create a fun pattern.

Step 3
When you are done knotting, fasten the extra cords by
pulling below your driftwood then use hot glue to secure.
OceanofPDF.com
Macramé Heart Wall Hanging

Tools and Supplies

320 feet of cotton rope (this pattern used fuchsia) that is
5mm
Gold craft paint
24 inches long wooden dowel
Method
Step 1
Tip: Paint the ends of the dowel rod using gold craft paint
to give it a more classic appearance.
Cut out sixteen rope strands that are measuring twenty
feet each. To avoid fraying, always ensure that you apply
tape on the tips of your strands of rope – you can as well
use a little flame to burn off the ends.

Step 2
Make Lark’s head knot: Create larks head knots on your
pole using the sixteen rope strands.

Step 3
Make SKs: Using the first four left cords, start creating a
row of eight square knots.
Step 4
Make half square spirals: Create a row of seven half square
spiral knots, making sure to start using the third single
cord on the left side. This is just like making an SQ except
that you always begin from the exact same side. This is
going to cause your knot strand to start twisting. Continue
to weave every row of spiral knots that is vertical until you
achieve a length of around four inches.

Step 5
Make the heart pattern: Create a single square knot
underneath the second, third, fifth, and sixth spiral knots.
Form a row of six SQs across starting using the fifth single
left cord. Ensure that you are keen on keeping the row
even.

Step 6
Create one more row of seven ASKs starting using the third
single left cord.
Step 7
Create one ASK starting using the fifth individual left cord,
jump 4 single cords, create two ASKS, jump four single
cords, then create one last ASK.

Step 8
Create two ASKs starting using the third single cord on the
left side, jump four strands, create another SK, then create
two ASKs.

Step 9
Create two ASKs starting with the fifth single cord on the
left side, jump eight strands then create two ASKs

Continue the weaving as follows:

Make two ASKs beginning with the seventh single
cord on the left side, jump four cords then create two
ASKs.
Make four ASKs beginning with the ninth cord on the
left side
 Make three ASKs beginning with the eleventh cord
on the left side
Make two ASKs beginning with the thirteen cord on
the left side
Make one ASK in the middle beginning with the
fifteenth cord on the left side
Step 10
The finishing touches
Since you are done with the heart, roughly five inches
below, from your heart’s bottom edges, create eight SKs in
lines that are diagonal, starting with the first single cord on
the left side to come to a point at the bottom.

Create seven half-square spirals that are approximately

four inches in length beginning with the third single cord to
the left side
Create knots on the cords that are loosely hanging at
random heights. Clip off your wall hangings’ bottom to
shorten the sides, then advance down to a point in the
middle. Untangle the tips of the strands under the random
knots to have them fray gently.
For a touch of elegance, you may use the Larks head knot
to incorporate an extra cord on every tip of your wall
hanging.
OceanofPDF.com
Macramé Fringe Umbrella

Supplies
Sewing thread – in the or same or similar color as your
umbrella
Sewing needle
Scissors
Macramé cotton cord
Outdoor umbrella
Method
Note: These steps are for making fringe for one section on
the outdoor umbrella. Based on the number of ribs/sections
on the umbrella, you are going to require to rework
everything times that number
Step 1
Cut out the cord pieces: Cut out a strand of the cord to be a
bit longer than a section of the umbrella. Secure the line to
the two ends your umbrella ribs
Step 2
Cut out eighteen strands of macrame cord: Measure then
cut eighteen strands that are four feet in length then
connect them to the strand that is already attached to the
umbrella.
Step 3
Create square knots: Use square knots to link the strands
of the macrame cord. Rework this step for 3 rows.
Step 4
Clip off the extra pieces: Remove the curls from the fringes
that are twisted. If your cord is not twisted, you are done.

OceanofPDF.com
Macrame Candle Holder

Tools and Supplies

Scissors
Empty jar
Cotton yarn
Method
Step 1
Gather all the supplies
Step 2
Cut out a long cord for tying around the jar (cord A)
Step 3
Cut several long strands (cord B)
Step 4
Use the larks head knot to attach every cord B onto cord A.
Fold cord B into equal parts, then position it below cord A.
Then proceed to pull cord B ends through the loop and
fasten it by pulling. Repeat using each of the other cords B.

We will use Sennit of square knots to start the design—

wrap cord A around your jar and be sure to trim off the
ends. Make a square knot using cords 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Step 5
Cross the cord to the right (cord 4) to the left side below
the 2 center strands (cords 3 & 2) then above cord 1 (cord
on the left). Cross cord 1 (the cord on the left) to the right
side, above the 2 cords in the middle (2 and 3), then to the
bottom your cord on the right. Proceed to securely tie the
knot by pulling the left and right cords (four and one).

Cross the cord on the right (cord 4) over to the left side
above the two cords in the middle (3 and 2) then below
cord 1 (the cord on the left side). Take the cord on the left
(cord 1) to the right side below the 2 cords in the middle (3
and 2) then over cord 4 (the cord on the right). Then
securely tie the knot by pulling the cords to the left and
right (2 and 1).
Step 6
Create a three square knot sennit on every four cord set.
Note: Sennit is used to refer to chains of knots that have
been tied together, one after another.
Step 7
Row four – Create triangles of ASKs (alternating square
knots). Separate your cords into equal groups to create
triangles. Use ASKs to create the triangle – pick 2 cords
from the right (cord four and three) from the same Sennit
then 2 cords from the left side (cords two and one) from the
adjacent Sennit to create a square knot
For this pattern, to make the triangles, we followed the
following design - row four: seven ASKs, row five: six
ASKs, row six: five ASKs, row seven: fours ASKs, row eight:
three ASKs, row nine: two ASKs, row ten: 1 ASK.
We used that similar design to create three other triangles
Step 8
Diagonal double half hitch (from the left side to the right)
Grab the holding cord from the initial left ASK then cross it
diagonally above the working cords. Grab the working cord
furthest to your left and create a loop anticlockwise around
your holding cord. Firmly yank the working cord. Redo
using the exact cord to finish a double half hitch.
Use each of your remaining working cords to continue
creating double half hitch knots.

Step 9
The right side to the left
Grab the holding cord from the final right ASK then cross it
to your left-hand side against every working cord
diagonally. Grab the working cord that is furthest to your
right and create a clockwise loop against the holding cord.
Firmly yank the working cord. Redo using the exact cord to
finish the double half hitch. Then continue creating double
half hitch knots using each of the remaining working cords.

To complete your design, grab the working cords on the

right and left side then in a clockwise direction, create the
double half hitch knot.
Clip the tips of each of your cords. Add the candle, and
there you go.
OceanofPDF.com
Macramé Boho Candle Lanterns

Tools and Supplies

Scissors
A ring
Several feet of paracord
Method
Step 1:
Start by measuring the paracord: stretch it across your
outstretched arms from one fingertip to the other – the
longer, the better. Create a total of five strands with that
length.
Step 2
To prevent fraying, hold the strands against a flame then
‘burn’ them a little until they are nicely sealed.

Step 3
Next, pull the five paracord strands together through the
ring, making sure to pull the ring at the center of the
string, as shown in the image below, then create a knot –
make sure it is pulled/fastened tightly.

OceanofPDF.com
Step 4:
Put it on a flat surface, then spread it, making sure to
divide your strands into pairs. Form a knot in each pair
approximately a third of the length as shown below.
Step 5

Step 6
Create knots in the adjacent 2 strands, as in the above. You
are going to have a strand on either side remaining all
alone as shown below – just knot these 2 together

Step 7
Tie each of the strands together once more at the tip, then
be sure to pull it until it is tight.
Slide your mason jars into your newly made macramé
holder, and you are through.

Optional: You may apply a bit of gold puff paint for extra
flair. You may also hang flowers using this design.
OceanofPDF.com
DIY Macramé Wind Chimes

Tools and Supplies

Masking tape
Superglue
A pair of scissors
Gold split rings
Fishing line
1 ½” Gold macramé rings
3” gold macramé rings
Chimes
Yarn

Method
Step 1
Measure then cut out 8 strands of yarn, each with a length
of nine feet and seven inches (115”). Cut out 1 2.5 foot
strand and one five-foot strand
Step 2
Align your 8 long strands, locate the middle, then bend into
equal parts in order to have sixteen yarn strands for
knotting. Form a loop by taping a few inches from the top.
Set aside the 2 yarn strands that are left.

Step 3
Use the larks head knots to cover the loop. You are going to
begin at the top then work through the length from a single
side then redo on either side.
Step 4
Secure your loop by creating a gathering knot using the 2
yarn strands that are left. Clip off the excessive yarn.

Step 5
Separate your strands into 4 groups then begin to knot.
This pattern made 2 distinct designs; however, you may
make up your own setting of knots. We made a really easy
pattern by sticking with a half square spiral knot and a
square knot.

Step 6
Use a square knot to attach the three-inch rings to yank
apart the strands. You may add a bit of super glue to hold
your strands firmly together.

Step 7
Tie your pieces together using a knot once you are done
weaving the knots and clip off the extra.

Step 8
Attach the chimes onto your split rings, then mount them
on your macramé ring. Use super glue to hold your strands
firmly.

Step 9
Tie a fishing line on a small macramé ring and then attach
or tie it to the loop at the top of the hanger. And as you do
that, ensure the fishing line is long enough to allow for the
rings to hit the chimes.

Hang them and enjoy their sweet melody against the wind.

OceanofPDF.com
Conclusion
We have come to the end of the book. Thank you for
reading and congratulations on reading until the end.
I hope that you have learned more about Macramé and you
are excited to get started with your first project.
All the best and good luck!

OceanofPDF.com